Home

- Magaya Corporation

1. Note If your system is configured to prevent loading items that are in a Receiving location then you cannot load them in a release Click the Finish button The wizard creates the CR document for you auto matically The inventory records in your Magaya database are updated according to the items you just released You can print or email the release as needed You can also print labels 466 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE CHARGES TAB Ifa commodity has an expiration date entered the date will appear in the Cargo Release document default template Charges Tab To add charges to a Cargo Release go to the Charges tab and click the Add button Select from the pop up menu income or expense for general items or services or freight related E E Cargo Release General Inland Cana Commodities Charges Events POD Attachments Notes Internal Notes Status Description Prepaid Quantity Pice Amount Apply to Add J Open Inland Freight Cost Yes 1 00 45 00 45 00 UPS a EJ Open Inland Fresght Yes 1 00 55 00 55 00 Electronics ji 7 Totals Z n Generate Expense income Previt USD 45 00 USD 55 00 USD 10 00 MAGAYA TIP Income Use this to charge for documentation any crating fees storage or other fees not related to transportation Income Freight Charge Use t
2. You can also drag and drop attachments from a Microsoft Outlook email message Click the attached file in the Outlook message and drag it to the Magaya transaction Attachment window Result The photo or document is added to the transaction i e at the transac tion level To add an image to an item i e at the item level open the item s dialog box Add Attachment from Scanner Documents and images can be acquired directly from a scanner and attached to a transaction such as a Warehouse Receipt Cargo Release etc The attachment can also be saved to your computer or network so you have a copy of it The recommended file size is 150 kb or less Larger files are slow to email Before starting these steps make sure your scanner is plugged in and working properly 1 Goto the Attachment tab in the transaction you are working on such as a Warehouse Receipt or Cargo Release If you have not used the scanner 325 ATTACHMENTS ADD ATTACHMENT FROM SCANNER feature in Magaya Explorer previously the buttons for acquiring from the scanner will be grayed out and need to be activated To activate the Acquire buttons click on the Select Devices button Pickup Order Add TEstect Device JD WIE ave Internal 326 2 3 ATTACHMENTS ADD ATTACHMENT FROM SCANNER A dialog box will open Select Image capture devices Source Name WWT HP Scanjet 3970 So
3. 269 WHAT ACTIONS CAN PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER PRINT LABELS The Print Labels dialog box opens Print Labels Template for Print Range Pickup Order Number PU 69 All labels Available Labels Receving Label 4x3 Receving Label 45 Receiving Label 4x6 From Tracking Pickup Label 46 WMS Label 446 Ta W S Label 4x6 Shipper 0 Range of labels Total of Labels Print Setup Mame HP Laserjet P2015 Series PCL 6 Setup Printer Port T5001 ox Cancel Help Select the label size and printer setup Note The Tracking Pickup Label is used for online pickup orders e Change the amount of labels to print if needed The system defaults to printing ALL the labels as shown in this example 270 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER ACTIONS BUTTON FOR PICKUP ORDERS Actions Button for Pickup Orders You can perform the following actions from the Pickup Order document view by using the Actions button T F aw A 4 gt lim Filter Actions oom Page gt gt Options VS Transaction Listing Attachments Ip Orde Create a Copy Create Warehouse Receipt Exclude from Tracking Add to job Magaya Express Link Deli Sets Reset In Transit Hous Set Reset Delivered v6 H select Template History Note The Jobs option is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution View Transaction Listing Click on the Actions button and select Transactio
4. Status Description Prepaid Quantity Price Apply to Open Courier Cost Yes 1 00 54 39 UPS An of Upern CourerFee ves 1 00 65 27 Bill s Storage Units Generate Charges Totals Sh l Expense Income Profit ai USD 5439 USO6527 CSD 10 88 Delete When you click the Generate button a confirmation screen opens showing the generated charges and group them and create invoices for each customer The charges that will go to bills are also grouped and bills are created for each vendor Then these are posted into the Accounting system automatically for you a Confirm Accounting Generation The following bansachors were generaled please wany them and cick on OF bo add the Warcectors bo your accounting Otherness cick on Cancel to abort the operasion and fe the problem Type Number Applied to Date Emphas Accoun Hame Debt US0 Credi USO Ba Bil 214 FedEx Ground Tiea Admreiaio Accounts Popable 125 00 Invoice 182 Became Bike Shop 11 26 2014 Adminetiatoe Acoourls Aecem 155 00 Date for Transactions 11 26 2014 E apante Tatal USD 125 00 cerca tee You can also create accounting transactions from the Cargo Release by listing all the transactions for that release To do this follow these steps 475 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM A CARGO
5. mi C Define the default maximum capacity of a single put away task POD Mobile Specify maximum weight 0 00 kilogramtkg mia Specify maximum volume 0 00 Cubic metertm Scales Specify maximum number of pieces 0 4 Click the button with the three dots A dialog box opens to schedule replen ishment tasks 221 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE In the dialog box that opens check the box to enable to scheduling Then click the Add button A new dialog box opens which includes the settings for this replenishment schedule eS A am ae General Information Hame Schedule Repeating gt Enabled Task Frequency Frequency Daily Every l Dal Frequency Once at 9 02 33 AM Days 0 Start 12 00 00 AM End 11 59 59 PM Time Span Start 7 29 2015 l F End 7 29 2015 No End Description Will execute every 1 day s at 09 02 AM starting 7 29 2015 1 Enter a name for this replenishment schedule The system enables you to have more than one schedule 2 Select if you want this schedule to run one time or to repeat in ie J ao IZ PLE General Information Name Schedule Task Frequency Freguency Every l davis 222 3 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE Select how frequently you want the system to create Tasks which will be sent to the handheld units The options include daily weekly or monthly Daily
6. 00 0000 eae 51 SIE aA E T AEE E E E EA EE E PET EE EREE EEE E A E E 55 Been the Startup WiZard srs iranan sateen A EEE E E ERRES 55 Additional Startup Wizard Tips 0 cc ee eens 59 How to Use the Accounting Wizard 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 64 S A te baie 2 ee E E O A E a ea ee eet ae eS 66 Adda NeW EMplOy 66 65a ees Fk a aa ee a 8 Sa ee a 69 HOW AO DCU PerM SIONS necare rann Ee awn artes een ee eee 69 Set Up Passwords for Employees 0 00 0 ccc eee eens 75 scenario Limiting Permissions i04 3s eee ee eee NSS EEEE Sa TT ROS OV Gly IG Wi bo seed thc de bs bree dues ao ardor eae ede eet AE a 79 Add a Role to an Employee sisrsscererierenarritiria 599 paT EE SERED 79 Chapter 6 Magaya Explorer Interface ccc ccc cece cece eee cece eens 85 Introduction to the Magaya Explorer 0 0 0 0 0 0c eens 85 What Can You Do in the Magaya Explorer 0 0 0 ee 86 Menus and OOD als cco 5 es ohana a Sea ee te abe ee ee eke 87 NOP TOODA ytrede nra en odd ot aw eee gd ore a ER a 87 MIn Men eas oes ace ig E e 9 0 Orci OLE i E rE eA 88 Folders and Subfolders te Gis sides we edie a a eh Pee Ea ee oe wh Ce 92 HOWtO AUG POS cnc5ccat a ohne cess cbs heed bah eee eRe wee eee A 93 Magaya Explorer Folders Overview 0 00 c eee eee eee n ees 94 Magaya Network Folder 24424455 h44 209 54 Pode ee EE E oR eee wet S 94 Tasks FONET 2 39 4 2554 05 34 aoe S Gate DER OS CE ERE ERE oe ee 96 OVOS FOIE g 140 Ga
7. Save Copy S o Save to POF UNITED STATES Exit ID by Magaya Shipping Label The Magaya shipping label contains the Magaya tracking number Cargo Release number air waybill or Bill of Lading number for shipments using the Magaya Supply Chain Solution or Magaya Cargo System This identifies not only the item but which shipment the item belongs to This label will usually also have the shipper and consignee on it This label can be scanned to verify the items to be shipped to guarantee accuracy using the Verify Packing List option in the software if needed 241 ID BY MAGAYA SHIPPING LABEL 242 To print a Magaya shipping label go to the document view of the Cargo Release or shipment and click on the arrow on the side of the Print button and select Print Labels These labels are used to identify pallets after repacking items When you include the pallet in a shipment you can still use the pallet ID to locate the pallet When you print a shipping label and place it on the pallet you can scan the barcode on the shipping label or the pallet ID label to identify it The system saves both numbers CHAPTER 9 PICKUP ORDERS INTRODUCTION Chapter 9 Pickup Orders Introduction A Pickup Order is a document that outlines the terms for the delivery of goods from one location such as a supplier to another location such as your ware house The Pickup Order specifies the location of the pickup identifies t
8. 421 REPLENISHMENT FULFILL REPLENISHMENT MOVE TASKS 422 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY INTRODUCTION Chapter 12 Counting Inventory Introduction Counting all the items in inventory confirms the current state of inventory and it allows a company and its accounting department to make inventory adjust ments to the physical inventory Inventory must be counted in a Count Session to verify amounts A count session can represent a Cycle Count or a Physical Count Many accountants require a company to do two or three complete cycle counts per year to avoid the typical annual physical inventory A complete physical inventory must include all locations even if the system shows them as empty A cycle count normally includes all locations within a zone a row or aisle It is very important that all locations are counted to complete the cycle In Magaya software you can create a Count task using the Warehouse Inspector in your Magaya Explorer and send the count task to the handheld devices running the Magaya WMS Mobile application for users to perform the counts The following section explains these steps Configure Inventory Adjustments The Magaya system version 9 3 and higher can adjust the accounting needed when inventory items are lost found or damaged This process can be done after a Count Session which you can automate your Magaya system to start a wizard for it right after a Count Session is completed The inventory adjus
9. Deposits Deposit List Checks Check List Chart of Accounts This is like a general ledger listing all accounts and what type they are categorized as for example Services is categorized as Income and Utilities Expense is categorized as Expense You can add accounts that are specific to your business Items and Services This shows codes for the services you provide such as crating fees and what account name that service is associated with You can add items and services that are specific to your business and automate charges See the Magaya Softwar Customization Manual for details Invoices and Invoice List Bills and Bill List Payments and Payment List Deposits and Deposit List Checks and Check List Accounting functions are covered in the Magaya Software Accounting Manual 101 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS MISCELLANEOUS Right click a shipment folder to see menu options The Shipment transactions and their documents are organized by House and Master lq From Online Shipments E Outgoing Shipments Sl 2013 if Air ie Ocean CceanShipmentS Waster H 4 Shipment5s shipment H 4 Shipment59 B aae E Bill of Lading Master f documents Dock Receipt E Cargo Manifest Miscellaneous In the Miscellaneous folder add templates such as Microsoft Word documents that you want to use in Shipments a g Incoming shipments Microsoft Office Word De aq
10. E ka D Network aning Results Transactions Ctrl F date From 2 1 20 Quick Find Ctl Q Entity Finder Ctrl E Screened Object Find Wehicle Folder Alt FS Find next F3 Network To log in and out of the Magaya Network and to access the Communication Center to exchange Magaya transactions with others in the Magaya Network such as destination agent who also uses Magaya soft ware 87 MENUS AND TOOLBARS MAIN MENU Main Menu 88 Send To send messages within the Magaya Network such as to an agent A dialog box opens displaying the list of your contacts See the topic Overview System to System Transactions for more details 5 24 T A G S Email Task Refresh Folders Email To send documents via email See the topic Batch Email for details on batch emailing Task To create to do lists for employees or to send a Task to a handheld device running the Magaya WMS Mobile application Other buttons Print Delete Refresh and the Folders button Use the Folder button to hide the list of folders on the left side of Magaya Explorer and widen the document view You can also click and drag the line between the folders list and the document pane to widen or reduce it NOTE If a button is grayed out you may not have access to that function due to permissions restrictions Above the buttons on the toolbar are other commands This is the Main Menu toolbar The commands
11. How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS CREATE A MOVE TASK INFORMED MOVES status of the task will be completed It is best to click this only after the items have been moved If you want the changes to be pending click this button You can return to it later Cargo Movernent Wizard En Create Task or Commit Changes You can create a task and assign it to a handheld user that will execute it or vou can commit the changes immediately Movement Number g Commit this movement in the Following way Create a task For a handheld user Handheld user wMSUser1 The user could be empty Commit changes right away Let this movement as pending It will be committed later Transfer information Movement Type Local 7 Mobile Location lt Back Finish Cancel Help The Movement number is assigned based on the numbering set up in Maintenance gt Configuration gt Document Numbers e To transfer cargo from one warehouse to another select Transfer from the Movement Type field Use Local for local deliveries For more information on Transfers see the section Transfer Items Between Warehouses Click the Finish button when done When items are moved the information about the location of the items in the warehouse is available in your Magaya database and can be viewed online in the online tracking program Magaya LiveTrack You can also see items in the C
12. Items amp Services list provides an option to view just the inventory item charges or to view the charges that are not related to inventory OTHER ACTIONS WITH INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITIONS INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITIONS LIST Other Actions with Inventory Item Definitions In addition to creating Inventory Item Definitions using the Add button you can perform other tasks in the Inventory Item Definitions list by clicking the Actions button lt i 455 Liners for juice storage Florida Natural Orang 451237 Fotting sail 45 1237 Potting oil 4 MTH Trek 4 Seres Mountain 3454 Trowel a3 343 Bos 33 fe 44 garden stone 152462 Bamboo Stakes 152126 Tree staking twine 125048 Wheelbarrow 12 PIPE 540 PYC Pipe Schedule 40 11111111 Laptop 111111 Laptop 1 4 PIPE 540 PVC Schedule 40 Pipe Hvponex Hi pores Tropical Landscaping Santa Rosa Better Toole Inc Tropical Landscaping Other Reports Reports View Inventory View Arriving Items ca m e A a a A a a 5 Import Export T 0 0 0 Ja LT Choose Columns Update quantity of pieces r 7 amp add Edit Delete actions To create a report of In and Out information select Reports and choose a summary or a detailed report by the Item Definition or by the Inventory Item To view the inventory for an item select the item and select View Inventory A list will open showing all the items of this type that are on hand To close the
13. NN Grade E0 in Update quantity of pieces shirt ee rr ie E 1 g w 1 VP w g Add Edit Delete Filter Actions Detail IN AND OUT CARGO REPORTS IN AND OUT REPORTS The Summary view of the In and Out report shows one line per part number initial inventory Start items in items out and ending inventory quantity In and Dut tat Part Sumber Summary Dates Custom From 1 1 300 Toa amp amim w HWC Cargo Company In and Out by Part Number Summary January 1 through June 2 2010 Part Number 4p Description q Customer 4 hMTh Trek 4 Series bl 45 1237 Potting sail 455 Liners for juice ya 6145692 92 inch Rebar Deco Truss summary T1544 747 jet engine In amp Out Rep ort PWS589 Air Filter ANd 1 Nike Airkiax ruri BK 22 Adidas Soccer s CERVELOSS Cervelo 53 Cervelo Bicycles CHA 1 chihu Post Ca Lyon Craiters CTs Pruning shears Tropical Landsc OT 203 5 rebar Ceca Truss Co Pittsburgh Steel FL 150 Pipe flanges AN KDOS TEVA Teva Sandals LC233 Chihuly Glass M Lyon Crafters NB2OO New Balance 20 OLY New Balance nu PS125 5 rebar SteelWorks Fabr Pittsburgh Steel Ro 100 sand Tropical Landsec 5 1 Baseball gloves TEYA TT Teva Beach S Bi Lo amp ts T G O ii G aa a GOD ns O OGO GOO i ih Do hJ Co Mere meee O DO GOGO O O O ODO OGOGO G FI i F3 on Tad 2g De
14. Procedures include Location Definitions Warehouse Zone Definitions Sequencing to Put Away and Pick Items and the Tasks for WMS Mobile on handheld scanners e Replenishment Including configuring your Magaya system and defining minimum quantities to create automated replenishment tasks for WMS Mobile on handheld scanners Business Case for Directed Operations The picking operation in a warehouse is often the most expensive task in a ware house Issues that contribute to the high cost include e Different SKUs in one bin making picking more difficult and slower Tasks that don t list locations in a logical sequence making warehouse workers waste time travelling back and forth between distant and nearby locations instead of picking items from a nearby location first before visiting a distant location e Tasks that send a warehouse worker to the same location many times during one day instead of consolidating the trips Not storing frequently picked items in easily accessed locations Not keeping inventory full in picking locations By improving these processes and having a software that can implement those changes a warehouse will see cost reductions error reductions and an increase in efficiency 414 DIRECTED OPERATIONS GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED A GUIDE TO PREPARING A SMART WAREHOUSE Getting Started A Guide to Preparing a Smart Warehouse To optimize your warehouse apply Directed Operations by a
15. The external tracking number will fill in automatically in this tab when using the CubiScan Scale Integratin or when a Manual Receive Task is done on the hand held with WMS Mobile This external tracking number also prints on labels 302 COMMODITIES ATTACHMENTS TAB The system can find the number later Click the Find button on the top toolbar and Select Quick Find Then select Tracking Number and enter the number Quick Find Transaction Type Tracking Number g Transaction Humber enter number Find Cancel Help Extra Info To learn about different ways to identify items in your Magaya system see the topic Identify Items or search for the keywords identify items in the Magaya Knowledgebase Attachments Tab On the Attachments tab of the Commodity dialog box click the Add button to add a document or photograph Use the other buttons as needed Any attach ment added here can be viewed from any other transaction that includes this item For more information see the topic Attachments When you are finished entering information in the Commodity dialog box click the OK button All the information will be saved You will be returned to the WR dialog box If you need to add more commodities repeat the steps listed above 303 COMMODITIES ADD A CONTAINER Add a Container If you need to add a container click on the Add Cont button A dialog box opens to enter the container i
16. This will allow you to set up those currencies in the Configuration section of the Magaya software Tip Setting your local home currency will make it easier to calculate your taxes in your home country Importing the Schedule B D and K codes 59 STARTUP WIZARD ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS 60 The system connects to a Web service and imports the latest codes into your system Import Schedules B D and K The Schedules B D and K codes are useful in United States The system will import them automatically M Schedules B Commodity Classification M Schedules O United States Ports IM Schedules K Other Countries Ports These codes are used when exporting cargo which must be declared with the United States Customs Schedule B codes identify various products the codes are also known as Commodity Classification or 10 digit HTS codes NOTE After completing the wizard you can also add Commodity Classifi cations in the Commodity Classification subfolder under the Warehousing folder for commodities you work with frequently e Schedule D codes identify ports in the U S e Schedule K codes identify ports in other countries Note When a new release of Magaya software is available the latest code infor mation is added when you update your system All existing data is saved Select Carriers In the screens to select carriers scroll through the list to find a carrier you use frequently Select it from the
17. field click the dropdown menu to select the name of the entity where the cargo will be picked up This may or may not be the customer The address fills in automatically Change it as needed 0 In the Destination part of the screen select the port of destination from the dropdown menu In the Destination Name field select the name of the final consignee from the dropdown menu 505 CREATE A CARGO QUOTATION STEPS 4 Commodities Tab Quotation Cargo Status Fackage Description J In Quote Bundle Plumbing pipes Type 1 J In Quote Bundle PYC Pipe Schedule 40 Totals Volume 301 05 fF 3733 82 Vb 35 Pieces Weight 2705 06 Kg 6140 00 b Click the Add button on the Commodities tab to add cargo into the Commodity dialog box The status of the items is In Quote when you create the Quotation As items are added the total weight and volume is updated on the tab To add a container click the Add Cont button Enter details in the dialog box Additional details on adding commodities is available in the topic Add Commodities in Chapter 10 of the Magaya Supply Chain Solution Operations Manual 506 ACTIONS FOR QUOTATIONS STEPS 5 Charges Tab Quotation Cargo General Routing Commodities Charges Events Attachments Notes Status Description Prepaid Quantity
18. s Organize locations later The locations will not be placed in any sequence They will remain as they are If you select this option this will be the last step in the wizard 234 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES DEMOTE A WAREHOUSE Organize locations now This option opens another screen arenose Uerrotion Wirare Bulk Location Sort This sorean will help vou sort the locations at a high level This makes it easier when manually arranging the locations in the next sore You can choose bo append the mew locations to the bop or bottom of the existing sequence D Append to bop C Append to bottom Instead you can choose to sort the entire sequence from scratch Alphabetically ascending gt Alphabetically descerding Fullest bo enmptiest L Emptiest bo Fullest Lowest to highest C Highest bo lowest Heaviest to lightest C Lightest to heaviest Append the locations to an existing sequencing Or sort the sequence The next screen shows the locations that will be moved Here you have more options to move any location up or down in this Picking sequence Another option is to use this same sequence for the Put Away sequence by checking the box Manually Sort Locations In this screen you can organize the locations in the optimal sequence Locations wil be given priority From top bo bottom Mobile locations are ignored Type Zone Storage Test Zone Storage Test Zone Loc 1 best Storage Test Zone I Receive as Receiving
19. the folders Consi gnete Information Hatan Capiki Hie ITiS HA 19ih Sirer Aami FL ir LEANED States E H Adari F Hide the Folders list to see a document in the whole frame of your Magaya Explorer Also widen or reduce the Folders pane by clicking and dragging the line between the Folders pane and the document window Right click on a folder or transaction to view more options To set permissions for a folder per employee see the topic Permissions How to Add Folders Magaya software includes a default set of folders for operations and accounting tasks You can add folders to Magaya Explorer by following these steps 1 2 3 4 5 Go to the location where you want to make a new folder Click on File Select New Select Folder Enter the folder name Some of the folders do not have the Copy function available If the option is grayed out that means it is not available for that folder For many folders you can right click on the folder to access a pop up menu of functions The functions vary depending on the folder you are working with 93 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS MAGAYA EXPLORER FOLDERS OVERVIEW Some will only have a Properties option Others such as shipment folders have many options Magaya Explorer Folders Overview The following defines the default folders and the subfolders available in the Magaya software and pro
20. 409 IN AND OUT CARGO REPORTS IN AND OUT REPORTS 410 For each part number in the In and Out report you will see the inventory you have at the beginning of the time period selected the quantity that arrived in a Warehouse Receipt WR during that time the quantity released for that time period and inventory remaining at the end of that time period This report shows item quantities as of the date you select in the date range You can create reports for a past time period also To create an In and Out report follow these steps 1 Goto the Inventory Item Definitions list 2 Click on the Actions button select Reports and In and Out reports detailed or summary Inventory tem Definitions Inventory Item Definitions Part Number Description Model WEE Wilson Basketball Miami Heat TEVA F 76 Teva Beach Sandal Beach Comber SG 100 Baseball Gloves Sosa ATS20 Rattan Chair Square Sol ATR30 Rattan chair round Sky ATEO Rattan couch White Sands Al 444 Rattan Glass Table Set Condo Al ss Rattan cottee table Sunset AT100 Rattan chair Corona A5S 100 Sand River Stone HB2 Reebok court shoes womens Court CION Other Reports park Plug Iridium PT Stl e e OLY In and Out Summary In and Gut Detailed Filtered by Item Definition HE20 view Arriving Items In and Gut Detailed Filtered by Inventory Item LP 250 7 LC223 Import Ws Magnets GL55 LESH Export Haes LeBron KDS p Rocky OT20 Choose Columns
21. BD aniving Last month BC Sportir a Last month to date W aniving Te ceri caihe ropical Lar E Arriving Last six months d s Crane y Aving Hest Week apanese G ae Nest month 1 wi Aving Al BC Sportir wi Ariving Custom ilami T est WD aAniving Last year T ln Process Last pear to date BC Sportir After changing the date in the date fields click the Refresh button the blue arrows wrapping in a circle to load the transactions for the date range Use the red Stop button to stop the search at any time Save a List View To save a view of a list first filter the list and then click the star button and select Save this View Save this wiew Volume FF Online Creata 0 25 Tropical Lanc sawe this wiew as 0 00 5 00 3 04 Tropical Landscaping 0 50 4720 Manage views 105 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS WORKING WITH THE LIST VIEW 106 In the dialog box the system provides a default list name but you can change the name To exclude the date range from the saved list view uncheck the box for Save time frame This means any new transactions for this customer shipper or other criteria you filtered will be included in the list view any time you display that list at any time Custom wiew view name ickun Order 1 Creator Administrator Save time Frame Published If you want to save a list for for only the time period in the filtered list check the box Save time frame You can add
22. Dear sys_reciplent_n Regards oe baseball glove warehouse_receipt l a d Mum hl a ml s Use selected tems only _ Request Delivers Receipt Importance Email body in HTML format Request Read Receipt Sensitivity Send One eMail per Recipient EZ The CC and BCC fields can be used to include other people in this batch emailing in addition to the people in the transactions you selected from the list There is an option at the bottom of the screen that is checked by default to send one email per recipient The format can be configured to be PDF HTML or Magaya Document format You can also add attachments 4 Enter the subject line message text and any attachments 126 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE FILTER BUTTON 5 Checkmark or uncheck any options as needed such as Request Delivery Receipt 6 Click the Send button when you are ready to send the batch of email messages Learn more about email templates in the Magaya Software Communications Manual The Filter Button The Filter button allows you to select how you want to view the information in a list For example you may want to see only transactions for the past week or transactions for a certain customer or destination The Filter button has two options Standard and Advanced The Filter button offers options that are specific to the list you are viewing For example the Filter button available for Checks has fields that
23. Find Items Filter Configure Count Warehouse details Locations Show empty zones H Yard Status Descript FI ZoneB DP On Hand Baseball Sfaf BILA l WD On Hand Louisville T 35 1k Baseball gloves 18 00 78 00 70 00in Box J OnHand Tulips T 25 16 Louisville Slugger baseball bats 42 008 0058 00i Find Location fat B2RA Enter the location code and click Find The location will be highlighted 377 WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR FIND ITEMS Find Items Filter Items 378 To find items in your database click on the Find Items button Ss ml Move Find Location Warehouse details Yard one B one Default one Ez Y k D Find Items Filter Configure Count Locations Show empty zones Status Descripti a Find only on record code and name _ Match Case Enter a part number or an item name The system can find full or partial item names The zone s that contains the item will be displayed To view all loca tions again click on the Unfilter button To find only on record code and name check the box To match the case upper case and or lower cap letters click the box Match Case The Filter button contains two options Standard and Advanced By clicking on the arrow on the side of the Filter button you can select the type of filter you want The Standard filter opens the Commodities Filter dialog box with options such a
24. Magaya WMS Operations Manual D Warehouse Zones amp Locations Setup WMS Mobile Wireless Infrastructure Setup Import Existing Inventory Data a a a Receive and Release Cargo Count Inventory and more Magaya WMS Operations Manual Table of Contents Chapter 1 How to Use This Manual ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee nnes 9 TIVE OCC TIONG smsni sense dao E Sasa a weet ed a Gem eRe as 9 How This Man alis Organized 33 224 54d ihhs eG ads BAS ERS Od eRe ae ed 9 W ere to Find GD cee iins otto ao Ga e ee iced Hae eas TAMRON ee Eae 10 Chapter 2 Warehouse Management Overview cccccccccccccccccees 11 Magaya WMS Processes Overview 0 0c cc ccc ee eee eens 12 Warehouse Processes OVervVieWw e lt sd5s5 44h aves ore We hee EAEE N 14 Warehouse Floorplans and Locations 0 0 00 eee eee 16 Directed OPeralions aspri Cenaa AERO Eee ae eee 17 ACCOUN IC CTALEC paeta aa a aa a E 17 ljventory Counting gf suo oot ens eies pisn ii a ee 18 OnE TrA KOT e r ec E E E A Ae E E E Ate Anca 20 Chapter 3 Magaya Software Installation 0 ccc cece cece ee cee eee 21 TAC OCUCHION 6 x 6 4 hci teaed both hia 44 helene de eaameres aed eee 21 Syste Requirements serasa tended rekon ieee bn edhe aha sade hn kw eis lt 21 Install MagavaSOlware seseriai de Oe daw ha eel eee ea ta tee eal sass 22 Steps to Install on a Single Computer or Server 0 0000s 22 Steps for Client Server Installation o
25. RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT SUPPLIER TAB The Origin and Destination information fields are optional If you know where the cargo is going the Destination field can be used later to filter the cargo or create consolidations The only ports displayed here are the ones with the mode of transport selected The origins and destinations displayed in these lists are from the Ports List If a port you need is not visible in the list click on the plus sign in the dropdown toolbar and select the port from the list or manually add the port Supplier Tab Select the supplier this may be the same as the shipper or the company that provided the cargo to the shipper You can modify the address for the supplier for this transaction if needed by clicking on the Change button Warehouse Receipt General ShipperConsignee supplier Carrier Commodities Charges Events Aktar Hame Invoice Mumber samen Shoe Manufacturing Ltd y 12 00 Address Purchase Order Number 100 Liwan Plaza PO fos Guangzhou CHINA MAINLAND cos j Ce Enter the invoice number and or purchase order if available These numbers can be useful later to find this transaction because this transaction number is the reference number of your customer Click on the next tab 285 COMMODITIES CARRIER TAB Carrier Tab Select the inland carrier usually an over land trucking company Warehouse Receipt General Shipper Consignee Suopher Can
26. THE ACTIONS BUTTON 136 calculate totals Reports open in tabs You can switch between two or more reports to view them To copy a document such as a Warehouse Receipt WR click on the Actions button and select Create a Copy A dialog box will open with all the fields filled in based on the WR that you were viewing Change any fields as needed Click the OK button to save and see the new WR To exclude a document from tracking click on the arrow on the side of the Actions button and select Exclude from Tracking This adds a checkmark next to the menu choice Exclude from Tracking This is used if a transaction is not complete and you do not want it to be viewed via Magaya LiveTrack To change the WR so it is included in tracking click on the Actions button arrow again and select Exclude from Tracking The checkmark will be removed To view the history for the WR click the Actions button not the arrow on the side of the button A dialog box opens If there is any history it will appear in the list Select an item and click the View button to open the dialog box for that item or click the Go To button go to the document History for Warehouse Receipt 34 Type Name Date Shipment frrl2a 12 15 2008 Pickup Order 13 12 15 2008 Purchase Order 2 12715 2008 Job 2 12 15 2008 The Actions button offers many options depending on the transaction you are working on Examples e When viewing a check the option to void the transac
27. Volume Weight Wolume Poundf lb v Volume Weight Dimensional Factor 166 00 irr 7 Ib 42 CONFIGURE WMS WMS MOBILE CONFIGURATION These measurement units will be used in all transactions done by the handheld devices Warehouse Equipment This is for descriptions of the types of equipment used by warehouse personnel such as forklifts etc Then you can match the equip ment to an employee if you set up this function in the WMS Mobile Users dialog box which is accessible from the Configuration screen In the Warehouse Equipment List dialog box click on the Add button to adda piece of equipment A new dialog box opens Warehouse Equipment List Description Make Model Serial Employee Forklift 1 Hyster H0100 Cart 1 194235 Warehouse Equipment General n D Mobile Location Aecenve Move Pick Count Load Current User Tasks that can be executed with this equipment In the dialog box enter the description make model and serial number of the equipment Also check or uncheck the tasks that can be performed with this equipment Click OK when done to return to the configuration screen Tasks Also check or uncheck the tasks that can be performed with this equip ment Click OK when done to return to the configuration screen Mobile Location Equipment can be defined as a Mobile Location in your system This is useful to track items when moving them or co
28. Warehouse option if you want to ship out cargo as you received it by Warehouse Receipt To select all the WRs filter the list and click the Mark Al button All items are availabe to be selected except those in Pending Tasks or On Hold e Click the Inventory option if you are shipping by part numbers To select all the items under one part number select the PN and click Mark All Extra Info If you want your inventory items to display in a certain order in the Inventory tab for example by expiration date set the Inventory Type field on the Identification tab of the Inventory Item Definition dialog box Options include FEFO First Expiring First Out which will sort the list to show the items that will expire first the ones with the oldest 459 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE date at the top of the list To see the expiration dates in this screen click the Configure button and select Choose Items Columns Create Cargo Release Wizard Select the cargo to release Tou can select cargo either from Warehouse Receipts or pom Expiration dates shown Warehouse Inventor Lot Number Locations In FEFO order Fill in reverse O00 8 Part Number 123 123 3 11 20 2015 Makal 0 8 Part Number 123 123 5 12 04 2015 Unmark ali 5 0 E1 Ethernet card Dell E 5 0 E HP250 HP Laptop Pieces Filter ED 5 123 Part Numb
29. button the system will make the item disappear from the list and verify it by doing the following for you If it is lost it will find the appropriate items in the location and will move them to a temporary lost repository To view this repos itory click on the View Lost or View Found button 437 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY ACCEPT A COUNT SESSION Before moving them to the lost repository it will search for those items to see if they were found already somewhere else in this case they should exist in the found repository If they exist in the found repository that means the items were already found at another location and we do not need to report them as lost To view these items click on the View Lost or View Found button A dialog box opens listing the items This list can also be opened by clicking on the arrow on the side of the Counts button on the Warehouse Inspector toolbar Status Description Package Places Location Code Previous Location T Un Hand Pruning shears Box 45 LOO BILE ap UnHand Bamboo Stakes Bundle 35 L I BILE _Lost Repository If the item is found in a location the system will search in the lost repository to see if it was lost from another location if it is in the lost repository then it will move it to this location that is being processed where it was found If the item did not exist in the lost repository the system will create a new item to reflect the found
30. promote it using the Warehouse Promotion wizard which is available by right clicking a warehouse zone icon when you are in the Warehouse Inspector To learn more about promoting a warehouse see the topic Sequencing in the Warehouse Next define the warehouse locations within each zone Second each truck must be entered as a mobile location in your system For details on how to set up the zones and locations please see Chapter 7 in this manual 393 TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES SETUP This screenshot of the Warehouse Inspector shows warehouse zones and loca tions both mobile locations trucks and rack locations inside the warehouse File Edit Sales Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting Reports Options Q gt A a te Pa w z Back Pickup Receive Release Find s Huo amp Move Find Location Find Items Filter Operations a Magaya Network fl Tasks E3 ia Quotations Warehousing p Pickup Orders P Pickup Order List Warehouse Receipts gt Warehouse Receipt List Warehouse details Locations bliami Warehouse E one A dh Commodity List Zone B 2 Cargo Releases Mobile Locations 2 Cargo Release List ml HCT E Cargo Movements Jat AFT E E Houston warehouse Cargo Movement List CI QUALITY CONTROL ie Package Types Locations 5 fat A1 Warehouse Inspector El Aa DB Inventory Item Definiti
31. s optional and can be left blank Example if you have 1 box with 12 items inside you have a Quantity of 12 To track the value per item enter the value of one item in the Unitary value field For example if the box has 12 items and each item is valued at 50 enter 50 in the Unitary value field The system calculates the PicK UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB total value for you If your Inventory Item Definition for a Part Number includes the value it will be filled in here Part Number Modet FL 150 150 Description Fipe flanges ANSI 150 Fackage Type Example 1 box 1 Pieces Dimension L s x H 25 00 25 00 12 00 lin By Totals Total Measure weight alll 7 00 Ih m Volume 4 44 4 34 Unit Unitary Value Total Value ea 15 00000 180 00 Click OK to save the information in the Commodity dialog box and return to the Commodity tab in the Pickup Order Other buttons on the Commodity tab help you with different functions some you may use and others you may not Let s look at them to learn about the options When you click a line item that line is highlighted or selected and certain buttons become active on the tab The Edit Button Click it to open the dialog box and make changes The Delete Button Click it to delete that line item The Detail Button Click it to open the dialog box for a container or package The Detail button is not acti
32. 91 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS INTRODUCTION Folders and Subfolders Introduction 92 The folders and subfolders in Magaya Explorer contain many of the functions and documents for the tasks you do every day To view folders and subfolders Click the plus sign next to the folder name to expand and view the list of subfolders under the folder heading Alternatively when you click on a folder the list of subfolders is displayed in the detail pane p k Page One a Magaya Network 4 Tasks o ig Quotations E Jobs E B Purchasing Click a plus sign Sales to expand and view G f Bookings subfolders or items eG Warehousing Gis Warehousing a Pickup Orders B Pickup Order List Warehouse Receipts Warehouse Receipt List Commodity List NOTE The folder list may also be called a tree view Here we will use the terms folder and subfolder FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS How TO ADD FOLDERS To hide the folders list click the Folders button on the top toolbar Click it again to view the folder list Mh fee Cape Company Magma bepiorar ES or aca He Edi Ser Ope Meee Dimri Bee et Arnceanbirg Pept Opie Heda oO oO w gt d 2 x 2 3 2 3 2 Fodder Doi ch aa CEHE Gasse Fri liad Ferat wre Irv in Tak Sitti ef vamala See gat re Click the Folders button HVS Cargo Comp 7950 BAY Sard Sireat rasa ray sand to hide or show TT UNTED STATES _
33. Check the box to Summarize entries to see the part numbers grouped together Inventory Adjustment Wizard Item Summary Please review the items that will be used to generate the adjustments Identification Type Part Number Description Total Pieces wi Part Humber 45 1237 POTTING SOIL 30 wll Part Number 2454 TROWEL z0 T Part Humber 152126 TREE STAKING TWINE 30 T Part umber 125646 WHEELBARR 50 summarize entries 449 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT The next screen displays the recommended inventory account that will be used for the adjustment Inventory Adjustment Wizard Adjustment Configuration Please define the accounts division and entity that will be used to generate the adjustments Inventory amp ccount Division The next screen displays the accounting transaction that will be created by the wizard Inventory Adjustment Wizard Generated Transactions Please review the generated transactions prior to saving them in the database IF correct Finish the wizard Number Type Applied to Transaction Dake Amount USC Bill Inventory Adjustment vendor 12 10 2013 0 00 1 450 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT The total for this Bill is zero Double click the Bill to open it Note that the Charges section shows the cost of the inventory items E Accounting Transaction Bill Adjustments Events Attachments Not
34. Click on the Actions button and select Transaction List The Transaction List opens Pickup Orders Transaction Listing for Pickup Order PU 32 Transaction Listing for Pickup Order PU 32 Type Humber Applied to Date Employee lnvoIce 100 B ae 097 3 010 Operations Statt Go to document Frink Batch Link Bill x Receive Payment Choose Columns Export History 2 In the Transactions List click the Actions button and select an option Link Bill Link Invoice Receive Payment or Pay Bill Enter the information needed in the dialog box See more details below These transactions will be Posted immediately unlike the charges entered in the Charges tab When you are in the Transaction Listing you can create the following accounting transactions directly from a Pickup Order by using the Add button at the bottom of the list Invoice You can create an invoice for the Pickup Order You can also create accounting transactions when you are in the Pickup Order dialog box by using the Generate button on the Charges tab An example of the options for creating accounting transactions is the ability to add inland freight charges to a Pickup Order by using the Transaction Listing Add button instead of the Charges tab in the Pickup Order Make any edits to the transaction if needed You can view the Pickup Order dialog box or go to the document The screen is similar for Credit Memos Bills and Credits Credit Mem
35. Enable Automatic creation for Warehouse Receipts WA _ Pickup Orders PK Quotation AT Cargo Releases CA Export Shipments Import Shipments Air Master Shipments AME Air Master Shipments AM1 Ait House Shipments AHE Air House Shipments AHI Ucean Master Shipments OME Ocean Master Shipments OMI Ocean House Shipments OHE Ocean House Shipments OHI Ground Master Shipments GME Ground Master Shipments GMI Ground House Shipments GHE Ground House Shipments GHI Do not show in documents Modes of Transportation The price for this charge depends on other charges in the transaction For more details on custom charges see the Magaya Software Accounting Manual Add name address participation and more Commissions To set up salesperson s commissions see the Magaya Software Customization Manual Reports To create a report of salespersons commissions click on the Actions button in the Salesperson s list and select the report from the menu Also see the reports menu on the top of your Magaya Explorer 149 MAINTENANCE FOLDER CONTACTS Contacts Employees 150 Use the Contacts folder to add more than one contact person for a Customer Vendor or other entity in your Magaya system You can also add a different contact person for different departments of a single company Any Contacts added to the My Company Info dialog box appear here These
36. F 5 Contained tem WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS RELATED COLUMNS Click the Add button to move the selected column from the list of Avail create your list of Selected Columns Selected Columns Type Integer ay Se Outgoing Shipment Vessel Add the column Text Date Text Text Text Field Type Text Visible Word Wrap width Align Left F Commodity Type Outs F Manufacturer F E Outgoing Shipment vessel _ Add Columns 113 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS TOOLBARS IN DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS 7 E Pech Corder Let E Hr bani Worchowss baH La WF Ciy A E age Bees g Sago Bee Lit Cargo Miers Cian Pismo List ID ran rapsi beste ba bris Cry ire Boies 4 Shake Package with data ss Diri Dupage Vere 9 Pe New column displayed ff Sst Harom Elad Harner Eimi H aai PAAC pear Sacheecdul Pipe Flee OH Ed Pall pear icheki Fie irgi Pga ryp AH Fipa largar AH SI Pail games Each Pipa ir Move the column so it appears where you would like it Click OK The Commodity List now displays the new column and the vessel which is pulled from the outgoing shipment transactions a zi a if Hini Dair EA Beige Haipiurt B eae fe Laie RA is b i Meee pr z Back sooi H upare baai rran boots Bipa bends Hbk basi Black beoti Enge ad angna coolant pHa See eee eo eB Ei 8 The new column is also available to create repo
37. General Identification E Schedule B Browse Code Mm 8712006000 O 9712002600 O 8712001070 O 8512100000 O 4013200000 Mm 4011500000 Meas Quantit Valu EL Filtering Tips Hrek 4 Seres Mountain Bikes A oe en H Adc Add L Edit Dele Length 33 00 33 00 Pieces Hazardous AMS The filtered list opens Descript ot i BICYCLES AND CYCLES NESOI INCLUDING E BICYCLES HAVING BOTH WHEELS EXCEEDIM BICYCLES HAVING BOTH WHEELS NOT EXCE LIGHTING OR ISUAL SIGNALING EQUIPMEN INNER TUBES OF RUBBER OF A KIND USEC NEW PNEUMATIC TIRES OF RUBBER OF At Cancel View Filter Unfilter C Since some descriptions are long double click on the code in the filtered list to view it If you use a commodity regularly check the box It is commonly used Then the code will display in the Browse list inside the Commodities tab on the EEI tab To Add a Commodity Classification If you need to add a Commodity Classification to the list Go to the Warehousing folder and click on Commodity Classifications Click on the Add button Enter the code and description 201 COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS ACTIONS WITH COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS LIST Click OK The classification is added Commodity Classifications Classification Description Quantiyt SC Itis commonly used C To import the latest Schedule B c
38. Name Filename Cargo Release CangoRelease Largo Release 19020 LangoRielease Cargo Release Sorted by tem mdex CangoRelease Cargo Release Bonded CangoRelease Largo Release Distnbution LangoRielease Cargo Release Distnbution Summanzed By Locabon CangoRelease Cargo Release Distnbution Summanzed CangoRelease Largo Releate_TS4 Langohielesse Link selected template to current transaction Set selected template as default The default Cargo Release template Cargo Release Distribution Summarized by Location Displays items grouped by part number for each different location e Cargo Release Distribution Summarized Displays items by grouped by part number e Cargo Release Sorted by Item Index Displays items sorted by the order in which the user put them 479 WHAT ACTIONS CAN PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE OTHER ACTIONS 480 To view the history of the cargo release such as a Warehouse Receipt or Invoice for this cargo select the option History A dialog box opens listing all the transactions related to this cargo History for Cargo Release 3 arehalise Receipt 9 12 15 2008 You can view a transaction by selecting it in the History dialog box The View button opens the dialog box for the transaction The Go To button takes you to the document To return to the cargo release use the Back button To cancel a CR or other transaction
39. PERFORM COUNT ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE The next screen shows the first count task To view the list of all Tasks click on the tab Task List or click the arrow buttons on the bottom of the screen to move from task to task To select a task to perform click the Select button 4 Count AMS iv Sent By Administrator Part No 45123237 Type Informed Locations A1RB This example shows an Informed count task by Part Number in location AIRB The text count potting soil bags is a note that was added in the Notes field when the task was created 431 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM COUNT ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE 3 Inthe next screen scan the location to begin counting the items in the location Scan one of the locations below E ALRB Storage Ignore Serials No This count task only has one location a Storage type of location The system can process multiple locations You can scan the location or select it on the screen and press the Select button The checkbox Ignore Serials No can be checked to tell the system to ignore the serial numbers when performing the count This means you can scan part numbers not the serial numbers If your company does not keep items by serial numbers you do not need to check the box because it does not apply to your system When the box is left unchecked the default and you keep items by serial number the user must s
40. Subject Recenve tems for Tropical Landscaping Location RECA a x Notes w Cwaerouse Receo _ amp Click the OK button when done The Task appears in the Pending Tasks list on the PC and is sent to the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld for the assigned user 347 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING You can print labels at this time if needed This is useful if boxes do not have part numbers 1 Click the arrow on the Print button and select Print Labels 2 Inthe dialog box select the label size and enter the quantity of labels to print Print Labels Print Setup OF Select Labels Printer Receiving Label 453 Cancel Recenving Label 45 Recenving Label 4x6 Tracking Pickup Label 4x6 Description Help WS Label 46 WdevO4d HP Lasenlet P2015 Seri USBO01 Warehouse Receipt Number WH 57 Amount of pieces 110 Start at End at Complete the Steps Using Magaya WMS Mobile Devices Next perform the following steps in the Magaya WMS Mobile application on handheld device to complete the receipt of the cargo 348 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING Note If you have more than one warehouse defined in your system ensure the WMS Mobile user has been given access to that warehouse in their employee profile 1 The handheld user clicks the Receive task icon on the handheld s main men
41. To receive perishable items with Magaya WMS Mobile Warehouse Item mm Li Item Dimensions Identification o ED ebruary 2014 Invoice 5 M T W T F S 1 Lot gt 3 4 56 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 w Use Expiration 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Expires 27 02 000 oo et 2 26 A 2s Pl Today 27 02 14 Click arrow for calendar Select the item to edit it and tap on the Identification tab Select the expiration date by tapping on the arrow To change the month tap the month name in the calendar heading or scroll by tapping the arrows to go to the next month or previous month 367 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE PALLETIZE ITEMS Palletize Items To create a pallet of different part numbers or if you receive a pallet with different part numbers inside follow these steps on the handheld device 1 Click on the Location Pallet button Warenouse Kecelpt 2 368 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE PALLETIZE ITEMS Note For more on creating and printing pallet IDs see Chapter 17 in the Magaya Supply Chain Manual section Create a Move Task 3 Scan the barcodes of the items The screen will display the pallet ID number just scanned Warehouse receipt ith Pallet ID Complete the Uninformed Manual Receive process until all items are received and assigned a location This will update your Magaya system with a Warehouse Receipt WR that has the items and l
42. To set up numbering go to Maintenance gt Configuration gt Document Numbering Select the customer s name in the Contact Name field Note Infor mation from the Customer s profile such as their address or Inco terms will display automatically Enter the description of the goods This is optional but recom mended The button with the three dots next to the description field can be used to add a preset clause to the quotation The Expiration Date is one month from the date the quote was created Change it as needed 504 CREATE A CARGO QUOTATION STEPS e The Payment Terms field will be filled in if there are payment terms defined for this customer or for your system If not you can select them or change them here Payment terms set in a Quote are trans ferred to the Sales Order and Invoice 3 Routing Tab Quotation Cargo G eneral Routing Commodities Charges Events Attachments Notes Intermal Notes Mode of Traneportatiory Origin lntormatior Part Charlotte Marne Atlantic Surplus Pickup Address Destination Informator Orlando Agents ox Cie Heb o Select the mode of transportation from the dropdown menu If you do not select a mode you will not be able to add freight charges In the Origin part of the screen select the port of origin from the dropdown menu e For the Origin Name
43. Total USE 69 00 136 04 Concsi Help There is a pop up menu available from this dialog box It includes options such as viewing the transaction importing exporting data choose columns and more After clicking the Generate button the accounting transactions display in the Transaction List which is available from the Actions button These newly generated accounting transactions are now linked to the WR Add Accounting Transactions from the Transactions List When you are in the Transaction Listing you can create the following accounting transactions directly from a WR by using the Add button at the bottom of the list Invoice Add an invoice Learn more about linking invoices to the opera tions transaction by reading the section below 335 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT LINKING TRANSACTIONS Credit Memo Use this option if you need to issue a credit or a refund to a customer Bill Add a bill of what you need to pay Credit Use this option if you overpaid a vendor and they give you a credit Other options available from the pop up menu and Actions button Go to the document view of the accounting transaction Print a batch of transactions by selecting a group of them Receive a Payment When a customer pays you for the WR you can process the payment in your Magaya system by selecting this option Other option via the Payments List Pay a Bill When you are paying a vend
44. You can use the My Company Info dialog box to enter information about your company information such as address and contact information Option The 61 How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG BOX ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS same information can be set up in the Startup Wizard except for multiple addresses This information will be used in documents in the system 1 2 Go to File and select My Company Info Edit Sales Operations Maintenance sh My Company Info e Startup Wizard Accounting Wizard Enter information in the fields on the tabs such as phone number website and address es Most of the fields are optional 3 Click the OK button to save the information and exit the dialog box when done entering information on all the tabs that apply The My Company Info dialog box offers you a place to add your company address and other addresses if you have additional offices in other locations 62 Company Information General Address Biling Address Other Addresses Contacts Description Contact Mame Country Fort Los Angeles Warehouse UNITED ST Los Angeles Houston Oth Add Enter your branch addresses Description Houston Office Contact Phone How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG Box ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS Then you can select from the address list in transactions such as the Entities tab of a shipment To select another address in a transa
45. contacts are not employees but other parties you need to send information to such as interested parties for a shipment Tracking Access The contact can be assigned as a Magaya LiveTrack user by selecting their name and clicking on the Actions button choose Allow Tracking You can also right click on their name to access a pop up menu Enter their password and permissions or restrictions You can also assign more than one Magaya LiveTrack user per company Contacts can also be added from any entity screen For more about using the online tracking feature see the Magaya Software Communications Manual Add employee name and contact information citizenship information assign remote access rights Magaya system permissions roles and passwords Permissions Assign permissions per employee to control access to your data based on the employee s role See the topic Permissions for details Employee General Address Biling Address Other Addresses User Permissions 4 Select the groups to which this employee belongs to Name Description C Importers Importers are users who have access to Importation HS Account Payable Users that can enter bills and make bills payments We Account Recenvable Users that can enter invoices and receive paymen C Everone Users in this group hawe minimum access only C Exporters Exporters are users who have access to Exportatio C Limited Accounting The group only access to certain accounting
46. e A R and A P Multiple currencies e Customer payment terms 17 INVENTORY COUNTING Chart of Accounts and a list of Items amp Services Banking checks deposits Carrier rates and contracts for customers and carriers Many accounting tasks can be automated to ease the processing Inventory Counting 18 Other warehouse processes include counting inventory Two methods of counting inventory are cycle counts and physical counts Magaya WMS includes counting functions in the Warehouse Inspector screen inside the Warehousing folder Cycle counting is the process of verifying inventory accuracy by counting a few items every day and comparing the count to computer inventory records then reconciling differences The cause of discrepancies is found and resolved Cycle counts can be done by grouping goods in different ways such as by what items move the fastest out of the warehouse or grouping goods by value The method of counting goods based on the value of items is Pareto s rule of 80 20 where 20 of the inventory will likely represent 80 of the inventory s value Goods are assigned a code of A B or C depending on its value The inventory can also be counted by dividing the warehouse into geographic sections or zones and the inventory is counted by section INVENTORY COUNTING A cycle count is done a few times per year while your business is running unlike a physical inventory count that requires a busine
47. i US Customs Messages es Ho MHo Ho Ho a Ocean iS and SF es es Yeg Yeg Yeg oe Aur AMS es es es Yeg Tes Set Up Passwords for Employees You can also require a password for an employee The password and other options are on the User tab in the Employee dialog box 75 PERMISSIONS SET UP PASSWORDS FOR EMPLOYEES 4 Passwords can be any letter and or number combination Passwords must be a minimum of six characters To set an employee password 1 Goto the Maintenance folder and select Employees 2 Double click an employee s name or select the name and click the Edit button A dialog box opens Employee General Address Biling Address OtherAddresses User Permissions Attachments Notes Disable access for this employee Passuvord Confirm Division Ww x Can only see transactions from this division Allow Magaya OnTheGo access Allow Wagaya Network access Allow Magaya Software API access Allow Wagaya WMS Mobile access 3 Click on the User tab Enter a password and retype it in the Confirm field Select the division of the company for that the employee if your company has divisions Divisions can be added from the Employee list Click the Actions button and add the divisions in that list Divi sions can also be set up in the Maintenance gt Configuration menu For steps see the Magaya Software Customization Manual Click the appl
48. ov Toolbar Refresh E5 ws Status Bar wo Folders F7 View Transactions Log TI Shipment tiene View Log for this Transaction View Denied Party Screening results Configuration gt 9 Help Use this to access a list of how to s for frequently performed tasks and to access the Magaya website for video tutorials FAQs and a web form to tell a friend about Magaya software To access information about 90 MENUS AND TOOLBARS MAIN MENU your Magaya software select About Magaya Explorer This will display your license agreement and version number of Magaya software you have Help Topics Video Tutorials User Manuals Frequently Asked Questions Tell a Friend Contact Magaya Corporation Magaya Horne Page h Magaya Knowledge Base About Magaya Explorer Tabs The Magaya Explorer interface opens reports and other lists as tabs Maintenance Shipment Magaya Metwork Accounting Reports Options Help 2 g Ocean Ground eo C invoice List Openinvaices gt Number Type Applied to Transaction D 110 Invoice Tropical Landscaping 0405 2071 110 Invoice Miami Distribution Center Dara 201 105 lnvoice Tropical Landscaping O05 72071 105 Invoice Jamaica Distribution Center 02 09 2011 107 Invoice Tropical Landscaping 0205207 1 106 nvoce Jamaica Distribution Center 01 11 2011 Learn more about the menus and buttons in lists and documents by seeing the topic Working with Document and List Views
49. s and it will not show this above screen In the next screen select the WR you want to adjust Inventory Adjustment Wizard Entry Selection Please select the entries you would like to use For the adjustments Status Number Dake Shipper Select All F aJ In Process WH 1l24 10 21 2013 ABC Sporting Gc C U Pending WH 120 08 26 2013 F ap In Process wWH i1i17 OFf25 2013 MIEI C on Hand WH 116 07 23 2013 C U Pending WH 114 03 01 2013 African Internat Filter T On Hand wH 113 O3 01 2013 Orlando Garden F hon Hand WH 109 oO9 06 2012 HC Cargo Corr F UJ Pending WH 103 07 10 2012 ball i gt Clear All Ir Filte mi Far IOHLEE 2 21 of 51 elements Note The list inside the wizard is the same as the WR list If you filter the WR list the wizard will show the filtered list If you selected multiple WR s before CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT opening the wizard this screen will be skipped and the wizard will work with the WR s you selected Inventory Adjustment Wizard Item Summary Please review the items that will be used to generate the adjustments Status Package Part Number Description Location Code Piece T OnHand Bag 45 1237 Potting sail IRET T QnHand Roll 157176 Tree staking twine 1REC T OnHand Box 125848 wheelbarrow IRET D onhan Box 3454 Trowel IREC F Summarize entries This screen includes the option to view the items two different ways
50. set up 148 Currency change date in transaction 475 Currency setup 59 Custom document download it 89 Customer account number 148 Customs codes 59 Cycle count 18 426 D Database Server 27 Database server 86 Database tasks 32 Delete locations 175 Desktop icon of Magaya Explorer 26 58 Detail button Inventory Items 185 Details panel WR 343 Divisions 76 Document Editor 26 Document numbering 280 E ECCN 298 Edit button 89 EEI 198 296 Electronics commodity description 292 Email send batch emails 124 Email signature 151 Employee add 150 create a task for 97 email signature 151 permissions and remote access 150 Entity ID 141 Equipment WMS user selects 157 Events add an event 320 define an event 321 Events tab 319 Events automate 478 Everyone permission group 71 Expiration date WR 296 Expiration dates count session 439 Explorer 85 Export code 299 Export data to Excel 137 F Filter 127 378 Filter Advanced 129 Find 268 Find button 132 Find commodities 404 Find items 378 Find locations 377 FMC 59 Found inventory item 448 G Getting Started 31 55 Getting Started with the software 49 Grayed out button 88 H Handheld device hardware 34 Hard drive size recommended 21 Hazardous materials 300 Hazardous materials columns in WR list 185 Help 31 90 Hide folders 93 History Tasks 96 Hold commodities 288 339 I IATA air waybill codes 144 Icons status of cargo 307 Import locations 168
51. 0 0 0 0 cee eee 400 Commodity List Introduction ssor gerra a e ene eens 400 Reports from the Commodity List 0 0 0 ees 401 Oer ypes OF RPO S eeoa wae ae A E E E O eee 403 How to Find Commodities in Magaya Explorer 0 0 0 0 nnn 403 UsetieFind BUON 95 0 64 oe tho rina ee AAA EEE paws 404 Use the FiltGmbuom zerresine testaa e a a N a i bas 405 Repons INVEMIORy ican 6 2 a6 og Sethe eh 4s A S a ee 406 Reports Managing Items with Inventory Reports 0050 406 The ltems amp Services Lists 3 s 60 acodebaah node eee a aa a ee ke baw s 409 In and Out Cargo Re po0nS cius dias aay ireann tEn EEE eee ted keds 409 In and Out REPOS is scans tae ee Sud eee eee RES eee ee te 409 Directed Operations Getting Started 0 0 anaana anane eens 414 Business Case for Directed Operations 0 0 0c ccc eee eee ees 414 Getting Started A Guide to Preparing a Smart Warehouse 415 RG plenisamicnl ece vals sera eee eae a eee Eee ea eae hee 416 Introduction to Inventory Replenishment 0 0 0 c cece ees 416 Configure Replenishment Schedule 0 00 ccc eee 416 Define Replenishment in Location Definitions 0 0 0000 421 Fulfill Replenishment Move Tasks 0 0 0 0 eens 421 Chapter 12 Counting Inventory c lt 6 6442404054 000 e sin duieeeies ieeces 423 MACOGUCHON crasa beta e heeded wb ow eh eed a eed 423 Configure Inventory Adjustments 0 0
52. 1 Bamboo Stakes B1LB 06 14 2010 4At H 59 2 Pruning shears BILE 06 14 2010 6145692 52 inch Rebar Cutter B1LB 06 14 2010 125648 Wheelbarrow B1LE e To view details of an item in this list double click it and the Commodity dialog box opens Count Tasks History The Count Session dialog box opens If you click on a count session the Cargo Count List dialog box for that session opens To remove pending locations from a Count that is in process go to the Actions button in the Count Task History list and select Remove Pending Locations This allows a user to close a Count Session without having to count all the remaining locations Other Counts Options The following options are also available from the Counts button Configure Create Count Task Process Counts Counts per Location History Adjustments History Count Tasks History Count Sessions Count Reasons view Found Items view Lost Items 443 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY OTHER COUNTS OPTIONS Count Sessions List This shows a list of all count sessions Count Session List Dates Last monthtodate From 5 1 2010 To 6 16 2010 Status Number Type Description Owner Date T pen 0 I Cycle Count May 2010 Garden Suppli llene Taylor 05 07 2070 Tyr k VY wiw amp Add Edit Delete Filter Untilter Actions Close New sessions can be added here but not if another session is open The open session must be completed first To
53. 357 Memory requirement 21 Mercosul 296 Messages 96 Military shipment 299 Minimum stock inventory notice 181 Mobile location multiple pick tasks 494 Mobile location truck 393 Mobile locations 393 Mobile locations link to equipment 43 Move items with same expiration date 392 Move Task Uninformed Move Manual Move 390 Move Tasks 380 Informed Move 380 Multimodal shipments 100 My Company Info Wizard 88 N NCM code 296 neso1 197 Network ID 86 Network ID code 58 New release changes to roles 79 Notes 331 add a clause 331 add notes to transaction 331 internal notes 333 NVOCC Pickup Order template 272 O Online update 27 Options button 120 P Page One 85 Pallet Configure for manual receipt 46 Create a pallet ID 383 create for manual receiving task 368 create when receiving cargo 354 Print a pallet ID 383 Pallet label ID 241 Pareto s rule 18 Part Number different PO 369 in a Warehouse Receipt 289 scan bar code 306 Part number of Inventory Item Definition 178 Part numbers on labels 237 Partial release 180 Passenger only flights or carriers 143 Password requirements 58 Passwords for employees 75 Payment terms 146 Pending Tasks 96 Perishable items receving 353 367 Permissions 66 Photographs as Attachments 324 file size 323 scan 325 Physical count 426 Pick Task 482 Pick Task partial 484 Pickup Order 243 create a bill from 275 create a Warehouse Receipt from 271 create an invoice from 275 customers can p
54. 4 5 E 7 q 10 Li 12 3 t 15 Le L7 IE 13 20 Pad ae J3 m 25 26 ar 28 zd 30 FI Ewery z months First Porc Every i manths The other option for a monthly schedule is to select a day each month to run the schedule This example shows the first Monday of every month Click Save to save this schedule Click OK in the Task Scheduling dialog box Click Save in the Configuration menu for the WMS screen Result The system will generate Move Tasks according to the replenishment schedule Note Replenishment will only be done on locations that have been modified i e items have been picked from them not from dormant locations without activity 224 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES DEFINE REPLENISHMENT IN LOCATION DEFINITIONS Define Replenishment in Location Definitions The Replenishment Schedule uses information in the Location Definitions To add definitions to a warehouse location open the Location from the Loca tions list Click the Definitions dropdown menu Select a definition If defini tions do not exist yet then create them by clicking the plus sign button in the dropdown menu s toolbar For more details see the topic Location Defini tions Fulfill Replenishment Move Tasks When the Replenishment Schedule runs the system creates Move Tasks for the WMS Mobile users The locations eligible for replenishment are the Picking and Replenishment locations Notes Be sure to configure the WM
55. A new dialog box opens Enter the SKU number and click the Add button Click the OK button to save SKUs and return to the General tab of the Inventory Item Definitions dialog box SKUs Enter new SKU numbers and click on Add SKLI 3 gt add Delete Cancel Help To see SKUs in the Inventory Item Definitions list click Actions gt Choose Columns gt Item Code Enter a description of the item Enter the Model number or name that was assigned by the manufac turer Select the Client from the dropdown menu Use this if you have a regular customer who buys this product Note If you assign a client the inventory item is linked to the client The inventory information for this item will be available for the client to see online via using Magaya LiveTrack Select the manufacturer name from the dropdown menu 179 CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE e Enter the amount per pallet if the items are shipped in a pallet in the same amount each time This will also be used to estimate how many items can build a pallet Amount Per Pallet b Keep inventor by seral numbers Wf Save serial numbers when items go out Package Pallet ig Law wH 44 00 44 00 35 00 in Volume 40 33 tt Weight 0 00 Ib Has variable weight Unik Dozen s Check the box to Keep Inventory by Serial Number if you are keeping track of your inventory by serial number The serial number is un
56. Add 5 Open Air Freight Service Cost Yes 6 7 40 00 it 3 Open Air Freight Service Mo 6140 00 5 Open Documentation Yes 1 00 Totals Expense Income Profit USD 1473 60 USD 2204 00 USD 730 40 Add charges for freight documentation etc as needed Options Click the Attachments tab to add photographs or documents to the Quotation as needed For details on adding attachments see the topic Attachments Click the Notes and or Internal Notes tabs to add notes clauses etc The internal notes are not visible to customers More details are available in the topics on Notes and Internal Notes Details View When viewing the list of Quotations you can see details of any quote by clicking the Detail button In the panel that opens select a detail option from the dropdown list Actions for Quotations After you create a Quotation and the customer accepts it you can transfer the information in the Quotation automatically to create the following transactions by clicking on the arrow on the side of the Actions button and selecting the transaction choice from the menu 507 ACTIONS FOR QUOTATIONS STEPS 508 Warehouse Receipt Pickup Order Invoice This Actions menu is available from the document view the list view or by selecting a Quotation in the list view and right clicking on it Additional options are available from the list view such as Reports Other actions that can be performed
57. COLLECTORS COIN Pean O 3704000000 POSTAGE OR REWENUE STAMPS STAMP Used Po SZ0AnnnnnN ORIGINAL SCULPTURES AND STATUARY 4 j Cancel Clear ll WIE Filter il Untilter Help 9550 of 9590 elements Actions with Commodity Classifications List 198 The Commodity Classifications list is located under the Warehousing folder COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS ACTIONS WITH COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS LIST Warehousing P Pickup Orders EP Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts i Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List AE Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List S Carga Movements 8 Cargo Movement List ie Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector T Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications To filter the list of Commodity Classifications click the Filter button and select either the Standard or Advanced filter option This is a screenshot of the Standard Commodities Classification Filter Commodities Classification Filter Filter Type Match all conditions O Match at least one condition Chapter Find Find only on record code Match Case You can select a chapter from the dropdown or enter a term in the Find What field The results will display in the list and the dialog box will close 199 COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS ACTIONS WITH COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS LIST The Advanced Filter has many options for filtering your list Advanced Filter Available Fi
58. Commodity dialog box and the item information will be filled in automatically This is also available on the Commodity tab when creating a Pickup Order If you have the Magaya Bar Code plug in activated you can scan the barcode of the item you defined and all the information about that item will appear in the WR You will not have to retype the dimensions etc each time you receive that item When you select the part number in a WR the item is automatically added to the On Hand inventory When an item is released in a Cargo Release or a ship ment it is removed from inventory Step by Step Procedure 178 To create an Inventory Item Definition follow these steps 1 Goto the Warehousing folder gt Inventory Item Definitions 2 Click the Add button and select Add Inventory Item A dialog box opens 3 Start with the General tab CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE Enter the part number The part number may be assigned by the manufacturer or the customer or it can also be your internal number that you use to keep your inventory Dashes in the number are not recommended This field is mandatory Note The part number cannot be edited after the inventory item definition is created Optional Click the SKU button if you are tracking inventory by the Stock Keeping Unit SKU pronounced either skew or by its acronym letters SKU An SKU identifies an identical item from different manufacturers
59. Control Houston Warehouse Sequence tab Loceshns misiji sequence Satu Co Dsspiption Empty Type Fone Pucks Dlemety 23HIF 9 ShippingLoc Yes Shipping Cold Shorage Zone 375 WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR INTRODUCTION TO THE WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR 376 If you have more than one physical warehouse then use the Promote Ware house wizard which will promote a warehouse Just right click the zone to open the wizard This will change the icon to distinguish the warehouses from zones Then you can add or assign locations to it Learn more in the topic Multiple Warehouses To learn how about sequencing in a single warehouse see the topic Sequencing in the Warehouse After expanding a zone Click on a location name to display the items in the list on the right hand side of the screen To rearrange the columns on the right click and drag the column headers The details of any item can be viewed by double clicking on an item to open the Commodity dialog box Find more options by right clicking a Location to open a pop up menu When you click a Location a new options appears on the screen It s a way to view items in a location alongside the locations list in detail or in summary Warehouse Inspector g laj Ez 3 7 M xf lt P Move Find Location Find Items Filter Configure Warehouse detalls Locations Show empty i Miami Warehouse Status Fackage Description Hg Mobile Locations P OnHand Wehicles 2006 INFINIT
60. Dastiriation Fa Dras Dress License Humbe Crear s Hame Ermipiyss E riy Humber BE vchade From Tracking O Expense U50 OG 0 Nunter E Hee Oyerbhat Has Trareactions Hes Underhock oo ta o O D i oO o oO ta oO oO o oO ra ta oO 405 REPORTS INVENTORY REPORTS MANAGING ITEMS WITH INVENTORY REPORTS 2 Click on the field you want to use in your filter by selecting it from the list of Available Fields on the left 3 Set the condition you want to apply For example if you are filtering by a Billing client select Equals if you know the exact name or select Contains if you know part of the name Enter it in the field next to the condition dropdown Add any additional conditions as needed 4 Click OK to see the filtered list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For more details on using the advanced filter see the topic The Find Button Reports Inventory Reports Managing Items with Inventory Reports 406 Reports about your inventory can be created in your Magaya software In the Inventory Item Definitions list you can see the amount of pieces on hand what is arriving and what is sold You can also create In and Out reports from the Inventory Item Definitions list See the topic In and Out Reports for details Other inventory reports can be created in Magaya software such as commodity reports which tell you what you have in the warehouse In contrast invento
61. E 2 Select a charge type Tots Liris re TaT Income Profil USO 0 00 uso 0 00 USO O00 CHARGES WORKING WITH THE CHARGES TAB When you select a charge type a dialog box opens Expense Charge l Standard Charge Notes Charge Description seie Hi Paid az Tas Code v Allow automatic update Show in documents Quantity Unit Price Amount ho JC Joo i vso oo The Income Freight Charge and Expense Freight Charge dialog boxes are the same except for the title NOTE lf the Freight charges option is grayed out you cannot select it To make it available return to the Shipper Consignee tab and select a Mode of Transporta tion Expense Freight Charge Ground Freight Charge iaa Freight Service Descriptio poole Fi Rates Paid as Allow automatic update Apply by Show imn documents No of Gross Gross Chargeable Aate Charge Total Amount Pieces Weight Ib Volume FE weight o jow jow fom fow J ueno The freight charge tab will indicate the mode of transportation in the title Air Ocean or Ground depending on the mode selected Note Select Income 313 CHARGES WORKING WITH THE CHARGES TAB 314 Charge for Inland Freight instead of using Income Freight Charge if you are adding a charge for local trucking A Tax Code field will appear if you have set up sales tax in the Chart of Acco
62. Events for a transaction by going to the transaction list and clicking on the Detail button A new panel opens In the panel select Events from the menu 319 EVENTS ADD AN EVENT Add an Event To add an event to a transaction click on the Add button A dialog box opens It contains a list of pre defined events Warehouse Receipt Ed General Shipper Consignes Supplier Carers Commodities Charges Events Att Date amp Time Delete 1 20703 woe 4AM S Event Typa Detads inchada m Tracking Show events from all related transactions Set the date and time for the event e Select the event type from the dropdown menu Details are optional e Select a location if needed The location is the geographical place where the event will take place The box is checked to include the event in tracking When the customer or agent views the transaction in LiveTrack the Events are visible in the section called Tracking Details Tracking Details Date Time Event Operation Jun 29 2009 09 02 AM Picked up Pickup Order 19 Jun 29 2009 10 40 AM Arrived at warehouse Warehouse Receipt 42 e Click OK to save 320 EVENTS DEFINE NEw EVENT Define New Event Magaya software enables you to define events In addition to using the default events included in the software you can create your own to suit your business needs To define events 1 Goto Maintenan
63. Gan S725 Mw 13th terrace suite Mismi FL 33172 o Ew UNITED STATES er a Fitsieticist earvibres Tel 1 800555 S100 ail Creahon Dase 112 Hala z Inland Carrier j Fiesse Dae 11 3a oy Tmz 1T aM b Enplope Acted ct UOremen Tracking Number Bati Hwee Cugo Cong Driver Mamie i y go ompa Figlesned In Fi ihik cat cs cheba Change Chert to Bll Fides be F k Ch Cancel Hep Let s look at the fields on the General screen General Information 454 The following fields are filled in automatically the release number time date employee and issued by your company is the default Notice that the system uses today s date as the default for the Creation Date and the Release Date To change the date click the arrow in the dropdown field to open a calendar Select the correct date The Released to field is for the ultimate consignee The Released to entity on this tab is also the Client to Bill entity by default Exception If the entity who is picking up the items is a third party or a carrier then select that third party or carrier in the Client to Bill field RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE GENERAL INFORMATION The entity selected for the Client to Bill field will be used when the charges are generated Note Charges are not genearted in the wizard A Create Cargo Release Wizard General Information Enter the general information tor this cargo release su
64. Import part numbers 166 Import warehouse receipts 173 In and Out reports 409 Informed count 427 Informed Move Magaya WMS Mobile procedure 385 Informed Move task 380 Informed Receiving 345 Initial inventory best practice 38 Initial Inventory set up 177 Inland freight 314 Install software on a network 25 on a single computer 22 on terminal services 26 Interface 85 Internal Notes 333 Inventory Adjustment after Count 435 Inventory Adjustments configure 423 Inventory Adjustments lost damaged items 447 Inventory counting 423 Inventory data import from other system 166 Inventory Item Definitions 178 create 178 Inventory items cost 181 Inventory reports 406 Inventory cannot modify 426 Inventory scrapped 447 Invitations 95 IP address static 25 Items and Services 101 ITN Internal Transaction Number 299 J Just in Time 19 K Known shipper 142 L Labels 237 print 269 List view how to save 105 Lists sort items 108 Load Task 498 Login authentication 77 Lot numbers receiving 296 M Magaya Bar Code Plug in 178 Magaya Communication Server 26 Magaya Database Server 27 Magaya Document Editor 26 Magaya Explorer 26 Magaya identification number 239 Magaya Network 54 64 94 Magaya WMS Mobile interface 155 log in 156 main menu 158 scanner signal 162 view messages 161 Magaya WMS Mobile pallet icons 433 Magaya WMS Mobile wireless hardware 34 Magaya WMS Mobile wireless set up 33 Manual Move 391 Manual Receive Task
65. In this example click Allow to apply this rule to this employee The newly assigned role appears in the list PERMISSIONS ADD A ROLE TO AN EMPLOYEE View Roles for Employees In the Employee List click the Details button on the toolbar next to the Actions button A new panel opens Select Roles from the dropdown menu to see the roles for each employee Emeeyeas amp Employees Hiera Test erpiar Orain Shel 1B Operations Manage 6 Pop uss ee Here Tayo E Operate ist 1 T ran I AP Died I AA Chak T Epia B Epris E W hne Enp h B wwie WS Lines Adma Fera Eiis Faz zren Haria Conad Prai Hama Glick the Detail button Cois Lact Hara horn biari ma H O Operations Manager Ciit letin Shirer Congas Cago naase Mansge Treckirey Lipas Pande Disco Ales dinika fa Gea Oban Sirit Cankgure Capi murat Dal Bebe 83 PERMISSIONS ADD A ROLE TO AN EMPLOYEE 84 CHAPTER 6 MAGAYA EXPLORER INTERFACE INTRODUCTION TO THE MAGAYA EXPLORER Chapter 6 Magaya Explorer Interface Introduction to the Magaya Explorer When you open your Magaya software you will see the main screen that you will work in The screen can also be called a window or an Explorer and looks similar to other windows on your computer that you use already such as My Documents It is called the Magaya Explorer It allows you to explore or navigate in all your operatio
66. Information The Magaya Supply Chain Solution also has the option to move items between warehouses and still keep the items status as On Hand See the section in this chapter Create a Move Task Informed Moves If you have the Magaya WMS Mobile application on wireless handheld devices you can create a Move Task also called an Informed Move on the PC in Magaya Explorer and send the Move Task to the handheld devices for users to 380 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS CREATE A MOVE TASK INFORMED MOVES perform This will move items from their existing location to a new location you specify First start on the PC to create the Move task 1 Click on the Move button in the Warehouse Inspector toolbar The Cargo Movement Wizard opens Cargo Movement Wizard Cargo Selection Select the items that you would like to move to a destination location or pallet Location Find Locations Mon empty E S Student 2 Warehouse Find Items igs Student 1 Warehouse H a Miami Warehouse _ Mark group Mobile Locations H E Houston Warehouse Uninark group El oc r i ri Filter LE R2 Unfilter El R3 9 53 24 O Rings 20 00x33 00x12 00in Box e OUD 46 24 Fuel filters 20 00 18 00x8 00in Box OW 33 24 Diesel Fuel conditioner 4 006 0020 1 Totals OUD 26 24 Engine oil 3 00 3 00 9 00in Bottle Pieces OUD 50 24 O Rings 20 00 33 00 12 00in Box T ff RECI weigh
67. LY Description Cart 2 Type Mobile One Mobile Locations a Customer Length 30 00 Width 16 00 Height 22 00 F Inactive Select the Type Mobile Select the Zone Mobile Locations Enter dimensions optional but helpful to define capacity of this cart Click OK to save Here is a view of the Locations list with Mobile locations created Locations Locations Status Code Description Type RECA Receiving Area 4 Fecenvirng Refrigerated Truck Mobile Forklift 1 Mobile Cart 2 Mobile Cart 1 Mobile Shipping Bay area A 206 MOBILE LOCATIONS CREATE A MOBILE LOCATION 2 Configure the Mobile Equipment 1 Goto Maintenance gt Configuration gt WMS gt WMS Mobile gt Warehouse Equipment Configuration WMS General Inventory Adjustment Directed Operations D WMS Mobile Uniks Lied bo configure the maasuramant units For the WHS Mobila users Magaya u f Used to configure the type of equipment used by the warehouse personnel a WihiS Mobile Users Lied to configure the permissions printer configuration etc of the WMS Mobile users g Counts Numbers Used bo configure the generation of numbers for count sessions POO Mobile Gperations Stings Used to configure the behavior of the operations in the WIS Mee 2 Click Add In the dialog box enter the information for this mobile loca tion Warehouse Equipment List Descri
68. Magaya Cargo System Browse Name Type Import p Code Text es Description Text Yes Down Type Yes No No Default Zone Text Yeg C Pieces Test Yes F i Empty Integer No F Customer Test Yes Warehouse Provider Text Ho C Length fin Decimal Yes E G width in Decimal es Delimiter Double Quotes C Height fin Decimal F G Default Receiwing Location Yeso Separator C weight Decimal C Volume Decimal Field Type Text Count Session Text Include Header Process this column Ss 4 Click Browse to open the file on your computer or network that contains the data you want to import Verify all data before importing it 5 Select the columns to match the data you are importing and click the Import button Recommended columns are the location code descrip tion type and zone You can import other fields as needed for example The items will have a status of Pending Verify all the data after importing 171 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY Import Existing Inventory 172 Note for existing customers If you change physical locations in your ware house and you want your Magaya system to reflect the changes be sure you already have locations in your Magaya system Then you can import new loca tions and then import the warehouse which will be the old locations The cargo in the warehouse needs to b
69. Magaya Tech Support by phone or via the email form on Magaya com Need another License If you already have Magaya software and need an addi tional license please contact your Magaya Logistics Advisor You do not need to download the program again In the wizard fill in or edit the information in the screens beginning the first screen which presents the options for the Magaya Network 55 STARTUP WIZARD BEGIN THE STARTUP WIZARD Make your selection depending on if you downloaded the software from the Magaya website or if you received the installation file from a Magaya employee This example illustrates the option I have not provided any information to Magaya Corporation and will provide my information right now This will show you how to enter your information Startup Wizard Company Information in Magaya Network Magaya Explorer will retieve your company information from Wagaya Network if MECESSary Please choose from one of the following options already have a Magaya Network ID and a password O downloaded the Magaya Software from the web entered my Email address nani Information into the Wagaya website oelect have not provided any information to Magaya Corporation and will provide my Information right now Remember If you select the second option use the email address that you used on the Web registration form In the next screen select your company type startup Wizard Company
70. Magaya software and co their customers Classifications Efe E Commodi H E Maintenance Read More _ to Accounting utior Surrounding his compar ae Accounting H O Miscellaneous You can manage many warehousing processes with Magaya WMS including e Part Numbers e Serial Numbers e Lot Numbers and expiration dates Inventory including inventory adjustments for lost or damaged goods 12 MAGAYA WMS PROCESSES OVERVIEW Replenishment of inventory FIFO LIFO Pallets and charges for services such as handling Weights and measurements Photos of cargo Notes and clauses in documents Pickups from UPS and FedEx Carrier rates and contracts for customers and carriers Proof of Delivery POD Employee tasks and notifications in the Magaya system Moving items within the warehouse Define location criteria in the warehouse Manage multiple warehouses Document numbering Accounting See the section Accounting Integrated Quotes for customers Documents are included in Magaya WMS such as Pickup Order Warehouse Receipt Cargo Release Invoice In Magaya software the data that fills the fields of the documents is entered in dialog boxes that you use to create the transactions For example when you receive cargo or items in the warehouse the information entered in the Magaya system is saved in a Warehouse Receipt document You do not need to type documents and forms manually All the
71. Other Reports Transactions Listing Open Transactions Create From eMail Signature Roles view ll Roles System Roles Access Groups Divisions Choose Columns Import Export Filter Actions A list opens 80 PERMISSIONS ADD A ROLE TO AN EMPLOYEE Click the Add button in the list A dialog box opens System Role Type of role bo assign to this emplyeesgroup Access For the role selected above C Allow O Deny Click the dropdown menu to select a role to assign to this employee or group There are many default roles such as those shown in this screen shot Type of role to assign to this emplyee group Mame Access Transaction Log Approve Invoices Configure Accounting Configure Cargo Insurance Configure Company Type Configure Configure System Alerts Configure Custom Fields Configure Division List Configure Document Numbers Configure Event Definition Configure LATA Configure Incoming Messages wy eR ie 81 82 PERMISSIONS ADD A ROLE TO AN EMPLOYEE When you select a role a definition of that role appears system Role Type of role to assign to this employee group Lock accounting transactions date Do not allow the employee to edit the accounting transactions date Default Behavior Members of Administrators Access For the role selected above Allow Deny oo o Cancel 5 Click Allow or Deny and click OK to save
72. SCOC R Status Origin Port Fart Humber Destination Fort DO M Mode of Transport J Exclude subitems Show subitems only Entry Date Out Date From To From To 7 sm2 v z wmz v 7 svania v z sm2 v You can select columns in these reports to show other information such as loca tion in the warehouse Hide part numbers that do not have activity in the timeframe of the report by clicking the Configure button gt General tab Configure Report Header Info General Fonts Numbers Hide part numbers with no activity in the period Other reports can be generated in the Other Reports option in the Actions list such as reports by manufacturer for example so you can see how many items you have from the same manufacturer All the information used to define an inventory item is available for a report 413 DIRECTED OPERATIONS GETTING STARTED BUSINESS CASE FOR DIRECTED OPERATIONS Directed Operations Getting Started Directed Operations is a phrase for all the procedures that make a smart ware house This type of warehouse is used for not just receiving storing and ship ping cargo it also replenishes orders has directed i e guided put away and picking sequences that optimize warehouse space and employee time Magaya software includes features that help these types of warehouse busi nesses including 3PLs Distribution Centers DCs and others
73. Select Partial Pieces galvanized steel sheets 26 o0 0040 00s 00in 5 MAT Pieces of 5 Pleces The tasks are sent to the WMS Mobile device the same as any other task The History of the transaction shows the partial pick tasks History for Cargo Release CR 51 Type Name Date Task Pick MMS 08 0920 3 Task Pick Wik 0870972013 Warehouse Receipt eu 1212 2008 Create Task for Houses The option Create Task for Houses is available on master shipments only It enables the user to create Delivery tasks in batches for houses 485 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM A SINGLE PICK TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE Perform a Single Pick Task on the WMS Mobile Device 1 Click on the Pick icon on the main screen of the WMS Mobile handheld device N MAGAYA Fry Warehouse Management System Mobile ho a i gls Q Receive Move 2 Pick 1 Load Count 33 1 2 U B amp B y Messages View Manual Manual Eguipment Receive Move BO g Put Away Measure Eyit 19020 WMSUser Scanner Enabled Magaya WMS Mobile Cah eh gmh Ga 2 Select the Pick task you will perform If there is more than one task scroll through the tasks by clicking on the arrow buttons on the bottom of the screen Click the Select button Detail Task List et Pick WMS i of 1 EY 7111 2012 Sent Bw Administrator oes Release to Houston Warehousing Co AILB 38 AIRE REC Bf253 REC Atle ALAC
74. THE ITEMS amp SERVICES LIST The total quantity of pieces in Inventory Item Definitions list should match the quantity of on hand pieces Inventory Item Definitions List Part Mumber Description Mode Pieces Customer TEWA 776 Teva Beach Sandal Beach Comber 40 5 Baseball gloves Sosa 0 es LIL aro Pje Hac noical Landecaonre med es 5 rebar Grade 60 af Steelworks Fabricators OL y 07 New Balance running Womens Oly 0 NE 200 New Balance 200 run New Balance 0 LUYS3 Chihuly Glass Magnets GL55 0 These totals match for this part number On Hand Inventory for P5125 Status Description Package Pleces Length T nHand 5 rebar Bundle 2p 140 00 48 00 T Un Hand rebar Bundle E 144 00 48 00 T Orn Hand rebar Bundle 4 144 00 46 00 The Items amp Services List In the Items amp Services List in the Accounting folder click the Actions button and select a view to see all the inventory items or non inventory items From that list you can make a report by sales item or by purchase item In and Out Cargo Reports In and Out Reports The In and Out reports provide a snapshot of how much cargo is on hand or was delivered for the time period you select These reports can be used to fore cast quantities that you need to buy to fulfill demand during certain time periods If you are providing distribution for a customer you can email the report to them from your Magaya system
75. TOMER Y oESE ONT PEN SEE arg RTO eR ECE k 370 Chapter 11 Manage amp Move Warehouse Items ccc cece ccc c cc ceees 373 DAVEE VCC EL OTN sorier rinsa Rtg Made Se Dae stoic hs Ae OP Oy oak cae Sat Ae te aed 373 Warehouse Inspector ix ides ates hc Fas Bae eS EAN ES Mee eee Ea 374 Additional Warehouse Inspector Functions 0 20 0 eee eee ee 377 BC EOC VOI a e ous tose a aati po aes E EE E eae 377 PINQVicmsS 45 0225 co hve tate uetese to heeeeeeey Meee eda eee a meee 378 PerM ase tiraera set er ws AAO ened a auc eat ame ey ea eae eee S 378 Contieure O1UMNS 3 5 9 4 ohne Swe Pe Ga des E dk Pi Sah S 379 DECE PANCE sorire ea EE maaan ca aia aaa ere ae eee 379 Reports to Manace ems 44 4 oyactere eae atcha oR hole er ees A UES 379 How to Manage amp Move Warehouse Items 0 0 380 Introduction to Moving Items within the Warehouse 04 380 Create a Move Task Informed Moves 0 0 eee ee 380 Perform Move Task on the Magaya WMS Mobile Device 385 Perform Manual Move Task on the Magaya WMS Mobile Device 390 Maske REDO 2 45 Gis acs AOS oid Gan eo Grace cash a dink tage to Gh cease aca a 392 Transfer Items Between Warehouses 00 ccc cece ee eens 393 Transfer Items Between Warehouses Setup 0 0 c cece eee eee 393 Transfer Items Between Warehouses Steps 0c cece eee eee 395 Actions with Cargo Movements Unload
76. The question mark indicates a blind count i Pallet Accept count 2 items to Count ca cae Gp P Count the quantities for the items to complete the count task Click Accept Count After you accept a count the WMS Mobile application reports all the original values and any differences and allows you to note the reasons for differences A reason for each difference must be entered to finish the count The Inventory Adjustment wizard opens if your system is configured to open it after a Count Process Counts When the WMS Mobile users finish counting the items or locations the count results are submitted to the Magaya WMS system and displayed instantly in the Warehouse Inspector screen in Magaya Explorer Begin processing the count to make any necessary adjustments 435 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PROCESS COUNTS To process counts go to the Warehouse Inspector and click on the arrow on the side of the Counts button Select Process Counts from the dropdown menu The following screen opens Prusts Luunl Dba Cum Sars eres U1 Go andr bo bes perverse Laure ae Jai Zir Gea Tp Counts to be processed Jarari Cad are ec Reb on ie Tka F sis iey anda Dessa Gusi Doue Juey Tiesa lager Lot Tord Tauni visa Looe Count results for a selected location Sa lierre ka boca eee chsh Daui Mazas Mad ium ae aes Pace tems ina selected location In
77. The system will check daily to see if inventory needs to be replen ished according to the setting you define here Select if you want it to run every day or every 2 days or 3 days etc Task Frequency Daily Frequency W Once at 3 02 33 AM Ev ery Days Hours Minutes T 2 Oo Start 3 00 00 AM End 4 00 00 PM Also set the time of day If you select once per day set the time If you select the option Every then define if you want to run the schedule every 223 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE hour every 2 hours etc Then set the start and finish time for the schedule to run during the warehouse hours of operation Weekly If you want the replenishment schedule to run weekly select the days of the week to run it If you want it to run each week select 1 If you want it to run every other week select 2 Task Frequency Every 1 week s Monday Tuesday W Wednesday C Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monthly If you want to run the schedule monthly select from the following options Task Frequency Frequency Monthy z 7 i Z 3 4 g 7 8 4 10 Li 12 13 ld jw 15 Le F 18 15 Fa i 22 24 24 2 26 27 2 24 3i 31 Every I months The rs Manda Every months Days Select which days of the month to run the schedule and if you want it to run every month select 1 every other month select 2 etc Task Frequency Frequency Mankthly Dam L 2 3
78. To make the Put Away sequence the same as the picking tasks check the box on the screen Zone Tuscon AZ WH Tuscon AS WH Tuscon AZ WH Tuscon Az WH Tuscon 42 WH Tuston AZ WH Tuscon 4 WH Tuscon Ae WH Tuscon AZ WH MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES USING THE WAREHOUSE PROMOTION WIZARD If you want a different sequence for putting away items leave the box unchecked and go to the next screen Define the sequence for putting away items The next screen will depend on whether you check the box or not If you check the box the next screen will finish the wizard If you do NOT check the box the next screen will show you the Bulk Location Sort screen so you can create a sequence for the Put Away process Magaya Warehouse Promotion Wizard Congratulations You have succesfully completed the warehouse promotion process You will notice the icon For this zone change into a warehouse Employees can be assigned to a specife warehouse Additionally vou will now be able to change the sequence For this Warehouse Check the Finish bukkon bo end the wizard Finish the wizard and close it Your sequence is saved Results 229 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES USING THE WAREHOUSE PROMOTION WIZARD Notice the icon changed in the Warehouse Inspector from a warehouse zone icon to a warehouse icon After running the Warehouse Promotion Wizard the icon changes Warehouse Inspector
79. Type Descriptor Number Seal Humber 1 Seal Number 2 Location Dimensions Length 0 00 i Weight 0 00 Width 0 00 l Volume 0 00 Height 0 00 i Add the weight of contained pieces Motes Cancel Help The Container dialog box has many tabs For a Pickup Order the most commonly used tab is the first one the Container tab It enables you to select the type of container To do this click the arrow for the field Container Type and scroll through the list in the dropdown menu The Container Types included with the Magaya system are listed in order starting with different types of 20 foot containers then 40 foot containers and 259 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB 260 other package types Containers for air freight are included beginning with the letters LD Container Container Identification EE Hazardous AMS H Armiving Container Type gt Description Type Description J 20 Ft Refrigerated Aluminium Container Humber Standard Container Container 20 Ft Tank Container seamen 20 Ft Ventilated Container Sear iunners 40 Fk Collapsible Flat Rack Container 40 Ft Ory Freight Container Location 40 Ft Flat Rack Container endan 40 Ft Hard Top Container 40 Ft HE Refrigerated Aluminium Container Length 0 00 40 Ft High Cube Container width 0 00 BELE Se Tip If you know the name of the container type you re
80. Type What is Your company type This company ie best described as Distributor Wholesaler Warehouse Provider Logistics Provider or PL F Airline Carrier Ocean Carrier Yes this company has a bonded warehouse 56 STARTUP WIZARD BEGIN THE STARTUP WIZARD All fields are required except the fax Startup Wizard Company Information AI fields required Enter the basic information for your company eye ept fax Hame My Company Fe e Mail Enalrnicompany cor and Last Hame This information will be used by the system when filing out the International Trade Documents as well as in the accounting transactions statements and reports oni Additional Screens Enter information in the following screens by following the prompts and clicking the Next button to move to the next screen Company address e Company codes for IATA SCAC TSA etc The system automatically connects to a Web service and retrieves the current codes e Currency your company uses as its home currency and any others used Note You can skip these screens and enter the details later For more details on filling in these screens please see the section Additional Startup Wizard Tips Activation Key The system will ask you to enter an Activation Key Please contact Magaya Corporation during office hours in your U S region Monday through Friday to 57 STARTUP WIZARD BEGIN THE STARTUP WIZARD get the code
81. UD 46 24 Fuel Filters 20 00x18 00x8 00in Box ol 33 24 Diesel Fuel conditioner 4 00x6 00x20 T 26 24 Engine oil 3 00 3 00 9 00in Bottle T o0 4 O Rings 20 00 35 00 12 00in Box Create Pallet T 35 24 engine coolant 4 00x6 00x12 00in fi RECI E a Yard Miami E a Default zone Select the new location that you want to place the item in 382 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS CREATE A MOVE TASK INFORMED MOVES e To move the items to a pallet create a pallet by clicking on the Create Pallet button A dialog box opens Enter Pallet ID Enter a Pallet ID number or click the Get Next ID if you have set up Pallet ID numbers in the Configuration menu You can also print labels from this dialog box After you enter or create a pallet ID the Print Label button is active Enter Pallet ID PalletID 4440 101 a Geder Print Pallet IDs Amount of Pallet ILs fo Your printer name appears here 1 uSBoOo This will print a label to identify this pallet Give the label to the employee who will perform the move so the correct pallet is identi fied After creating the pallet you can then move it in the next screen 3 Create a Task Assign the movement to a user if you have the Magaya WMS Mobile handhelds If you click the button to Commit changes right away this will update your Magaya database right away and the 383
82. WMS Mobile application MC9590 MC5574 MC9190 MC65 RECOMMENDED HARDWARE e MC3190 shown in the image below e Honeywell Dolphin 6100 and 6500 Honeywell MX7 e Pidion handhelds Handhelds with a VGA resolution of 640 x 480 are supported All screens are automatically resized for the different manufacturers of handhelds If your Motorola device has a compatible camera you can take pictures of cargo with your handheld and the images will be directly attached to the transaction See the section Taking Pictures in the topic Receive Cargo with Magaya WMS Mobile The recommended operating system is Microsoft Windows CE 5 0 or higher and Windows Mobile A wireless network infrastructure will include access points and antennas such as Cisco AIR ANT2506 antenna 35 HARDWARE COSTS Cisco Aironet 1240 AG Wireless Access Point shown below Hardware Costs The average retail price of the hardware required to run a wireless network in your warehouse is Handheld devices 1000 2300 You may have to add the cost of the cradle extra batteries and other accessories 100 more per device Cisco Wireless Access Point Cisco Aironet 1240 AG 600 700 Cisco Antennas Cisco AIR ANT 2506 100 For example for a 100 000 square foot warehouse you may need two access points with two antennas per access point The cost will be approximately 2 x 700 4 x 100 1800 If you n
83. WR The option will be grayed out However you will be able to enter freight charges later when this cargo is included in a shipment Client to Bill Shipper Wenezuela Pool and Patio Coe c Transp ode of Transp Description Method Origin Bicycle Courier Unknown Motorcycle courier Unknown Pedestrian Ground 33 Rail Rail z0 Rail Containerized Fail 1 Road Other Ground 34 Truck Containerized X around 3l Vessel Ocean 10 Vessel Containerized Ocean 11 283 RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT SHIPPER CONSIGNEE TAB The fields on the Shipper Consignee tab affect the Charges tab General Shipper Consignee Supplier Commodities Changes Conzignee Hame Th field Barcelo Capella Resort ese fields affect the Address _ Change Charges tab rot gta UNITED STATES Client to Bil Ultima Barcelo Capela Resort Mode of Transp Truck Desinahor Miami seaport ox Cancel Income Charge Income Freight Charge Expense Charge warenge FRETEIDT Aik Freight Charge P L LL ics Danin Prepad i Airani sat D Totals r Experce income Profit L USO 0 00 US a MAGAYA TIF Goes Geeta conti Without the Mode of Transportation selected the Freight charges options will not be available These tabs are connected to make it easier to create transac tions 284
84. a time M Print each transaction with its assigned template Printer Wydev HP LaserJet P2015 Series PCL 6 The system will print the default template to the default printer To select a different printer click Configure To select other templates and their printers make selections below Select other document templates you maw want to print For each transaction Template Printer Select All Pickup Order For WWOCC VideyO4 HP LaserJet P2015 Series PCL 6 C Pickup Order No Charges WdevOdiHP LaserJet P2015 Series PCL 6 C Pickup Order VWidevOe HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL R C Pickup Order 190205 yidex0zi HF LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 123 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS BATCH EMAIL Batch Email 124 The Batch Print option is also available from the Document view Select the Batch Print option from the Print button In the wizard select the documents to print Select the documents vou wank bo print Template Printer Pickup Order For MYO WdevO4HP Laserjet P2015 Series PCL 6 Pickup Order No Charges WdevO4HP LaserJet P2015 Series PCL 6 Pickup Order WdevO2 HP Laserjet 4000 Series PCL C Pickup Order 19020 WdevO0 HP Laserjet 4000 Series PCL Use the default printer or select a printer per document optional You can send batch emails from Magaya Explorer to a group of customers from any list For example you can Create a filtered list of invoices and email th
85. are commonly used by your system These are set in Maintenance gt Ports The option to display an event online is checked by default If you do not want your customer or other entity to view the events online in LiveTrack click in the box to uncheck the option Click the OK button to save the event information and return tothe Events tab As you work with this transaction you may want events to display in this trans action If so check the box in the Events tab For more information on the Events tab and on how to define your own events for use in Pickup Orders and other transactions see the topic Events in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search events 263 Pick Up CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER ATTACHMENTS TAB Attachments Tab The Attachments tab is used to add any photographs or documents to the Pickup Order Add by clicking and dragging from another window on your computer or by clicking the Add button This tab is optional E Pickup Order General Shipper Consignee Supple Carriers Commodities Charges Events Attachments Pg i Add Select Device invoice MAGAYA TIP For details on adding attachments see the topic Attachments in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search attachments POD Tab Click on the POD Information checkbox to enable the fields if you want to require a POD Delivery date and time who
86. are items in the found repository it means that there was a mistake when a receiving operation was done and the quantity entered was less than the real received quantity for that item When you have finished a complete count cycle you may close the count session click the Close Session button e If there are items in the Lost repository the system will indicate that these items will be deleted from their transactions as they do not exist in the warehouse and the repository will be empty e If there were items in the Found repository the system will empty the repository but the items will remain in the Warehouse Receipt that was created for that session because they really exist in the warehouse You can add information to the WR such as shipper and consignee as needed You can also create a Move task to move those items to a location in the ware house The Restore button allows you to restore items in the Lost Repository before closing a session This is helpful when the count was done as part of system testing Closing a Count Session After you have closed the count session the next time you want to create a count task you will have to create a new session because the existing one was closed One important thing to notice is that while you were accepting the counts the system logged all the adjustments for the session you can later verify what was adjusted for what item and if it was a deficit or a surplus Ifan ite
87. are specific to that accounting function while the Invoices filter has different fields In the Invoices filter you can filter by AP or AR invoice number or dates US dollar or other currency amounts that are greater or lesser than amounts you enter and others For Checks you can filter by account name check number or other criteria 127 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE FILTER BUTTON Below are filters for Accounting functions Accounting Filter Filter T her Type hie Match at least one condition Account fae ears Applied to e Division Mumber Oooo e Currency Paid as Method Transaction Date Due Date From To From To 5212008 v 52172009 v svei 2008 svava Checks Filter Filter Type Pay to the order of Match all conditions Match at least one condition Account _ Date Ausit eae Te Divisions x wasranio v remo v aneno x x Ca Hee The Filter is useful especially when your lists are long Without a filter applied the list will show all the transactions for that folder dating back to the first one your company did To see only the most recent or relevant transactions use the filter button and select your criteria NOTE When you use the Filter button the software saves that filter unless you clear it The next time you view this list the filter will still be applied If you do not see some of the information you are looking for v
88. as how to articles and videos Use of Magaya software and its documentation are governed by the terms set forth in your license Copyright 2015 by Magaya Corporation All rights reserved CHAPTER 2 WAREHOUSE MANAGEMENT OVERVIEW Chapter 2 Warehouse Management Overview Overview From Quotation to warehousing and all the accounting transactions Magaya software enables managing all warehouse functions MAGAYA WMS PROCESSES OVERVIEW Magaya WMS Processes Overview When you open your Magaya WMS expand the folders to see the functions Magaya WMS File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting O a cj 1 d ipvard Pickup Receme Release Doc Page One Page One a Magaya Network a Tasks MAGAYA NEWS Er SE Fending Tasks Zl Task Histo Magaya Software Relez Quotations a Quotations A Quotation List En Warehousing H8 Pickup Orders Pickup Order List Warehouse Receipts E Warehouse Receipt List 7 Commodity List Cargo Releases m Cargo Release List z Cargo Movernents bas 8 Cargo Movernent List A Package Types a _ Locations Laon Ol Warehouse Inspector 2 9 Inventory Item Definitions ESTOS to help you opt e commerce and replen _to Warehouse operations Leads i e Phil Nith over 7 000 islands i th e freight forwarding in careo from one island te trucks and couriers on n
89. as the WR e b or go to the Accounting folder and add the invoice or bill Next link it to the operations transaction this way Go to the operations transaction such as the WR and click the Actions button and select Transaction List Then right click the accounting transaction and select Link Invoice or Link Bill or you click the Actions button in the Transaction List to open a dialog box which shows all the unlinked accounting trans actions select the one that you want to link It will then appear in the Transaction List for the operations transaction Here s an example for scenario 1 above You create a Pickup Order add charges and generate the charges Now the charges are Posted and linked to the Pickup Order Then you convert that Pickup Order into another operations transaction such as a Warehouse Receipt The charges are carried over from the Pickup Order to the WR and show in the WR Charges tab because they re linked These charges are automatically linked to the first operations transaction the one that you clicked the Generate button and they are part of the history of that operations transaction Here s an example for scenario 2 above You create a Pickup Order No charges are added Later a bill needs to be added to that Pickup Order So you create it manually or someone in the Accounting department creates the accounting transaction manually This can be done either in the Accounting f
90. be accepted which users have counted which locations etc You also have records of what has been done in each count session CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY HISTORY OF COUNTS History of Counts Count Per Location History This option from the Counts button menu shows the history of sessions for each location that had a count done Configure Process Counts Description Counts per Location History Adjustments History Select Count Session Status Number Type Description wl Open ogi Cycle Count May 2010 Garden Su Cancel VIGIL Filter 1 of 1 elements To view the tasks in a session double click on the session or select it and click the View button A new dialog box opens displaying the Cargo Count List Cargo Count List Count Session 0001 Dates Last monthto date w From 5 1 2010 To 6 16 7200 Status Type Date Part Number Locations Owner T Completed Informed 06 14 2010 llene Taylor yi Completed Blind 060372010 2 llene Taylor T Completed Informed 06 03 2010 llene Taylor yi Completed Blind 06701 2010 llene Taylor yi Completed Informed 06 01 2010 llene Taylor T Completed Informed 06 01 2010 45 1237 llene Taylor 441 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY HISTORY OF COUNTS To view the details of a cargo count double click it or select it and click the Details button To view the count results for a location double click on the location in the Cargo Count Detail
91. be checked These rates are pulled from the rates entered in the Accounting folder gt Rates To create a Quotation from this rate 1 Select the Customer if the field is blank 2 Click Create Quotation The information about that customer and rate will be automatically included in the Quotation dialog box Make any changes needed and click OK when done 511 ACTIONS FOR QUOTATIONS QUERY RATES Note The next time you open the Query Rates dialog box your last query is saved so you do not have to re enter data to search again for that information The Query Rates dialog box can be moved aside so you can work in the screen and click in different functions in your Magaya Explorer without losing the Query screen 512 Index A Accounting 101 Accounting from cargo release 474 Accounting from WR 334 Accounting Pickup Order 273 Accounting Wizard 65 88 Actions button 135 Activation Key 22 55 Add a license of Magaya software 55 Add dimensions to items with scanner 370 Administrator assign permissions 66 Administrator login 24 Agents 145 Air carrier 143 Air Waybill add new numbers 144 Antenna hardware 35 Arriving pieces 407 Attach documents from Microsoft Outlook 324 Attachments 323 drag and drop 325 scan 325 B Balance Sheet inventory adjustments 452 Bar code scan item 306 Batch email 124 Blind Count create a 427 perform a 434 Blind Receiving 357 Buttons on toolbars 115 C Cancel a transaction 480
92. blank to start counting items that are not in a pallet You can perform the following actions from this screen Code Click to enter the code manually if the scanner does not scan the number e Reset Click this button to reset the count if you are interrupted while counting e View Select an item to view its details Qty Quantity If you cannot scan an item you can click the Qty button to manually enter the quantity e S N Serial Numbers If there is a serial number for the item you can also scan the serial number for a part number Pallet Click this button to count the items inside a pallet Accept Count Click when you are done counting If the quantity counted differs from the quantity in the database enter a reason for the difference Edit Reason o Reason Z Select a Reason Descr iptig 2 ecit Reason Bp a gt Br A reason for each difference must be entered to finish the count Perform a Blind Count A Blind Count does not show item information in the WMS Mobile screen As you scan each item in the location the item information displays on the screen 434 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PROCESS COUNTS The icon for the scanned item has a question mark and the Org column has a dash indicating no quantity information is displayed because it is a blind count Items To Count Items in location A1RB Description rg dat WS Wheelbarrow B Tree staking twine
93. button to end the search The Quick Find option opens a search box that gives you the options to search by transaction type and number Select the type and enter the number When the transaction or document is found the search box closes and the document opens Quick Find Transaction Type Warehouse Receipt 133 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE FIND BUTTON The Entity Finder option opens a list of all the entities in your system including customers carriers employees and more Entity Finder Eg Name Type Entity ID Phone E a Shipping Line Customers E 2 Shipping Line Carriers a Wh SUser Employees a wWwhHSUser Employees a Warehousing Vendor Vendors a Warehouse Employee 1 Employees a Venezuela Shoe Distributors Customers a Trek Bicycles Customers B TAM Cargo Carriers 117 of 117 elements TF Actions Ef Close Enter any text you need to find such as a name partial or full of an entity When you click the Find button the results list displays the entities found You can rearrange the columns in the results list by clicking and dragging them into place Click on the Actions button to select which columns you want included in your results list To make changes to an entity use the Edit button Tip You can also double click on the item in the results list to open it A counter on the bottom of the list tells you how many items are displayed out of a total number of items The Find V
94. can be left blank if you do not know it at this time Shipper Tab Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER SHIPPER TAB The Shipper tab contains fields to select who is shipping the cargo or items and where to pick them up E Pickup Order Pickup Location Hame Art Basel Gallery 18 Alton Road 18 Alton Road Miami Beach FL 33139 Miami Beach FL 33139 UNITED STATES UNITED STATES Select the Shipper by clicking the arrow The list displays the Customers Vendors and Forwarding Agents that are saved in your Maintenance folder If 247 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER SHIPPER TAB you don t see any or if you need to add a new one click the plus sign in the drop down menu s toolbar a Pickup Order General Shipper Consignee Supplier Carers Commodities Charges Events Attachme Shipper Pickup Location Mame Hame Art Basel Gallery Art Basel Gallery Mame Li Entity ID 3 ABC Sporting Goods Inc Customers African International Suppliers Forwarding Agents a Agricultural Manufacturers Inc Customers a Air Jamaica Customers a Arizona Distributor Customers a Ort Basel Gallery Customers mi Art Supplies Customers i Atlantic Surplus Customers l AutoLite Automotive Vendors amp Baltimore Agent Forwarding Agents iP R Se Add The address for the entity will display on the Shipper tab The Address Change button click to select
95. data is also saved for use in reports etc Templates for documents are available from the Actions button Custom fields can be added to documents labels and reports 13 WAREHOUSE PROCESSES OVERVIEW Warehouse Processes Overview Processing goods in and out of a warehouse or Distribution Center DC consists of four major steps 1 Receive Goods When goods arrive at the warehouse the receiving process begins A Warehouse Receipt WR is issued The WR serves as proof that goods were delivered to the warehouse and are being stored according to the arrangements made by the customer Bar codes can be scanned 2 Put Away Goods Goods are grouped according to type placed in a staging area and put away This process often involves two employees one who receives the goods and one who puts them away To save time goods can be grouped and put away directly instead of going to a staging 14 3 4 WAREHOUSE PROCESSES OVERVIEW area The put away process is also called a Move Magaya software can create tasks for employees Create and Fulfill a Shipping Release Order When items or cargo need to be released shipped out a Pick Order Task is also sent to the warehouse for processing In the warehouse the pick and load orders are received on handheld devices that are connected to a central database Based on the order the goods are picked and often placed in a quality control area to verify quantities an
96. destination location Create a New Move Task to Receive the Items at the Destination Warehouse When the transferred items arrive at the destination warehouse create another Move Task from the Warehouse Transfer document view in the Cargo Move ment subfolder for the WMS Mobile user to perform at the destination ware house so the items can be removed from the truck and placed in their new 399 ACTIONS WITH CARGO MOVEMENTS UNLOAD location at the destination warehouse This Move can only be created if the Warehouse Transfer transaction has a status of In Transit Actions with Cargo Movements Unload To unload the items In the Warehouse Transfer document view click the Actions button and select Create Unloading Move Task Assign the task to a WMS Mobile user and the system will add all the items from the Warehouse Transfer into the Task for you The WMS Mobile user performs the Move task removing the items from the truck and putting them in their new location This completes the transfer and updates your database with a status of Completed Other options in the Actions menu include moving a mobile location such as a cart or forklift and move items to a final destination Actions Reports You can create reports about the Cargo Movement tasks by clicking on the Actions button in the list view Run reports by status Cargo Movement number division or destination Commodity List Introduction 400
97. eee ea eee is 473 latemal Notes Tabi 2 3 s h40 o4nsemndkhatanvidoies anche kbs been ge ds 474 What Actions can I Perform with a Cargo Release 0 0 0 00085 474 Generate Accounting Transactions from a Cargo Release 474 OMT ACUI NG trpi E Qunth at ncn a e E Beh ee hag See Oat 477 Verify a Packing List in a Cargo Release 0 0 0 cee es 481 Release Cargo with WMS Mobile Devices 0 000000 eee 482 Create a Single PICK TASK pica eake Ae ob elee dae Ree dele deen 482 Creac a Partial Pick Lasks au Ay wtp educa tire alee e oo eee eid kee ed 484 Perform a Single Pick Task on the WMS Mobile Device 486 Create Multiple Pick Tasks nonna Ge Sind wei ae ates akb d eked 4 490 Fulfill a Multiple Pick Task using a Mobile Location 494 Credle dad Task eucevatee aoa eee ere oe Sede teee sek eee dees 498 Perform the Load Task on the WMS Mobile Device 499 Chapter 14 Quorauons 3 6 204615 68 a a RAG ORR Gee Ree eS 503 TMOG CUNO IN oes ea cb aati aaaea ah dara dead cass Sip ta iw ected Gesatad ee Et 503 Create a Car o QUON sereen ee atetct ees aa See esa Cee EDA 503 DICOS onc at avews park tues weed nh ee en eee ee eh ee be ee ee ees 504 ACHOUS 10b QUOTATIONS 102 46 4 4 os Bins So weet HOARE ORAS EROS Ege waewe asad 507 STIR Ae erreke neers com aca ae en ace ai ge ate ine ee a ras 510 Index CHAPTER 1 How TO USE THIS MANUAL INTRO
98. enter a new destination pallet Pallet po leave empty for no pallet Select Pallet Ca Ge GR Ga This screen is useful when picking many items and placing them on a pallet The forklift takes the pallet to the QC area and returns to the rack with an empty pallet to continue the Pick task Scan each pallet ID and click Move each time the pallet is full This can be done multiple times during a Pick task until all the items are picked The system can also define the forklift or a cart as a mobile location so it can be scanned This saves every step of the picking process and provides greater visibility into the warehouse tasks For details on creating mobile locations see the section on creating warehouse locations in Chapter 7 of the Magaya WMS User Manual 489 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE MULTIPLE PICK TASKS 6 Scan or enter the destination location Select the location i Scan or enter a new destination location QCA Location Back O Ok Select Location egam AS 7 Print labels if needed From the Cargo Release you can print shipping labels also from File gt Print Labels The label will identify the pallet and items the customer and shipment information As items are picked they disappear from the list on the handheld screen You can finish the task at any time even if there are still items to be picked The system will save the portion
99. in the Magaya Community can read to learn about you You can enter keywords that will help people find you when they are searching Keywords can include terms such as freight forwarder NVOCC warehouse etc Icons on the top corner of the screen allow you to save the profile reset your changes back to the original fill in the form automatically based on the information already entered when the Magaya software was installed and to upload your company profile to the Magaya Network The second feature in the Community folder is Search You can search by company name country state or province city and or by keywords You can use as many or few fields as you want when you search The third feature in the Community folder is Invitations You can send an invitation see the invitations you have received and accept an invita tion or reject deny one On the right side of the Community screen is a window showing you the Communication Center and a window for Traffic which shows transactions being exchanged For more on the Magaya Network see the Magaya Software Communications Manual 95 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS TASKS FOLDER The Messages folder can be expanded to show Magaya Network Outbox Shows messages pending to go out Inbox To view messages received such as online Bookings sat Dates All From 3 Status Type Identificatior a sg ee E Online Booking Requests 17 y am Pia E Online Booking Request
100. into the warehouse For example you may receive 50 items such as laptop computers The 50 laptops are all the same part number but each laptop has its own serial number to identify it When you receive the item scan the part number and then scan each serial number barcode This is useful if a manufacturer recalls items Then you can find the exact set of serial numbers affected by the recall and send those items back to the manufacturer Commodity General Identification EEL Hazardous AMS External Trackir Definition Commodity Tentification Serial serial number here Invoice Number This will also keep track of which customers buy which serial numbers You can configure your Magaya system to keep a record of the serial numbers Go to ID BY MAGAYA RECEIVING LABEL Maintenance gt Configuration gt WMS This is also useful when exporting items to certain countries that require serial numbers be reported on documen tation WMS General Inventory Ogu Fr 6Gontiqure how to save serial l numbers Default package type J Keep Inventory by Serial Number 7 Save Serial Number When items go out Ifyou add resale Inventory Item Definitions to your Magaya system you can tell the system to save the serial numbers for that part number when items are released When you receive or release items by serial numbers you will see a dialog box that will populate with th
101. list click the red X in the top corner of the list To view arriving inventory click on the Actions button and select View Arriving Inventory This will list all items of this type that are on their way to your warehouse as part of a Pickup Order To update the quantity of pieces select Update Quantity of Pieces The system keeps the quantities automatically Updating is only necessary if a discrepancy exists between the amount of pieces and the content of the inventory list The updating process may take a long time to complete You can also import and export data to and from your Magaya system See the section on importing inventory data in this chapter You can also choose the columns you want to see and add related columns to customize your list view You can add custom fields to an Inventory Item Definition The custom fields will be available when you receive those items and enter them into a WR 187 WAREHOUSE ZONES AND LOCATIONS INTRODUCTION Warehouse Zones and Locations Introduction 188 Magaya Explorer provides you with a way to enter the names of locations in your warehouse into the Magaya Explorer and use them to assign the cargo toa certain location in the warehouse You can also create reports about your ware house using the location information TIP When you first start using Magaya software it is recommended to set up your warehouse locations and warehouse zones This will make the locations available to use in
102. lost or found negative or positive difference You can also see the reason for the loss that was entered by the WMS Mobile handheld user when that item was counted The system also displays the items existing in that location at the moment before doing any adjustment Count results for location REC B Status Falet ther Code Database Quantity Count Quantity Difference Reason T Open POTTING 25 0 25 Lost To view lost or found items click on the View Lost or View Found button on the side of the screen A result can be discarded e The items in a selected location can be viewed in the bottom part of the screen Items for location REC B 3b Description Fieces Fart Humber Warehouse Receipt q Loaded Pacemaker Altrua model et T Loaded Balloon catheter et T Un Hand Stents et pa On Hand potting soil T On Hand Facemaker Altrua model et a Un Hand orange juice E n Hand Accept a Count Session After you have verified the count results you can start accepting them You do not have to do the adjustments manually Magaya WMS will do that automati cally for you The recommended process for accepting counts is to first accept the counts that include lost items negative differences and then those with found items positive differences Select the count task and click the Accept button the count task is removed from the list Lost and Found When you accept a count result by clicking the Accept
103. not exist Do you Want create a new item with it Location Pallet Note If you want to skip this screen change the Operations Settings in the WMS Configuration menu to ensure no checkmark for the option Confirm item creation Operation s settings Receiving Receiving operation settings Enforce default receiving location F Only use For WMS Mobile Ski tiki B Eii entities Uncheck to skip the step Confirm item creation on the handheld Prompt properties when new item is created Allow empty pallets Default to item creation without code If you uncheck the box for Confirm item creation then the system will not ask the handheld user if they want to create the item with the tracking number scanned The result of this configuration is that the handheld will 363 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING 364 go straight from scanning to the Dimensions screen when a user is performing the Measure function As you continue with the receiving process of scanning items with the handheld the items will be added to the list on the WMS Mobile screen and saved to your Magaya database Tips If you are receiving a large order of palletized items of the same type use the New button It is the easiest way to enter several pallets of the same type of item For example to receive 40 pallets of the same type of Dell PCs and each pallet has 6 PCs you can
104. of bonded warehouse is a U S govern ment owned leased facility where cargo is stored by order of Customs to be examined if it is pending final release or seized The cargo in held by G O maybe auctioned off after a time limit Other Use this type when the other options do not apply E Warehouse Receipt General Shipper Consignee Suppler Cana Commodities Changes Events Attackenents Note O W Empty Mumbar WwH 152 Date 6 24 2015 gF Time 1410 57 PM Employes Admurestrator Division Issued By Bonded warehouse types Destination Agent Bonded WH Type Domestic Entry Mumbes Bonded Eny Date f 6 24 7201 EFS 0 0 Other MAGAYA TIP U S Customs gives you the Entry Number to identify the cargo and the date is the date it was declared which means when the filing was done If you have more than one warehouse a dropdown field appears on the General tab of the WR To learn about creating multiple warehouses see the topic Sequencing in the Warehouse 281 RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT SHIPPER CONSIGNEE TAB Shipper Consignee Tab Select the shipper from the dropdown menu Warehouse Receipt General Shipper Consignee Supple Carrier Commodities Changes Events Attachments Note gt Shipper Consignes Hams Name Atlantic Sunplus HE Cago Company Address Change Address 3224 Noth College Road Of eo MW 18h Ten ace Wilmington NC 26405 kiami FL 33172
105. of the task finished so it can be completed later You can also continue picking items by returning to the item list and continue picking the items as explained in Step 4 above Create Multiple Pick Tasks 490 Overview This feature enables the creation of many tasks from multiple trans actions You do not have to make Pick tasks one by one It is ideal for companies that fulfill many small orders for many customers This is useful so you don t have to create many tasks that send one employee across the warehouse to one location repeatedly to get one item at a time This will group the orders by location so the user can go to one location and get all the items for different orders This process will not break an order For example all the items ordered in one Sales Order will be in one task This process can be done from the list of Cargo Releases Sales Orders or for multiple shipments A wizard guides you through the steps This feature is avail able in Magaya software 9 3 and higher RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE MULTIPLE PICK TASKS Steps Let s show how it works by using some Sales Orders These Sales Orders have Cargo Releases created for them You can begin in the SO list or the CR list Let s begin in the SO list You can select multiple SOs from the list or start the process from the Actions button Create Picking Tasks If you select multiple SOs from the list right click on them and select Crea
106. optimize the receiving process by using the New button and entering the information in the next screen To receive items that don t have part numbers configure the system by checking the box Default to item creation without code Then users can skip that step on the handheld 5 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING After entering or scanning the part number if applicable and the system will fill in the description and dimensions for that item If you are receiving items that do not have a part number then you can enter the description optional Click the Edit button to enter more details such as the dimensions etc Warehouse Receipt u G of E wWwHR Default IRET PrE Rattan chair Highlight the item and click Edit to add Quantity received Option To speed up the receiving you can enter dimensions later by using the Measure feature If you entered a Part Number PN the system will search for the PN in your Inventory Item Definitions List and fill in the screen when it finds the data 365 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING Enter the Quantity i JPE A A ECTE ESELI yer er eeee nate ve ALE amp k Fa Fart Client Tracking Description Package Quantity M _ LJIs Palletized Amount ef identical items 1 reor enana eas Ea anns ok cancer F scroll
107. or a Magaya Logistics Advisor will call you within the next 24 hours or the next business day depending on your time zone Startup Wizard Get an Achvabon Key and create a Magaya Network ID Tour comtact mtomabon has been saved and serito Magaya Conporaton Tour request for an Avchryvstion Key it being orocerced We wal contact you or you can contact us Monday through Friday J am to S pm 788 645 9150 or activation mageya com l you dont have the Achyabon Key now vou can clope tre wizard and open it laber bo enber the key Your mfornation has been saved Enter Activation Kep Ceas passwd Corim passed 6 characters mmimurmni OCick Create ID bo contnue Back Chose Heip You can exit the wizard at this step and all the information you entered will be saved You can continue the wizard later by double clicking the Magaya Explorer icon that the system saves on your desktop When you receive the Activation Key open the Starup Wizard again and enter it into the field Create a Password In this screen you will also create a password The password must be a minimum of 6 characters Any letter or number combination will be valid Generate Magaya Network ID Then click the Create ID button Wait while the system generates a number and fills in the field Note This will be your Magaya Network ID number We recommend making a note of all the information in this screen for your records The next screen c
108. process 7 Click Install 25 SOFTWARE COMPONENTS INSTALLED TERMINAL SERVICES INSTALLATION 8 When the setup is finished click Close A shortcut icon to the Magaya Explorer is created on your desktop 9 Double click on the Magaya Explorer icon to access the Magaya software Perform the steps above to install the Magaya software for all the workstations that will run the Magaya software Terminal Services Installation The Terminal Services set up consists of clients computers connected to the server and the application runs on the server 1 Install the software See the steps in the section Steps to Install on a Single Computer or Server 2 Copy the shortcut icon for the installation you just did and put the copy onto the desktop of each user The software is ready for the user Software Components Installed When you install Magaya software the following are installed Magaya Explorer This is a Windows Explorer look a like program that allows you to manage all the data with a familiar interface As part of the installation process Magaya software creates a desktop icon of the Magaya Explorer for you Magaya Document Editor This program allows you to enter data on forms Its most common use is inside the Magaya software but you can use it as an independent program to create and save to file your forms outside of the Magaya software NOTE When you use the Magaya Docu ment Editor directly
109. repack the cargo and enter the dimensions Container Type Pallet Description Pallet Number Seal Number 1 Seal Humber 2 Dimensions Length 45 in Weight 35 00 lb width 44 in 7 Add the weight of contained pieces Height 44 iri Location Volume 53 78 fe 14L i Notes W Create multiple packages Create as many as possible Create upto total packages 2 Pigalle Cancel Hep If you want to make more than one package check the box Create multiple packages For example if you receive 1000 pieces but they come in boxes of 50 308 COMMODITIES REPACKING CARGO check this box to create 20 boxes in one step There are two options for creating multiple packages Create as many as possible use when you don t have a specific request from a customer or Create a specific number of packages Enter the number The next screen in the Repack wizard enables you to select the items to repack These are the items from the WR Repacking Wizard Select items Step 2 of 2 Please select the teme you want to place inside this container ou can also enter additional amount of pieces for this container Status Package Description Total Pieces a Mark all L OnHand Box Bosch Spark Plug 15 zo Pieces Fitter gt Scar Additional pieces Create 0 additional pieces inside this package You can enter the cargo information Weight Volume etc for these pieces later z Bac
110. shipping dacs ar o hel Air Way Bill Carga Manifest le Loading Guide 102 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS MISCELLANEOUS They can be selected from the Add Document button on the Shipment toolbar Shipment 09 amp 4s me P Houses Protit Liquidati Trarnsac General Entities Routin i General Routing Cf Select Documents Shipper Documents Name Caribbean Fl C A R hers Select Documents either from Standard Documents or Addresa 21 Sugar Cane Mi previously defined St John s ANTIG Select trom Standard Documents Templates a E Templates aya shipping docs air PW shipping docs ocean wef lf Air wap Bill fixed info Working with Document and List Views In Magaya Explorer you can view documents and lists of documents and transactions To view a document click on a subfolder such as Warehouse Receipts under the Warehousing folder Then a Warehouse Receipt document is displayed in the document view of the Magaya Explorer see the figure below 103 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS WORKING WITH THE LIST VIEW Pip Edt Isan Domai Merten Pagel Acordo Papati Optera Hain o oo aA g gt 2 5 A d Back Pras Zooey ake Print Pre Piit FE EF Tao Fatregh Faim E rd Pagar Metre i PHF a ay if T Fit Prerio edi Edi Desea Find F m ami Tom TE gutira Ei Wera A irit HWC Cargo Comta Warehouse Receipt peana raai 8725 NW 16 Tamace fy eee bee L
111. sign to expand the list of serial numbers and view them Notes on the PO Lot Numbers and Jobs fields of the Identification tab of the Commodity dialog box 295 COMMODITIES EEI TAB EEI Tab 296 If the item was included in a PO and converted into a WR the PO number will display here POs are available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and Commerce System Any other PO number can be added here if needed The PO number is from the buyer of the item If you have the same PO number for all the items you can enter it at the WR level Otherwise you can enter it per item seperately Note The Job feature is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution it s used to group transactions into projects Lot Numbers Enter the lot number for the item if applicable The lot number identifies a certain batch of items of the same type part number Many items that have lot numbers also have expiration dates This lot number is tied directly to the expiration date Also on the Identification tab The buttons Shipping in and Came in are only activated later if this item is included in a shipment or other transaction When an item is loaded into a Cargo Release this will link to that Cargo Release The Came In information applies to imported shipments not exports and it s not used in the Magaya WMS program Expiration Date If an expiration date is entered in the dialog box it will appear on the document default t
112. system sends an alert when the inventory for this item reaches the number 181 CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE you define here as the Minimum Stock so that replenishment can be done You can alert an employee to replenish the items or leave the field blank so it will go to all the handheld scanners Inventory Item Definitions General Unitary Value 0 00 Purchase Item Sales ltem Inventory Type FIFO First In First Out Costing Method Specific Identification Commissions Replenishment Mininunn Stock Prefered endor When reaches its minimum stack Alert Employee E Alert Client by Email Place a purchase order to its preferred vendor Quantity to Order 0 Codes MOM Code a Cancel Help To send the customer client an email notice of low inventory check the box Alert Client by email Ensure there is an email address in the customer profile If you selected a Preferred Vendor you can also choose to create a PO with that vendor when inventory is low The PO will appear in the Purchase Order list for users of the Magaya Supply Chain Solution When you are finished entering information for the Inventory Item Definition the item is now saved in your Magaya system and ready to be used in WRs and other transactions 182 CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITIONS LIST When you edit an Inventory Item Definit
113. the Picking sequence click the Picking view from the Current Sequence button Any locations that are not part of this view are displayed in the bottom half of the screen From the list of locations outside the sequence you can add locations from there to be part of the sequence or remove them In the top half of the screen which shows the locations in the sequence you can move individual locations up or down This will change how the system recom mends locations to put items in or to pick from Click Save A dialog box will ask if you want to save changes 218 SEQUENCING IN THE WAREHOUSE IMPORT A SEQUENCE The order of the locations in this view the locations in a zone on the top of the list are the ones that will be filled first By default before making any changes to the order of locations the system displays the locations in alphabetical order A at the top and Z at the bottom To see more options when working with the locations in the Sequence tab right click a location to see a pop up menu Current sequence FPot awa y T Status Code Description Empty Type fone Mo Storage Houston Warehouse Houston Warehouse Houston Warehouse Houston Warehouse Houston Warehouse Views Items Right click Location Definitions 7 Location Assign Location Definition for pop up menu Warehouse ones Add to Warehouse Zone Default Recening Location Import Export Choose
114. the date to the name of the view when you save it When you save list views you can view them by clicking the menu The list of saved VIEWS Atlantic Surplus WR s Barcelo 2011 2012 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS WORKING WITH THE LIST VIEW Manage the lists by selecting Manage Views from the star pop up menu Save this views Save this views as Manage views iS mW A dialog box will open showing the saved views for that list Custom view Manager Object Type Warehouse Receipt Custom views Name Owner Published Barcelo 2011 2012 Administrator Mo Atlantic Surplus WRS Administrator Mo ABC Sporting Goods WRS Administrator Edit Publish Unpublish Remove Publish a List View for All Users to see To make a saved list view available to other Magaya users in your network select it and click the Publish button Any list you save but do not publish is only available for you to see You can also edit or delete remove a saved view Changes can be made to a saved view Other List Features A counter on the bottom of any list in Magaya Explorer tells you how many items are displayed out of a total number of items To view all the transactions such as Warehouse Receipts WR in the Ware house Receipt List select the All option in the Dates field on the top of the list Note Make sure you do not have a filter in place Click on the Unfilter b
115. the information in the EEI This data will be automat ically transferred to a shipment when you create a shipment or a cargo release This data will also be transferred to the EEI form that is sent toUS Customs AES 297 COMMODITIES EEI TAB Click on the Browse button to search for and select a Schedule B Code A dialog box opens showing the Schedule B codes Code Description Quantity 1 A 9403907000 FURNITURE PARATS OF WOOD 9403905500 PARTS OF FURNITURE OF RUBBER O 9403901000 PARTS OF FURNITURE OF 4 KIND US 9403890000 FURNITURE OF OTHER MATERIALS I 9403810000 FURNITURE OF BAMBOO OR RATTAN 9403700000 FURNITURE OF PLASTICS WOODEN FURNITURE NESOI 9403500000 WOODEN FURNITURE OF A FIND US 9403409500 WOODEN FURNITURE OF A FIND US 9403300000 WOODEN FURNITURE OF A FIND US 9403200030 METAL FURNITURE EXCLUDING OFF 9403200010 METAL FURNITURE OF A KIND USED 9403100040 METAL FURNITURE OF A FIND USED 4402900020 MEDICAL SURGICAL DENTAL OR WE Cancel VIEW Filter Unfilter Help Commonly LI Used Se FE XM a SO KD Oo Oo o o o o Ej oO oO o o o Oo a S fo of 876 elements This list contains thousands of entries To limit the list click on the Commonly Used checkbox This will display only the codes you use regularly You can also filter the list to display other entries When you have selected the code you need click the OK button This will return you to the Commodity d
116. the new location where the items will be placed Task List Here AIMS 1 of 1 7iiijz01l Sent By Administrator From REC A416 Pallet io Pallet To Mary other m Move car and steel to yard 3 Scan or select the location of the item that will be moved This example shows two locations B1LC for the bamboo stakes and B1LA for the 386 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE pruning shears Then click the Select button These are the existing loca tions of the items Move from Location list Pek I bamboo Stakes EfeiLc D Pruning shears fa BiLA Notice the barcode symbol in the top right corner when this is displayed on a screen the scanning function is enabled for that screen 4 Inthe next screen click the location and click the Select button Move From m R EC Receiving B PVC Pipe Schedu 387 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE 388 5 Scan the items to move or click on the item To see details about the item click the View button Alternatively click the Quantity button and enter the number of items to move WM 4 stake Mext location aa items to Move E HF The Code column may show a code such as P for Pallet or L for Location To view item details click the View button The screen shows tabs with item informati
117. the right side of the Ware house Inspector screen You can view the Locations in the zone or click the Sequence tab to see the sequence for the locations 217 SEQUENCING IN THE WAREHOUSE CREATE A SEQUENCE FOR A SINGLE WAREHOUSE This will show the locations in a zone not the zone itself in the sequence tab H Tuscon AZ WH Current sequence Putman T i pE Dihaja 2 i eee zi Shafei yt asebhouse Status Code Description Empty Type Zone Magen aeshiousce j fat Used Bi Hark No Storage Hoton Warehouss Hobie Locators 5 El Used F hark 2 Mer Taga Heson Wanahisa T i P i F ad i LEE Cold Storage Zone Dud R3 Rack 3 No Storage Houston Warehouse EI 2sHIP Gilused RECI Recening ores No Recenving Houston Wiarehouss 7 E oct FS Used OEL Duality Gonbrol Ho Gus Control Houston Warehouse p R e aag N HEE Deist Zore Sequence tab Locabons outside sequence Staus Co Cisescription Empty Typa Fons Pucks Cy mets ZSHIP Shippinglos Yeo Shipping Cold Shorags Zone In the Sequence tab gt Put Away view you can see how the locations in a zone are populated with the items This view shows the locations in a zone that are included in the sequence for Put Away View Sequence type Current sequence Picking Picking Status Put away CI Empty AZPICK1 Pick Small LI Empty AZPICK Pick Large I Empty AZOT Quality Control 1 al Used AFZREC AZ Receiving TT Froamks fFYRFP 1 AF Benlenich 1 To see
118. the wizards helps you save time because the information is automatically placed in documents such as Warehouse Receipts shipment documents bills and Cargo Releases You do not need to retype your address your customer s address etc each time 49 How TO MAKE CHANGES TO INFORMATION YOU ENTER Options You can begin working with the Magaya software without using the Startup Wizard or the Accounting Wizard You can enter information as you work and the software will save it Startap Wizard xX Maei bo ee Sep wied f Tie eara a e aga though the mip of pour mari Sta rtup aa Wizard Jbisnrg 4 lags Merh IC For pou commana ey biri weeded bth ki ted Coa Hoa ahan e See Mecounling Wired E i one U Taea bo fhe arig card Thee bkra depa ral queda pou haghi Dhearg Fi Corr Fetal T ek on Pal Sathng up ihe Charl of Ascani Sang up he ere ord Saree il Entergy ther caeran bales ke cures errs ot Accounting Fal Ces des pe Phi Eatin Bay Le Wizard How to Make Changes to Information You Enter When you enter information in the Startup Wizard such as carriers and ports you use frequently the details are saved in the Maintenance folder You can edit the information by opening the Startup Wizard or Accounting Wizard at any time You can also make changes by clicking on the Maintenance folder or the Accounting folder You can also make changes on the fly as you work To make changes to information in the M
119. this screen you can view the count results for each location When you select a location the system will show you the item codes and quantities that were counted in that location and if items were lost or found negative or positive difference You can also see the reason the WMS Mobile user entered when that item was counted The system also displays the items existing in that loca tion at the moment before doing any adjustment Let s look at the screen in more detail The list of counts to be processed is displayed at the top of the screen Process Count Items Count Session 0001 Counts to be processed Status Location Date Employee Type W Counted AIRE OB O3 2010 WMSLUser Blind T Counted B1LA 0671472010 WHS User Blind y Counted REC E 06 14 2010 WSU ser Informed vw Counted REC E 06142010 WSU ser Informed e Buttons available for this section of the screen are Accept Count Recount Delete Count or Close Session These buttons are explained below If items are pending to be accepted then the count session cannot be closed The icon for the count is red if there is a discrep ancy in the completed count 436 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY ACCEPT A COUNT SESSION The results of the count for each specific location are shown in the middle of the screen When you select a location the system will show the items codes and quantities that were counted in that location indicating if items were
120. this tab If you want the charges to list in a certain order right click to move them up and down and then select Output charges as displayed Other options available when you right click on a charge include the option to recalculate regnerate charges if you make changes then click the Generate button again to update the A R and A P transactions if you already made them For additional information about the Charges tab please see the topic Charges in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search charges_tab Events Tab The Events tab is used to list any events related to the Pickup Order The fields on this tab are optional E Pickup Order Shipper Consignee Supplier Canes Commodities Changes Events Attachments POD Mot Date Name Location Delete Events tab a Wl F Show evente from all related trangactions ok C Canca C H There are many event types to select from or you can add your own Click the Add button A dialog box opens to set the date and time for an event and to 262 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER EVENTS TAB select from a dropdown menu of choices If you don t see a choice that fits your needs you can type the event in the Description field Ewent Date amp Time Bf 2 2015 je 1 03 07 PM Event Type Details Location MW Include in Tracking Cancel Help The Location field includes the ports that
121. through tabs tem tab Enter Quantity The Warehouse Item screen has tabs you can scroll through to select and view or enter information about the item This screen shows the Item tab where you enter the quantity received If you will receive identical items enter the Quantity to save time Click OK The quantities are updated Warehouse receipt EA ea WHR Default Steel FECA Receiving i rebar Steelvvork Location Pallet To continue receiving more items scan the next item or click New If 366 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING you are done receiving items click Finish If the cargo is palletized click the Location Pallet button See the section on pallets for details Continue to receive all the items for this Uninformed Receiving task by following the steps above As you receive items the items will be added to the list on the screen and saved to the database 6 Click the Finish button If you have not printed labels for all the items the system will ask you if you want to finish the task without printing labels Extra Info With the Online Pickup Orders feature customers can place pickup orders on Magaya LiveTrack and print labels for their boxes at their location When you receive those boxes you can scan those labels and the system will connect the information in the Pickup Order to the WR Expiration Dates
122. to create forms the information is not stored in your database Magaya Communication Server Agent This runs as a service CS exe and allows you to log into the Magaya Network system share data among other companies using Magaya software send documents via email and let your clients track their transactions in real time To interact with the 26 UPDATE MAGAYA SOFTWARE server you use the Magaya Communication Server Agent A Magaya Communication Server Agetn icon is displayed on your taskbar To manage the Magaya Communication Server Agent right click on the icon ri Oe Magaya Database Server Agent The Magaya Database Server agent should always be running to allow you access to the data across the network and or locally This runs as a service It is called MagayaDb exe for 32 bit operating systems Also installed is MagayaDb64 exe for 64 bit systems For information on managing the performance of the database see Chapter 8 in the Magaya Software Customization Manual Access the administration dialog box of the Magaya Database Agent by right clicking the icon on the task bar Magaya Document Designer The Magaya Document Designer enables you to customize many documents in Magaya Explorer It gives you tools to create custom fields insert images code JavaScript and more These software components are on your computer under All Programs gt Magaya Software Update Magaya Software To update your Magaya softwar
123. to select It is recommended that zones be added before locations into Magaya Explorer See the section on Warehouse Zones for information on adding zones into Magaya Explorer e Select a customer from the dropdown if you want to assign a specific location in the warehouse to a customer That means only the inven tory for that customer will be stored in that location This field is optional e The length width and height are optional Click the OK button to save the information you entered The warehouse location will appear in the list After Completing this task You can sort through the list of locations by using the Filter button The Filter button has two options Standard and Advanced Option Set a Receiving Location as the default by right clicking on the Location from the Location List If you receive cargo in the same area set that as the default receiving location to make Warehouse Receipts faster to process The default location will be the location assigned to all cargo automatically Locations Right click to set a Locations Default Receiving Location Statys Code Description E mpty Type fal Used REL Yard Receiving Area Miami No Recewng O Empty T High Cube Truck 1 Tes Mobile fal Used STAGE Staging 4rea No Quality Control ml Used sSHIF Shipping Area Ho Shipping O Empty RFT Refrigerated Truck Yez Mobile jal Used RECE Recenving Area B Ho Recenving Recenving Area 4 a f fal Used FEC Fecenving
124. use mobile equipment they can select None from the menu To release a piece of mobile equipment the user selects None from this screen Note The user can be cleared in the Configuration menu option Ware house Equipment For details on using mobile equipment for Tasks see Chapter 13 in the Magaya WMS User Manual LOCATION DEFINITIONS INTRODUCTION TO LOCATION DEFINITIONS Location Definitions This topic explains what a Location Definition is and why it is used in a ware house This is part of the Directed Operations procedures To learn more about the other parts of the Directed Operations procedures see the topic Directed Operations Getting Started Introduction to Location Definitions A Location Definition is exactly that a description that defines the characteris tics of a location in the warehouse Why add definitions to your warehouse locations To optimize processes in your warehouse system This will enable the system to find the best locations when putting away items received or picking items to release This is ideal for use with a replenishment operation The definition can tell the system to detect when the location gets low on items so items can be refilled in the location One of the results of improving the warehouse workflow will be reducing the high cost of picking tasks by having the most commonly picked items in the locations that are easiest to access Definitions will help keep thos
125. used to enter the primary contact person for a company or other entity Additional contacts can be added in the Contacts tab or in the Contact subfolder Import Data Data can be imported into the lists such as your existing customer list Click the Actions button and choose Import Then upload a csv or xml file The fields in your uploaded file must match the fields in the Magaya entity 141 MAINTENANCE FOLDER CARRIERS Carriers 142 profile For an example see the topic Import Invoices in the Magaya Knowl edgebase Reports Reporting functions are available for all the entities in the Mainte nance folder Click the Actions button in the list or select the report from the main Reports menu at the top of your Magaya Explorer In Carriers add land ground carriers ocean and air carriers and their addresses contacts rates customized charges payment terms TSA compliance for known shippers FMC SCAC number and more SCAC Codes SCAC codes are the Standard Carrier Alpha Code SCAC is a unique two to four letter code used to identify transportation companies These codes are used in shipping To find an SCAC code for a land or ocean carrier go to the Land tab for Ground carriers or the Ocean tab for an ocean carrier Click the button with the three dots to look up the code Enter keywords in the Find field click the Find button Select a name from the list and click the Select bu
126. warehouse via a Move Task performed on the handheld devices This Move task can be created when the Warehouse Transfer transaction has a status of In Transit 398 TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES STEPS As explained above in step 1 the Task dialog box opens when you finish the last screen in the Cargo Movement wizard You can assign the Task to a mobile user and fill in other fields as needed Task Task Taek Slats WD Pending Acgned to WwihSUserl Miami Warehouse Crested by SOrmires tae Task ype Mowe wil Subject Warehouse Tramsher Motes Load tems mbo Truck 1 for kanale CaigoMovement MAG ATA TIF B0205 ie 330 00PM J I20I5 300 00PM The system automatically updates the status of the Warehouse Transfer trans action throughout the process The status of the items remains On Hand and the items are available to be used in Cargo Releases or shipments The following defines each status of the Warehouse Transfer transaction Pending The task was just created and items have not been loaded in the truck mobile location Loading Some items are loaded in the truck and some items are still in their original location In Transit All the items are loaded in the truck Unloading Some items are in the truck and some items are in the desti nation location e Completed All the items are in the
127. who are interested parties that you will send transactions to or need to notify When you click the Email button the names will be included in To field of the email The names will be saved in the Contacts list of the Maintenance folder Right click a name for options On the Agent tab enter codes such as your IATA FMC SCAC and TSA numbers These codes will be filled into Customs documents and others in the system if they are required To save data click the OK button You can return to the My Company Info dialog box at any time to add or change information as needed Note Your company name and address will also be filled into the Magaya Network Community company profile You can change or add information to publish the profile on the Magaya Network so you can connect with other 3PLs or agents and they can contact you to partner with you for shipping and more For more details see the Magaya Software Communications Manual File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Shipment Magaya Network Acco i i 5 G y Oo 5 T i T et bad Back Ar Ocean Ground Community R is Company Profile Search Invitations ai Messages 4 2 Tasks a Quotations a Jobs Basic Information JE A Company Name HC Cargo Company H E Sales HA Bookings Phone 305 555 7788 3 Warehousing TORN STARTUP WIZARD INTRODUCTION Startup Wizard Introduction The Startup Wizard enables you to enter the inform
128. will be filled into Customs documents and others in the system if they are required To save data click the OK button You can return to the My Company Info dialog box at any time to add or change information as needed Note Your company name and address will also be filled into the Magaya Network Community company profile You can change or add information to publish the profile on the Magaya Network so you can connect with other 3PLs or agents and they can contact you to partner with you for shipping and more For more details see the Magaya Software Communications Manual File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Shipment Magaya Network Acco O e P U Back Ar Ocean Ground Community Magaya Network fe Community or en pa oi Messages Company Profile Search ITrvitations 4 2 Tasks a Quotations f Jobs Basic Information cae Pena ig Company Mame HC Cargo Company Sales Jf Bookings Phone 305 555 7788 3 Warehousing TRR the Accounting Wizard The Accounting Wizard will help you set up your Chart of Accounts also called a general ledger and Items and Services You can also enter the opening How TO USE THE ACCOUNTING WIZARD ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS balances of your customers and vendors Each screen in the wizard explains the steps as you work through the wizard You can go forward and back in the screens while you are working in the wizard Follow the steps below to
129. 0 ccc ccc eee eens 423 Create a Count Session and Count Tasks 0 0 0 cc cece eee 425 Perform Count on Magaya WMS Mobile Device 0 00000 430 PROCESS COUNTS sesasi beled dem ts Gon i Ea a a wee bom axa him awd g seh dem haxe ds 435 ACCEpDE a Count SCSS1ION 9 34 4 ede eee oe ee hE ee ee hes 437 IRS COWIE Se oe tate 2S gs shat ee Be et hte id Ge ahh Btn ch Deh te ened a thats nt eat ate land a 439 Di scard a Counted emi enrere a Ae Hae Gnd Wa ERS WOR ce Res Sea 440 PUSO OFCON Sf 3 Fa hed gaat ag toto ice 2 62s gs av ala a errata oe tases aie tas ate 44 Other COURS OPTIONS gaceaate ee tea tog cect aie a oad oe ES ES 443 Perform an Inventory Adjustment serri rrr esnan c ccc cece eens 445 Chapter 13 Releasing Caree iis0026 soo wisiesacw senie bdo ewe ene ea ea soo oe 453 TARO WC HOM saaara 5 coats atasy Gera eos Meee E EE EEOAE 453 Release Cargo Create a Cargo Release 1 cee 453 General Moman 24cy een wie se ea uta euaeee ss oseeeu sea eus ees eo 454 Carrier Information 0 0 0 ccc eee teen eens 456 select the Cargo to Release w044i sicsaovs ee ele vee twee ews See Sees 2s 456 TV AE SSS TA ode Bice Da ty ees BD Be eae Ac aan are Re teat Aan ak ar eet AS SRA di 467 BY CMa O sence ach aha banca ke E O whe ahs Gaia My CS whee a mek Ate wheat 470 POD TID oes cx n eis a eee aca en el ad ee S a cen eras 471 Attachments FAD sass Te ce tears p a sed m AE EE SG y PE eR 472 NOn FAD asad pees ee ead a Pe
130. 00x4 DD 25 WH 84 Reebok court shoes womens D 20 WH 86 5 rebar 140 00 48 00 48 00 D 30 WH 87 Bacardi Rum Silver 12 00512 CI RECE i Mobile Locations i Houston Warehouse Transfer Items Between Warehouses Steps Steps to Transfer Cargo 1 2 Go to the Cargo Movement List in the Warehousing folder to create a Move Task A Move can also be created in the Warehouse Inspector by clicking the Move button Click the Add button The Cargo Movement Wizard opens 395 TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES STEPS 3 Follow these steps in the wizard In the first screen of the wizard select the cargo items to transfer to another warehouse You can move individual pieces or multiple items This example shows items selected from the Miami Warehouse Zone A Cargo Movement Wizard Cargo Selection Select the items that wou would like to mowe to a destination location or pallet Location Locations Non empty EE Student 2 Warehouse Find Items H E Student 1 Warehouse B E Miami Warehouse Mark group Unmark group Filter Unfilter PIECES Totals Pieces T i AzLE weight H mf azc 0 00 Ib E E ARA ca fal APRE volume fai ALA 0 00 ft MAGAYA TIP In the next screen select the destination location This example shows the 396 TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES STEPS de
131. 1L Save e Mail Print View Document Delete 174 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA UPGRADING FROM THE MAGAYA CARGO SYSTEM 3 Inthe dialog box that opens select the columns to import select columns to Import bs File name C Program Files Magava Cor tMagaya Cargo System Name Type 2 Part Number Text 3 Location Code Text E Pieces Integer l O Defaut C Status Text LI Package Text Include Header F Description Text Length fin Decimal en a Group By Location Cod wt Width lin poy ocation Lode Decimal L weight lb Decimal Delimiter Double Quotes L Volume fE Decimal Text Separator Comma Location Description Piece Weight lb Decimal Piece Volume f Decimal Field Type Text Warehouse Provider Text A Faces Vite aly Model Text k 4 Click Browse to open the file on your computer or network that contains the data you want to import Verify all data before importing it d O 0 O 0 Efe O 0O Efe Eke lt 5 Select the columns to match your data 6 Group the WRs by Part Number or Location so the system does not generate just one WR If you import a long list of thousands of items the system will create one WR that will be difficult to modify because of the large data size Upgrading from the Magaya Cargo System If you are upgrading from the Magaya Cargo System and need to migrate data fro
132. 6 H select Template History Buttons Let s look at some buttons on the top toolbar Find This gives you the option to search by transaction number with the Quick Find feature or to search by any text in a document See the section Find Button for more Send To send messages within the Magaya Network Email For sending documents or tracking link via email For steps to create a Pickup Order see the Magaya Knowledgebase which is available from Page One the welcome screen inside your software Let s look at printing labels next 268 Print Labels WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER PRINT LABELS By printingreceiving labels from the Pickup Order you will not need to print them when a Pickup Order is converted into a Warehouse Receipt and the cargo arrives This can save time when receiving cargo but make sure to keep the labels in a safe place until they re needed Another label printing option available is for online pickup orders If a Pickup Order is placed online by your customer they can print the labels for their items and place the labels on their boxes You will need to configure your Magaya system to allow end users to print labels The label they will print is called a Tracking Pickup Label 4x6 Click the arrow on the Print button and select Print Labels Accounting Reports Options Help Print Network Send Print Ctrl P Actions Frint Batch Save to POF
133. 77 MUOU ON 4 45 0 2 Gara aa a ad Bae a aa ees a a ee 277 Receive Cargo Create a Warehouse Receipt 0 0 cee 278 DIEP DY DLC ProCA E ic x oa cities ll baa ee Giese a ce eas EE sae a 279 CMC Fa AD cas occ E E ome Onde G8 paw awed Sot ate eae 280 Shipper C OnStOnCe TaD gi ncn die eee OG HA EAE ERE R EES CERES CORRS RS 282 DUDDMCE ab 65 chu Saves adeauas a a a a shee aoe weet E T 285 C E act ose aha a ei es AN So os ee Ae ee A ey oe a 286 Commodities 45 3 4 oo kes nee oe atch ase eee otha eee ee Ree rene 286 Introduction to Commodities 0 0 0 0 ee ee ee ee ee eee 286 Add OMIMOGINGS os 3 erates aeaea ea en REM aa bee ee eee ua eee ye ned 288 Identification Tab 2 ec ec ee eee eee e eee 292 PELE AS ota eo an esas 2h enlace ei a Sen deals Bee ile REE oe BE eS 296 Hazardous Matrak Lab 26ii 01 to attorneys eth hohner pe te A eee 300 AM e Danaa eaa y E E NEE E A D E E ENA 301 AttachinentS ab arane amp a E A E E E A A ae T oe 303 Add COMAE serami riaa e a e E eee ae A OR E BRS ws eo 304 Scan Bar Codes to Enter Commodities annann anae 306 Repack Capo heo 3d eel cae 4k eele Aerer EER ERTA EER EE RER A 308 C Maroen seee EE Die OA EE E wn en ee 310 Working with the Charges Tab 0 0 0 tenes 312 PECs ae oh ens teas setae 2 aan aes Ge aaa BO ee bh ew bs Ae Oe eee 319 Infroduction to Events bab 3 1 24 5 ths 55 665 bees VASE 5 eR 319 POG ae Vente 42420 eNie sa E as Geet E E E E Lae ek E A 320 Delme N
134. 84 Piececs no notes Note Pick tasks must have a destination location assigned to them when 486 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM A SINGLE PICK TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE created If not the task must be corrected on the PC This screen shows the Pick task details All these details are gathered from the Cargo Release automatically and displayed on the handheld screen 3 Scan the location to begin picking the items This Pick task contains items from different locations Select the first location to begin picking items from it Pick From 3 52 m T C mo Storage No codes BOCA QualityCo B Liners for juice s 487 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM A SINGLE PICK TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE 4 Inthe next screen the items to pick are listed Scan the items or click on the item on the screen if you cannot scan and manually enter the quan tity Lute final Description Qty Pek Code Bla iLA Storage Next location Cancel 488 5 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM A SINGLE PICK TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE To move the items you scanned to the destination click the Move button In the next screen you have the option to move the items to a pallet If you want to do this scan the pallet If not leave the field blank and click the OK button Select pallet Scan or
135. 9 11 40 AM ee Set Status When cargo departs from your warehouse set the CR as In Transit by selecting the option Set Reset In Transit When cargo arrives at its final consignee set the CR as Delivered by selecting the option Set Reset Delivered e Note When you set cargo in transit a checkmark appears next to the option in the menu If you uncheck it the status of the cargo will return to its previous status Refresh the CR List to see the current status The status of the cargo is also updated in the Commodities List 477 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE OTHER ACTIONS g To automate an Event so it appears in the Events tab and online for your customers to see create an Event Definition in Maintenance gt configura tion gt Event Definitions Event Definition Hame Cargo Release set at Delivered Details This Cargo Relase has been set as Deliwered Location Automatic Creation Cargo Release has been set as delivered we Include in Tracking Cancel To exclude the transaction from tracking if the transaction is not complete and you do not want it viewed via Magaya LiveTrack select the option Exclude from Tracking 478 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE OTHER ACTIONS To choose a different template for the document select the option Select Template Some of the different templates include Select Template Templates Template Preview
136. ATLA Jay AILB fay AILC Jay AIRA a AIRE CT AIRC O sala ay AZLB I 2LC OI 22RA CI AzRB CI 2AC OI ASLA EI A318 Y xf Filter Configure Create Count Task Locations Al h Process Counts Counts per Location History Adjustments History Count Tasks History Count Sessions Count Reasons View Found Items View Lost Items T On Hand Liners for If an active Count Session exists the Count Task you create will be assigned to that session Only one session can be open at a time To create a Count Task go to Step 7 below If an active Count Session does not exist a dialog box opens for you to create one 425 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY CREATE A COUNT SESSION AND COUNT TASKS 3 Inthe Count Session dialog box enter the following information Count Session Eoo General Number 0001 Type Cycle Count w 4 Enter a session number or use the default Count session numbering is set up in Maintenance gt Configuration gt WMS The date is set to the current date The owner is the employee who is creating the session 5 Enter a description of the session optional 6 Select the count type Cycle Count or Physical Count e Cycle counting is the process of verifying inventory accuracy by counting a few items every day and comparing the count to computer inventory records to reconcile differences The cause of discrepancies is found and resolved A cycle count normally i
137. Area en a mi Used REC B Recenving Area B view Items 3 Ef Used REC A Recenving Area 4 Warehouse Zones i l Teen R3 Side Add to Warehouse Zone E Used Re Rack 2 w Default Receiving Location al Used Al Rack 1 R al Used OCE Quality Control Zon TMPOrt onitral al Used OCA Quality Control Zong Export to fal Used CT Quality Control Ehrase Colinin ntrol al Used g4 Quadrant 4 all ae ml Used Qa Quadrant 3 all MHo Storage 195 COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS WHAT ARE COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS If you set a Default Receiving Location it will speed up the process of receiving and putting away items when using the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld scan ners If you are logged into the handheld unit log out to activate the setting Commodity Classifications What are Commodity Classifications Commodity Classifications are codes used to categorize commodities These classifications are also called Schedule B codes or export codes They are 10 digit numbers based on the 6 digit international Harmonized Tariff System HTS and defined by US Customs The codes help you determine a country s applicable tariff and tax rates for a commodity There are approximately 9 000 codes The codes are grouped together into chapters 196 COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS WHAT ARE COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS Customs codes are updated via a Web service so your Magaya system always has the latest codes To manually check for updates and load them into your sys
138. Arriving Bow Dell Computer 330 Select Partial Pieces Pallet Palm Trees Pieces of 30 Pieces ak cares In the dialog box you can choose the columns by right clicking on a commodity For more information on creating WRs see the topic Create a Warehouse Receipt To set a cargo as In Transit select the option Set Reset In Transit To set a cargo as Delivered select the option Set Reset Delivered e Note When you set cargo in transit a checkmark appears next to the option in the list If you uncheck it the status of the cargo will return to its previous status Loaded In Transit or Delivered Refresh the cargo list to see the current status The status of the cargo is also updated in the Commodities List To Exclude from Tracking To exclude the transaction from tracking if the transaction is not complete and you do not want it viewed via LiveTrack select the option Exclude from Tracking Select Template To choose a different template for the document select the option Select Template For example there is a template designed for NVOCC operations a summarized template and more The NVOCC template includes WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM PICKUP ORDERS space for the return of a container This is filled in from the Carriers tab the Main Carrier fields select Template Templates Template Preview Hame Filename Pickup O
139. CTOR Warehouse Inspector This topic covers the Warehouse Inspector function available in the Ware housing folder in Magaya WMS and Magaya Supply Chain Solution software y Warehousing p Pickup Orders P Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts i Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List A Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List Cargo Movements s Cargo Movement List P7 Package Types Locations warehouse Inspector nag Inventory Organizer ven WD Inventory tern Definitions ve E Commodity Classifications B Shipment List a Work Load ee In Transit Introduction to the Warehouse Inspector This topic discusses managing and moving items in the warehouse using the Warehouse Inspector in Magaya software What is the Warehouse Inspector The Warehouse Inspector enables you to create tasks to move cargo and send the tasks to an employee who is using the Magaya WMS Mobile application running on wireless handheld devices The mobile users move the items and the system keeps track of the location of every item updating it in real time In addition to controlling the movement and storage of items in your system the Warehouse Inspector enables you to search for items to perform inventory counts and more Use the Warehouse Inpsector to efficiently manage storage capacity to reduce empty space and implement a Just In Time inventory management The information about the inventory items can also be viewed online in Ma
140. Cargo item find 404 Cargo movement wizard 395 Cargo Release create a bill from 476 create an invoice from 476 set cargo as Delivered 477 set cargo In Transit 477 Carriers add 142 Carriers enter in Startup Wizard 60 Charges add freight charges 317 add to a transaction 312 Charges tab 310 Charges automate 310 Chart of Accounts 101 Clause add to Notes tab 331 Client statements 147 Columns adjust 107 customize 109 JavaScript 111 Columns configure in Warehouse Inspector 379 Commercial invoice value of commodities 291 Commissions salesperson 149 Commodities 286 status icon 109 Commodity classifications 196 Commodity dimensions field 291 Communication Center 95 Communication Server 26 Community 94 Company profile 95 Configuration menu 154 Contact Magaya 31 Contacts add 150 online access 150 primary 141 Container add 304 Container return 273 Count reasons for count differences 434 remove pending locations 443 reset 434 Count inventory 423 Count Task create 425 Perform on Magaya WMS Mobile handheld device 430 Country codes and names 154 Counts accept count 437 adjustments 442 by Part Number 428 by Serial Numbers 432 cargo count list 441 close a session 439 discard 440 history 441 lost and found 437 process counts 435 reasons for count differences 445 recounts 439 results by location 437 session list 443 temporary warehouse receipt 438 Courier waybill 339 Create Cargo Release 453 Credit card
141. Changes You can create 4 tack and assign it to a handheld user that will execute E or you can commi the changes immediately Movement Number oy Commit Chis movement in the Following way Create a task for a handheld user Handheld user ywrsucer The user could be empty Commit changes right away Transfer via a Let this movement as pending It willbe commktedi Mobile Location Tranche information Movement Type Transfer Mobile Location Ty D Code Empty Dore cl Wes Mobile Locations C2 Yes Mobile Locations FLi Yes Mobile Locations RFT Yes Plobile Locations Wes Mobile Locations 7 K B Click Finish Next a Task will be created Before we discuss the task let s look at the whole transfer process The Warehouse Transfer is executed in three steps 1 Move the cargo from the location in the warehouse to be loaded to the truck via the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld devices This is a Move Task The system automatically opens the Task dialog box when you click the Finish button in the Cargo Movement wizard on the PC 2 Transport the items in the truck to the other facility the destination ware house The Warehouse Transfer document can be printed and used as a Straight Bill of Lading The document is in the Warehousing folder gt Cargo Movements It can be customized as needed 3 The cargo is unloaded from the truck at the receiving location in the desti nation
142. Columns Items that are not in a sequence are ones that you don t want the system to consider when performing a guided put away replenishment or picking task If you add a new location to your system it will be in the bottom half of the Sequence tab because it is not part of a sequence yet You must add it to one if you want it in one Import a Sequence If you have many locations it can be time consuming to set a sequence in the Warehouse Inspector screen by moving each location one by one You can import a list of locations that are in the desired order Use a text file Create the text file with one location code per line List them in the order you want in the sequence For example if you want the system to give preference to a location make it the first in the list 219 REPLENISHMENT RECOMMENDED NEXT STEPS Click the Import button in the Sequence tab or right click the warehouse icon Browse File Please select the File you wish to import The File must contain a list of location codes in the order of the sequence each code in a new line Browse Cancel Save Browse to the file Import it The system validates the file to ensure the location information matches the Magaya system Recommended Next Steps If you have not added definitions to locations do that next Also ensure the handhelds users have the correct permissions and are assigned to the correct
143. Configuration gt WMS screen and uncheck this option Enable Initial Inventory for WMS Mobile Users The icon will no longer display on the Magaya WMS Mobile main menu For information on assigning locations to items see Chapter 4 WMS Mobile Setup in the Magaya WMS Operations Manual 177 CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE Create an Inventory Item Definition This topic explains how to create an Inventory Item Definition for a regular inventory item in Magaya Explorer Note Your dialog box may vary slightly depending on which Magaya software you re using but the majority of the functions are the same The Magaya Supply Chain Solution is shown and explained here An Inventory Item Definition is just what it sounds like the definition of an item in inventory such as those items that wholesalers stock for resale or items that you receive regularly for a customer Also see the topic Add a Resale Item to learn about resale items When an Inventory Item Definition is created in Magaya Explorer the defini tion of that item will be available in the Magaya system to be used for transac tions such as Warehouse Receipts and Pickup Orders The advantage of creating an inventory item definition is to simplify receipt of items that are sent to your warehouse regularly When the items are received and you create a Warehouse Receipt WR in Magaya Explorer you can select the Part Number inside the
144. Corporation for training to ensure all your employees know how to perform the tasks for their roles Steps for Client Server Installation on a Network Network installation means to connect other computers or clients to the main computer server where you run the Magaya software If you have not installed the Magaya software on a main computer a PC server etc then install it first See the steps in the section Steps to Install on a Single Computer or Server For better performance it is recommended that the IP address of the server computer is set as static The network can be a local network or a corporate network via VPN These steps are for the client side of the client server installation Follow these steps for each computer or workstation that will run the Magaya software 1 Install the software See the steps in the section Steps to Install on a Single Computer or Server 2 Open Windows Explorer on the workstation 3 Locate the server computer The workstation must have access to the server computer over the network If not you must share the Magaya installation folder at the server computer in Read Only mode 4 Access the shared directory where the Magaya software is installed 5 Locate the SetupClient exe file under the Magaya software directory on the server computer 6 Double click on the SetupClient exe file A dialog box appears showing the steps for the workstation installation
145. DUCTION Chapter 1 How to Use This Manual Introduction Welcome to the Magaya WMS Operations Manual This manual is designed to explain all the warehousing processes including how to receive cargo in the warehouse using Magaya WMS software on the PC and the Magaya WMS Mobile application on handheld devices create Warehouse Receipts and Cargo Releases how to perform inventory counts and how to identify items in the warehouse and manage their movement Magaya software is designed for logistics providers freight forwarders N V O C C s warehouse providers consolidators forwarding agents couriers and others in the logistics industry Magaya software contains a complete accounting system that integrates the accounting features with the operations features in the software How This Manual is Organized This manual is designed to be task oriented You can skip to any topic you need and get step by step procedures for all the tasks performed in Magaya software You can also click on any word in the Index to go to that topic This topics in this manual are organized in order from setup to operations Introduction to Logistics and Warehousing Installation of the software e Initial Software Configuration WMS Mobile Set Up including hardware requirements how to set up the wireless infrastructure how to configure the handheld devices perform initial inventory set up and more e Anoverview of the Magaya Explorer interface
146. EATE A SINGLE PICK TASK Release Cargo with WMS Mobile Devices Introduction This section will explain how to use the WMS Mobile handheld devices to release cargo from the warehouse When you use the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld devices to release cargo you create Pick tasks and Load tasks e A Pick task is used to move items from their current locations to a Quality Control area QC or to an outgoing shipping staging area With the Pick task cargo can be palletized before it is released Types of Pick Tasks include Single Multiple and Partial e A Load task is used to move items from QC to the shipping door You can also use a Load task to send items out of the warehouse without stop ping at QC This task is useful when cargo does not need to be repacked or palletized but is going out of the warehouse as is This task does not have the option to palletize cargo Create a Single Pick Task To pick the cargo items that you want to release follow these steps 1 Starton the PC by creating a Cargo Release CR Ifyou need help creating a CR see the section Create a Cargo Release in this chapter for details Note Cargo can also be released from a shipment This example shows releasing cargo items using a Cargo Release transaction 482 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE A SINGLE PICK TASK Create a Pick task from the Cargo Release document by clicking on the arrow on the side of the Task button and se
147. EP PROCEDURE e Commodity Type The system has Freight All Kinds as a default commodity type You can add others and then use them in Rates and other places such as reports Unit Dozen Description Electronics 710730 Freight All Kinds FAK Hazardous Materials HAZMAT soccer shoes h Perishable FERISHABLE J26 C Sporting Goods SPORTS itl cla 2 o Inactive If this is checked the system asks you to confirm that you want to deactivate that item If items are on hand or arriving they can still be loaded If you deactivate an item when you still have inventory the system will notify you On the Accounting tab you can add the value set cost and income accounts for inventory items and minimum stock information This is useful for companies that sell inventory e Use the Purchase Item and Sale Item dropdowns to assign cost and income accounts to the item This field uses the Items amp Services The Unitary Value will be displayed in a Commercial Invoice docu ment often used by freight forwarders It is the selling price of an item and it also appears in the Sales Order Optional field Select how inventory is released such as First In First Out e Select the Costing Method either by specific price for the item or by average cost See the Magaya Accounting manual or search in the Knowledegebase for keywords Average Cost The minimum stock information can be set so that your
148. Family Twain Data Source On WIA Version 0 Protocol 1 9 Other Info 6 June 2000 Interface WIA Interface by Windows w Picture Source v Document Source _ If you have multiple scanners set one scanner as the Picture Source and the other as the Document Source These settings can be changed at any time Click the OK button You will be returned to the Attachment tab Click on the Acquire button on the Attachment tab A dialog box opens The Acquire button is used to scan an image It will open a dialog box with instructions to scan a document The Select Device button is here if you want to change scanners The Acquire Doc button is used to scan a document It will be saved as a PDF A preview of the document will appear in the panes after scanning To scan more than one page click the Acquire button for each page All the ATTACHMENTS ADD ATTACHMENT FROM SCANNER pages will appear on the left one after another and a preview of the selected page will appear on the right Acquire document 329 ATTACHMENTS ADD ATTACHMENT FROM SCANNER 6 Click the OK button when you are done scanning The scanned image or document will appear in the Attachments tab Pickup Order General Shipper Consignee Commodities Charges Events Attachments pei Add Select Device Acquire Seanned_ 2009_1 Scanned
149. Frets Humber S Ruffin Operations Settings These settings apply to the WMS Mobile handheld devices First ensure users are not logged into the handhelds Click the button to open the dialog box On the General tab check the operations that you want to allow repacking For Receiving Moves and Picking tasks 45 CONFIGURE WMS WMS MOBILE CONFIGURATION 46 On the Receiving tab checkmark the operations preferences Operations Settings General Receiving Receiving operation settings Enforce default receiving location Skip entities Confirm item creation Prompt properties when new item is created Allow empty pallets If you have a default receiving location defined in the Locations list you can set it as the default receiving location for all cargo received Then the user will not see the screen on the handheld that they would normally see to enter a receiving location To have WMS Mobile users skip entering the entities on an uniformed receiving task check this box Then the user will not see that screen on the handheld and can go straight to scanning items If a new item is created on the handheld this checkbox will make the system as the WMS Mobile user if a new tracking number should be created for the new item If this box is unchecked the system will not display that dialog box Check the box Prompt properties when new item is created if you want the handheld user to see the scre
150. H 91 wH 30 wH 89 wH 88 wWwH 8 Z amp Edit Delete WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT Date 06708 2012 12 13 2011 12713 2011 11717 2011 11714 2011 03716 2011 05716 2011 05716 2011 03 16 2011 08 15 2071 Oe O4 2071 Oe 042071 07042011 070220 1 OF f28 e0 LL a Filter Shipper Atlantic Surplus HW Cargo Company HW Cargo Company Atlantic Surplus Art Supplies Chevron Refinery HW Cargo Company HE Forter Barcelo Capella Resort Atlantic Surplus HW Cargo Company Ackions DETAILS PANEL Consignee Cartagena Const Art Basel Gallery Chevron Retiner Barcelo Capella F Barcelo Capella F x 1A Detail 343 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DETAILS PANEL In this panel select items from the dropdown list to view Panels 6 WH EEL Detailed Inventory SEES Erants Select the panel of details Paid HTML to display BS Posted Internal Notes Summarized Inventory Transaction Listing w Actions The Detail button is available in all lists Options in the menu include e Events View Events added e HTML Displays the WR the same as in LiveTrack Charges Right click on a charge to view it Transaction Listing Shows generated charges such as invoices and bills Receive Cargo with Magaya WMS Mobile 344 Introduction This section explains how to receive cargo using the Magaya WMS Mobile appli
151. HMENT http knowledge magaya com search multiple_warehouses Replenishment Introduction to Inventory Replenishment To maintain inventory levels it s important to keep inventory picking locations full of items so they are available to fulfill orders without delays The Magaya system enables you to set up a schedule to replenish locations based on criteria you define The scheduling will create Move Tasks for the WMS Mobile users in the warehouse The replenishment schedule uses information set up in the Inventory Item Definitons such as any LIFO FIFO criteria for an item and the system also uses Location Definitions If you do not have definitions added to your locations do that first See the topic Location Definitions for steps Configure Replenishment Schedule 416 1 To configure the schedule for replenishment go to Maintenance gt Configu ration gt WMS 2 Click the tab Directed Operations REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE 3 Check the box to enable replenishment Configuration Magaya Espress Link FOL Mabile ta Scales WMS a General Inventory Adjustment WHS Mobile Directed Operations Replenishment Enable inventory replenishment 4 Replenishment schedule aco Puk Oia Define the default maximum capacity of a single put away task Specify maximum weight 0 00 ilogram kg Specify maximum volume 0 00 Cubic metertm Specify maximum
152. I G35 E Hga Houston warehouse B OnHand Vehicles 2006 INFINITI G35 E Sig Yard Miami W OnHand Vehicles 2006 INFINITI G35 E E MAY Ja O14 CI Gis fa G24 Details of items inside a location Ja 2b Ja O32 a G4 a REC E Default one Locations Detail Summary Click on the Detail tab on the bottom of the screen to see what s inside a loca tion side by side with the locations list in your Magaya Explorer Click the Summary tab to see part numbers tracking numbers and quantities The Warehouse Inspector toolbar contains buttons for functions to move items find filter set columns Configure delete pallets and perform counts The dropdown menu Locations enables views of all locations empty loca tions non empty and non counted locations Check the box to show empty zones WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR ADDITIONAL WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR FUNCTIONS The following sections explain the functions available from the buttons on the Warehouse Inspector toolbar Additional Warehouse Inspector Functions The following explains the additional buttons on the Warehouse Inspector toolbar to help manage items in the warehouse The functions on the buttons include finding items or locations filtering configuring column settings and performing inventory counts Find Locations To find locations in your database click the Find Location button g laj VY x lt p ki Mowe Find Location
153. IR LINES INC Carriers aE Sugarland Trucking Co Lamers E Delvery Masters Carers If your company is an air carrier verify that the Configuration gt Company Type is selected as Air Carrier This will enable to Air Waybill field to appear on the Warehouse Receipt dialog box 143 MAINTENANCE FOLDER CARRIERS Air Waybill Numbers In the Carrier profile Enter the Air Waybill numbers that your carrier gave you by clicking the Add button Enter the information in the dialog box as needed For details on using this dialog box please see the Configuration chapter in the Magaya Software Customization Manual Mew Air Waybill Numbers Generate a Range of Air Waybill Numbers Stata O ot OO Help Generate an amount of Air Waybill Numbers Amount of numbers to add If you need to ensure AWB numbers are used sequentially to comply with IATA requirements see the Configuration chapter in the Magaya Software Custom ization Manual 144 MAINTENANCE FOLDER FORWARDING AGENTS For additional options right click a carrier name in the list Carriers Hame Phone Email t4 SOUTHWEST AIRLINE Me Auto Transport Specials Other Reports Lufthansa Airlines Reports ae FedE Ground a UPS Ground Transactions Listing ELUNE Molalla Open Transactions 2 Evergreen Shipping a DHL Rates i kj Contracts arj j Query Rates Right click to open Configure Tracking by Transaction Den
154. LABELS 356 You can print all the labels for all the items or select a range of labels Print Labels Warehouse Receipt WH 60 4 All the items in this transaction have part numbers In this example all the items have part numbers The part numbers will appear on the labels so you may not need to print labels here Affix the labels to the boxes or items Note You can print labels for any individual item during the receiving process When all the pending Receive tasks are completed or if you end a task tempo rarily the handheld will display the main menu again The status of the received items will be On Hand after scanning them Ifa Receive task is incomplete it will remain on the main menu so you can return to it at a later time and complete it Printing Over a Network Printer The WMS user s printer settings must be configured on the machine running the Magaya Communication Server Setting up the user s printer settings in any other machine will not work This applies not only when setting them up initially but also when modifying any user s printer settings make sure that it is done in the machine running the Communication Server The windows user under which the Communication Server runs is very impor tant By default the Communication Server will run under a local windows user and when printing over a network printer this is incorrect because the printer will not recognize the user from which the
155. MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM THE LOAD TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE 502 CHAPTER 14 QUOTATIONS INTRODUCTION Chapter 14 Quotations Introduction A Quotation is the price of freight given to a customer who wants to ship goods The freight charges are based on the quantity to be shipped the distance weight volume and mode of transport The Quotations list and documents can be found in the Quotations folder in Magaya Explorer ra Magaya Network fl Tasks fe Quokatians a Quotations Create a Cargo Quotation The Cargo Quote transaction includes the commodities the routing details and the freight charges 503 CREATE A CARGO QUOTATION STEPS Steps 1 Click the Add button A dialog box opens where you can enter details of this cargo quote Begin on the General tab and click on the other tabs 2 General Tab Quotation Cargo General Routing Commodities Charges Events Attachments Notes Internal Notes U Empty Quote Number Created Ur 1172072013 Expres On 12720772013 Employee Administrator se Dizon Fapment Issued Ep H w C Cargo Company Btls Contact Hame Art Supplies se Incoterms CFR Contact Address Description of Plumbing equipment Goods Note The status of the quotation will remain Empty until after adding cargo and clicking the OK button Fill in as many tabs as you need e The Quote Number is filled in automatically
156. Magaya Explorer and ease the creation of Warehouse Receipts Before entering zone and location information in Magaya Explorer sketch out your warehouse on paper Draw the loading area receiving area doors walk ways and areas for a forklift to drive around racks and rows and other details Label each part of the warehouse See an example of a floorplan in Chapter 2 of the Magaya WMS Operations Manual Every warehouse is different and each is suited to the type of business done A warehouse that needs more storage space and that conducts infrequent pick and load orders may use higher racks A warehouse that handles many pick and load orders will need those inventory items in an easy access location to make the pick and loads faster Your locations may be named according to the products you sell the customers you Sell to or the area in a warehouse such as a separate fenced off area that is locked or an outdoor yard Many use names such as Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 etc Enter the information into the Magaya Explorer according to your needs After creating the locations and zones use the Warehouse Inspector in Magaya Explorer to move items in the warehouse See the chapter Manage and Move Warehouse Items in the Magaya WMS Operation Manual or the Magaya Supply Chain Operations Manual for details To import locations from another software system see the topic Import Loca tions for steps in the Knowledgebase which is available from P
157. Move top Moye up Gutpuk Charges as Displayed History The pop up menu has many options such as moving a charge up or down in the list This will affect how the charges display in documents and in LiveTrack Priority of some charges can be set in the Items amp Services list see the Magaya Software Accounting Manual EVENTS INTRODUCTION TO EVENTS TAB If you make changes to one or more charges select Regenerate charges to recalculate Other functions on the Charges tab Units If you want to change the measurement units for this transaction click on the Units button This will only change the units for the transaction you are working on such as a WR The total expense income and profit display on the bottom of the screen The Generate button is for generating any bills or invoices associated with the charges entered You can adjust the columns as needed by clicking and dragging the column to widen it or narrow it Events Introduction to Events Tab The Events tab is used to list any events related to the transaction such as a Warehouse Receipt or Pickup Order Magaya software comes with a default list of event definitions you can choose from You can also create your own event definitions Events entered in the dialog box will appear in the email message sent with Magaya Transaction Tracking and Magaya LiveTrack communications visible to the customer based on the configuration setup You can also view
158. POD tab This tab is optional Cargo Release Inland Carrier POD Attachments POD Information Delivery Date 3 2 2015 E Deliver Time 11 35 15 46 Recevedby JB Wire Co Comments packages delivered to receptionist Internal Comments Signature MAGAYA TIP Cancel Click on the checkbox to enable the fields if you want to require a POD Set the delivery date and time select the name of the recipient final consignee and add any comments as needed The Signature button is activated if you have Magaya POD Mobile active for your Magaya account If so the electronic signa ture of the final consignee will be saved here 471 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE ATTACHMENTS TAB Attachments Tab To attach a photograph of the cargo or attach a copy of a document use the Attachments tab Add photos or documents Adidas soccer shames 6 20 KB or connect to a scanner MAGAYA TIP Full details are covered in the topic Attachments 472 Cancel Acgur e Acquire Doeg View Delete Expowl intemal RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE NOTES TAB Notes Tab Click the button with the three dots to open the Clauses list Name Category Damaged tema Froot of Debrer Missing items Proot of Delvery Select the clause needed These notes are included on documents and can be viewed by customers or other entity Full details are covered in the topic Notes and I
159. RELEASE 476 Option If you need to change the currency to one from a previous date change the transaction date permission and role is needed for user 1 Click the Actions button and select Transaction List The Transaction List opens 2 Click the Actions button in that list and select an option Link Bill Link Invoice Receive Payment or Pay Bill These transactions will be Posted immediately unlike the charges entered in the Charges tab When you are in the Transaction Listing you can create the following accounting transactions directly from a Cargo Release by using the Add button at the bottom of the list Invoice You can create an invoice for the Cargo Release You can also create accounting transactions when you are in the Cargo Release dialog box by using the Generate button on the Charges tab An example of the options for creating accounting transactions is the ability to add inland freight charges to a Cargo Release by using the Trans action Listing Add button instead of the Charges tab in the Cargo Release This is the invoice screen Accounting Transaction Invoice Noss Inema Noha Humber EH Account Accounts Recetable Trancechon Daa Besa vw Due Date 6 25 2010 aa Apply ta Biecapne Bike Shop Bilrg hahere Chenge 100 Harbor Dares Key Biscaya FL UNITED STATES Changes Tias Descnipton Prepaid Quantity Price Amourt Tak aS Posted Documentation Ves 1 00 25 00 35 00 4 Pada
160. Receipt WR by using the Actions button or by right clicking ona WR in the WR List w we N gt ley o Actions oom Options Transaction Listing Attachments farehouse Recel pt Create a Copy sl hon Tesi AA Send To l WH 71 Select Template ukOIi0la 04S PAI History lene Taylor Consignee Information Construction Co To see a list of all the transactions related to the WR select the option Transac tion Listing See the section on linking transactions for more To view or add attachments you can use the Actions menu or the Attachments screen in the dialog box To create a copy of the WR select the Create a Copy option WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT OTHER ACTIONS To exclude the transaction from tracking if the transaction is not complete and you do not want it viewed via LiveTrack select the option Exclude from Tracking Place items or WR on hold if a customer requests it or if the customer owes money To send the WR to another Magaya user in the Magaya Network click the Send To option This opens the same dialog box as clicking the Send button To choose a different template for the document select the option Select Template The template Warehouse Receipt Detailed shows more informa tion about each commodity The template Courier Waybill is for couriers who use the WR as a courier waybill Be sure to link the template to the current trans ac
161. Receiwwe Release Docum Frint Fi fone Definition m l Tasks a Quotations la Warehousing e Maintenance eke gt Carriers feen Forwarding Agents ip Code a Warehouse Providers Si a Customers vendors PotPlace Das a salespersons S Contact amp Employees g Countries eF Configuration ae Rates H Accounting HA Miscellaneous State Region we 2 Add Edit Delete w7 Actions x Filter Urnfilter 249 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER CONSIGNEE TAB Here are some examples zones defined Ports fone Definition ip code Hame State Place Name 40H00 Orlando FL Orlando 3al r2 Local one 1 Florida Miami 33010 Marni FL Maral age Definition Name Orlando ip Code 40410 State Region FL Port Place Cancel Help Consignee Tab The Consignee is the person or company who is receiving the goods ultimately When you are creating the Pickup Order you may not have this information If 250 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER CONSIGNEE TAB you have the details add them to this tab by using the dropdown menus as explained earlier a Pickup Order General Shipper Consignes Supplier Consignee Deliver Location Name Name Address Change Copy gt gt Address Change Client to Bill Ultimate Consignee For the Delivery Location field select the entity of the place where the
162. S Mobile users in the Configuration menu and on the Employee profile s User tab The process for replenishment begins after items are received and put away See the topic on Receiving Cargo Put Away and Move Tasks Multiple Warehouses This topic explains how to define more than one warehouse in your Magaya system If you have two or more warehouses in different locations perhaps different cities or countries follow the steps in this section to define each ware house If you have one warehouse see the topic Sequencing in the Warehouse What is sequencing Sequencing is the order that you define in your Magaya system that tells the warehouse employees which locations to place items in when putting items away and which locations to pick from The system creates tasks for the WMS Mobile handhelds that use the information from the sequence to recommend locations for the user This is especially useful for batch picking because it defines an efficient path through the warehouse saving time 225 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES USING THE WAREHOUSE PROMOTION WIZARD Multiple Warehouses Using the Warehouse Promotion Wizard To define more than one warehouse in your Magaya system use the Ware house Promotion Wizard This wizard guides you through organizing your locations for putting away items and for picking them You can use this wizard even if you don t need to define sequencing now but you only want to separate
163. T Loaded T Loaded T In Transit T In Transit T Un Hand T Delivered D dates Package Bundle Box Bos Box Box Box Box Box Box Box Bos Box Rall Bag Bag Bag D2 Print Find From L Descripti Bamboo Teva Bee Teva Be paint brushes Watercolor painting sets canvas pre framed Hew Balance running h Adidas soccer shoes New Balance 200 runnin Baseball Gloves Adidas soccer shoes Hew Balance 200 runnin New Balance running h Baseball Gloves Choose Columns WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS RELATED COLUMNS 2 Inthe dialog box that opens click the Add Columns button Column Settings Ed p Oats Down Package T ext LO Piece Weight Ib Decimal LO Piece Volume fF Decimal Warehouse Provider Test T ext Description Text Default Pieces Integer engin Pena Field Type Text Height in Decimal width in Decimal 7 Visible Weight Ib Decimal Word Wrap Volurne FF Decimal atidthy F Location Code Test Ra Fj Location Description Test Align d d O O F Serial Text F Invoice Number Test F Part Number Test F Purchase Order Number Text Related Columns I Script Columns a Note The option Script Columns is explained in the Magaya Software Customization Manual 111 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS RELATED COLUMNS 112 A new dialog box opens with additional colu
164. T VIEWS PRINT LABELS Print Labels 116 Other Buttons and Their Functions Printing To print a document click on the Print button on the toolbar across the top of the Magaya Explorer You can also use the File menu and select Print To print receiving labels from a Warehouse Receipt go to File or click on the arrow on the side of the Print button and select Print Labels A dialog box opens Select the label size and quantity You can also print a range of labels or all of them Network Accounting Reports Options Help ir 2 Network Send ceil Task Pri rt panels Print Ctrl F ie el Template for Print with Fiscal Printer Warehouse Recep Print Batch Available Labels Print Labels iS Receiving Label 43 alg Recerving Label 445 Sea Nh Recerving Label 4x6 tanith Hat Tracking Pickup Label 46 WMS Label 446 W S Label 486 Shipper Total of Labels Print Setup Name HP Laserjet P2015 Series PCL 6 Fort T5001 UE Cancel Help To change the quantity of labels printed enter a new number in the Start and End fields WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS PRINT LABELS Each label will print with the options checked in the Configuration menu The warehouse item description the company information consignee name and a bar code configuration B Labels Printer Type Labels Windows Standard Printe
165. TH THE CHARGES TAB 318 customer Charges will always appear in accounting transaction docu ments such as invoices and bills Select from the dropdown menu to apply the charge by Pieces Weight Volume or Container The totals for the number of pieces Gross weight Gross Volume Rate Charge and Total Amount are displayed in the fields across the bottom Remember Weights The Chargeable Weight is the larger of these two weights the gross weight and the volumetric weight The gross weight is the weight of the items inside a container plus the weight of the container Items container Gross Weight For more on weights such as dimensional weight see the Knowledgebase topic Air Waybills e Click OK to save the information and close the Expense Freight Charges dialog box This will return you to the Charges tab of the Warehouse Receipt dialog box Tip For every expense you add also add an income Other options on the Charges tab You can edit or delete a charge by selecting it and clicking on the button you need To view options right click on a charge and a pop up menu appears General Shipper Consignee Supplier Carrier Commodities Charges Events Attachme status Description Prepaid Quantity Price Amount Apply to 5 Upen Aepacking Fee Yez an Open Storage Fee es F iew charge Regenerate charges Right click on a charge for options menu wf Show in Documents Choose Columns
166. TIPLE PICK TASK USING A MOBILE LOCATION Select and scan the location Under each location is the part number inside that location Pick From a a Part E ifs MES SOCLEP ere bet L Numbers lle B Storage Show operations Select Then scan the item and the mobile location Click the Move button Repeat for all the locations and their items in the task Then click Click Next Move to move then location to items into continue to the mobile location next location 496 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES FULFILL A MULTIPLE PICK TASK USING A MOBILE LOCATION When all the items are in the mobile location the status of the items is In Transit Move the cart or forklift of items to the final location scan the barcode of the final location Depending on the type of Finish configured you may need to scan the barcode of each item as it is removed from the cart and placed in the final loca tion This is called a Detailed Finish Note No repacking can be done during this process The system gives you a choice of methods to finish the task e A Detailed Finish requires all the items be scanned again as they are removed from the cart and placed in the final location o A Quick Finish does not require more scanning of the items To configure your system to perform Detailed Finishes go to Maintenance gt Configuration gt WMS Check the box Verify items after batch pi
167. Test Zone Ship 2 r Shipping Test Zone Quadrant 4 all Storage Miami Yard Quadrant 3 al Storage Miami Yard Put awiay sequence is the same If you check the box to use the same sequence for the put away then the wizard will finish If not then you will have a screen to adjust the put away sequence 235 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES RECOMMENDED NEXT STEPS Click Finish to save the changes and close the wizard Click the Refresh button in your Magaya system to see the changes in the Warehouse Inspector screen Recommended Next Steps 236 If you have not added definitions to locations do that next Also ensure the handhelds users have the correct permissions and are assigned to the correct warehouse If that s done then you re ready to start sending tasks to the hand helds to put away items pick or replenish items See each of these topics for details on the procedures See also the Directed Operations Getting Started topic for a list of all related topics CHAPTER 8 IDENTIFY ITEMS IN THE WAREHOUSE INTRODUCTION TO IDENTIFYING ITEMS Chapter 8 Identify Items in the Warehouse Introduction to Identifying Items Items in the warehouse can be identified in different ways by their part number serial number Magaya receiving label with a Magaya tracking number the pallet ID label or by the Magaya shipping label This topic will explain how to identify items in each of these ways ID by Part Number
168. The Commodity List displays all the commodities you ve handled including cargo inventory items vehicles and more The Commodity List is dynamic showing real time updates of quantities The columns in this list also appear in the Commodity tab of a WR Pickup Order or Cargo Release To change columns in the list go to the Actions button and select Choose Columns REPORTS FROM THE COMMODITY LIST Reports from the Commodity List When you need a report on the commodities your company has handled use the Commodity List under the Warehousing folder It shows the status of commodities such as what is on hand in transit or delivered for any date range you set 401 REPORTS FROM THE COMMODITY LIST Steps 1 Goto the Warehousing folder and click on the Commodity List E E E E Magaya Network 2 Tasks ia Quotations f Ep Pickup Orders je Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts E Warehouse Receipt List AE Cargo Releases AE Cargo Release List ss Largo Movements keri Largo Movement List ie Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector wl Inventory Item Definitions h Commodity Classifications A arehousing P Pickup Orders Ge Pickup Order List gt Warehouse Receipts gt Warehouse Receipt List a Commodity List 8 Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List Carga Movements s Carga Movement List et Package Types Locations WD Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classification
169. The part number is usually the manufacturer s identification number that is on the box when the items arrive at your warehouse It is not necessary to print labels for these boxes because they have a part number label on them already 237 ID BY SERIAL NUMBER When the items arrive scan the part number and store the item in a location Scan the location to record it in your Magaya database This method is often used when it is necessary to keep items by part number in order to know how many of a certain part number are in stock This part number will appear on the Commodity dialog box To create part numbers go to the Warehousing folder in Magaya Explorer and click on Inventory Item Definitions For details see Inventory Item Defini tions in Chapter 7 of the Magaya WMS Operations Manual or the following Knowledgebase article http knowledge magaya com search create_inventory_item2 If you don t want to the system to create a tracking number for items with part numbers check the box for this option in the Configuration gt Labels menu Labels can have external tracking numbers The Commodity dialog box has a tab for External Tracking Numbers Learn more in the topic Commodities in the Knowledgebase available from Page One the welcome screen in your Magaya software ID by Serial Number 238 The serial number is assigned by the manufacturer The serial number identifies each individual item of a type that comes
170. This Ports MAINTENANCE FOLDER PORTS Email To add an email signature for an employee enter their email address and click the button next to the Email field In the dialog box add text and format it as you want E eMail Signature Employee Administrator ib wl L Administrator HVWC Cargo Company 6 25 NWY 18th Terrace prea es Add employee email signature Format text Add link and or lago You can set the employee s email signature as the default for email messages they write or set up a company signature as the default for all email messages sent from your Magaya system See the option in Maintenance gt Configuration gt Outgoing Messages For more details see the Magaya Software Communica tions Manual Select frequently used ports so they are easy to find in your dropdown lists in your shipments and other transaction add additional ports work with Schedule K and Schedule D code lists define zones by zip code Ports can be selected from this list or be manually added 151 MAINTENANCE FOLDER PORTS 152 To select ports click Add gt Select Ports O ONG Denver W OPW Dallas Fort Worth Reg Mm CEN Denver _ E i Select Ports Add Port Manually Ucean Road Air Mail Alr Mail Ar Ar Drea ir gt gt Po o ef Filter Un Filter In the dialog box enter a city or port name in the Filter field Click the Find button The Count
171. UNITED STATES UNITED STATES Client bo Bill Other MIL Cargo Company Mode of Transp Orig J devine The Shipper is often the manufacturer or wholesaler i e the one who sent you the cargo If the shipper s name is not in the list add it by clicking on the plus sign and selecting the entity type The shipper s address will be filled in auto matically based on the details in their profile Select the Consignee The consignee is the ultimate recipient of the commodi ties at the destination Optional Select the Client to Bill this is the one who is paying for your services This can be the shipper consignee or a third party When you select the client to bill then the system fills in this entity by default on the Charges dialog box when you add charges to the Charges tab This makes it easier and faster to add charges to a Warehouse Receipt and other other transactions Of course you can change the entity on a charge manually Client to Bill Shippe Venezuela Pool and Patio Shipper Mode of Transp Ultimate Consignee Other Origin Destination 282 RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT SHIPPER CONSIGNEE TAB Select the Mode of Transportation This is the mode that is being used to get items to the warehouse This field on this tab is connected to the Charges tab If you do not select a mode of transportation you will not be able to enter freight charges on the Charges tab of the
172. Value Total Value T 0 00 0 00 255 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB 256 Fields on the General tab of the Commodity dialog box If you don t have a part number to select start with the Description field A Part Number PN is a number that identifies an item The PN may be from the manufacturer the customer or defined by your company The Pieces field is how many packages will display on the line in the Commodity tab For example 1 box is 1 piece Even if you have 1 box with other pieces inside it enter 1 in the Pieces field Another example If you pickup 10 boxes enter 10 in the Pieces field The dimensions are the measurements of a particular line item in the Pickup Order The dimensions are per piece For example if you have a pallet enter the dimensions of the pallet regardless of how many items are included in the pallet The By Totals field is volume and weight of all the pieces together This is useful if you don t know the weight of each box then enter the total for all the boxes in the Total field When you check the box the weight field will be grayed out so you can enter the total weight This selection is saved The Quantity field is used to enter the quantity of items commercially purchased This field is used if you are declaring insurance or if you need a Commercial Invoice to include the value per item This is used for resale items not for cargo items It
173. Warehouse Inspector s a amp g x Move Find Location Find Item Mowe Find Location Find It Warehouse details Warehouse details The Sequence tab in the Warehouse Inspector enables you to adjust the order of locations as needed You can also exclude a location from sequencing for example if you don t want a location to be considered during a guide Put Away Replenishment or Picking Task By completing the wizard the system also creates an option in the Employee profile dialog box that enables you to assign that employee to a specific ware 230 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES USING THE WAREHOUSE PROMOTION WIZARD house When this employee logs into WMS Mobile on the handheld scanner they will log into the warehouse that they have been assigned to Employee 3 _ General Address Biling Address Othe Addresses Uses Permissions Personal Info Attac Usemame WSLS Password TELLI Cornin TELIT Division Can only see bansactions from this drvision lt gt z AME Allow Magar RF Allow Magay Tuscon AZ WH N FlAlow Magy S Y Allow Magaya WMS Mobile access Fl Allow Magaya POD Mobile access Ditable access for this employee MAGAYA TIP The employee will not see locations from any other warehouse defined in your Magaya system See the topics on WMS Mobile for Put Away and Pick Tasks to see this in action After completing the wizard the system now ena
174. Warehouse Receipts Cargo Releases Pickup Orders Invoices and others can be resized Click on the corner or edge of the screen and drag the box to the size you want Click edge or corner to widen box Enty Date 3 9 2015 H When you log out of the system the size is saved and the dialog box will open to the same size as before you logged out 139 MAINTENANCE FOLDER MAINTENANCE FOLDER OVERVIEW Widen panels in the Shipment screen to expand or contract it a amp y Wy r Send Customs Comma Actions bill Notes Internal Notes Load da Add i Repack ee All cargo for Shipment vee ll 123456 16 37 5 rebar 140 0048 0 7 vom T 123456 16 37 52 inch Rebar Cutter es a 123456 Paint 9 0081 2 0087 00n 10 Click to widen panels X You can widen panels between many screens in the system Maintenance Folder Maintenance Folder Overview The Maintenance folder contains subfolders of entities such as your customers vendors employees ports and more and the Configuration subfolder with options to set up your Magaya system according to your needs Each subfolder 140 MAINTENANCE FOLDER MAINTENANCE FOLDER OVERVIEW has various actions and reports available that you can access by using the Actions button or by right clicking on the entity name The subfolders are ee Carriers br Forwarding Agents warehouse Providers Custom
175. When you use the Add Container button that container will appear in the Container Reports available from the Shipment List Actions button Ifyou use the Add button to add a commodity and then selected the container type from the Package Type list it will not appear in the Container Report 304 COMMODITIES ADD A CONTAINER The Refrigerated tab contains fields for the ventilation and temperature set up Container EEI Hazardous AMS Attachments Refrigerated Ventilation Setup I rs Ar Temperature Setup Has Generator e Enter the ventilation and temperature information Select Celsius or Fahrenheit from the dropdown Check the box if the container has a generator After you have entered the information needed click the OK button This returns you to the WR dialog box 305 COMMODITIES SCAN BAR CODES TO ENTER COMMODITIES Scan Bar Codes to Enter Commodities In addition to using the Add button to add commodities you can also use the Scan button to add commodities Warehouse Receipt Description Package Pieces Lengt Add Cont Edit Delete Repack Unpack Get PU ji mn car fe Totals Volume 0 00 FE 0 00 Wb 0 Pieces Weight 0 00 Fg 0 00 Ib Cancel To use the Scan button your system must have the Magaya Bar Code Scanner plug in activated Contact Magaya to activate it Scan the bar code on the items with the handheld barcode
176. _6 2009_3 Acquire Doc 529 55 KB 1 20 MB Delete If you want to make an attachment visible only internally in your company not for customers to see via Magaya LiveTrack or Transaction Tracking click on the Internal checkbox If the file size is large the system will give you a message to notify you that large attachments may cause a slow delivery of the attachment Magaya Explorer The size of this File is 529 55 KB Please Note Large files may cause a short delay 2 SF being viewed online or being sent by email Are you sure you want to attach this File You can still send the file regardless of the size To set your Magaya system to automatically reduce image size go to the Maintenance folder gt Configuration gt Maintenance amp Performance Click in the checkbox Optimize images for the Web The Attachments tab includes options to delete save or view an attached docu ment or photo The Save button opens a folder on your computer or network so you can save the image this is useful when uploading images directly from a camera 330 NOTES AND INTERNAL NOTES NOTES Notes and Internal Notes Magaya Explorer gives you the option to add notes to your transactions There are two types of notes Notes that are included on the documents and visible to customers and Internal Notes that are not visible to customers Notes Notes can be added to transactions such as Warehouse Receip
177. a Info Magaya software provides you with the option to create a WR from a Pickup Order If you picked up the cargo and you have a Pickup Order that you created in Magaya software you can transfer the information from the Pickup Order automatically into a WR To do this go to the Pickup Order docu ment and click the arrow on the side of the Actions button The list view of the WR also has an Actions button with additional options Reports Go to Document Print Batch Choose Columns Import Export and Statistics You can add columns to the list view and save that view For details on working with the WR List see the topic Working with Document and List Views To print labels click on the arrow on the Print button and select Print Labels WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT PRINT LABELS The Print Labels dialog box opens Print Labels Template for Print Range Warehouse Receipt Number WH 141 Avallable Labels Receiving Label 43 Receiving Label 45 Receiving Label 46 From Tracking Pickup Label 446 WMS Label 4x6 To E WS Label 46 Shipper All labels 0 Range of labels Total of Labels 13 Print Setup Name HP Lazerlet P2015 Series PCL 6 Port T5001 UF Cancel Help Select the label size and printer setup The W MS4x6 Shipper label includes the shipper s name Change the amount of labels to print if needed If you need to print a label for a pallet go
178. a different address than the default for the shipper These are saved addresses on the entity s profile You can add an address here too for example a branch office It will be saved in the system for future use Use the Copy button if the pickup location is the same as the shipper Otherwise select the pickup location from the dropdown menu The Place field is used if you have Rates entered in your system Rates are recommended but optional You can leave this field blank To use this field please read the following In the Pickup Order the rates work by generating ground freight rates automatically by the zip code of the Pickup Location field on the Shipper tab It will also use the Place set on the Consignee tab for the Delivery Location The system reads the zip codes in the Pickup Location and in the Delivery Location and compares them with the Zone Definitions avail able via the Ports List gt Actions It will find the cities for those Zones and then find the corresponding Rate entered for that city in the Rates list Rates are explained in Chapter 11 of the Magaya Software Accounting Manual 248 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER SHIPPER TAB To add a zip code to a port go to the Ports list click the Actions button gt Select Zone Definitions Click the Add button and enter the zone details File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting Report an P Eh re O O a A BS Ss Back Forward Pickup
179. agaya Database Server and Magaya Communication Server To expand an existing network to wireless you need to install one or more wire less access points The access points are wired to your network and are equipped with antennas that broadcast and receive communication signals which are routed back to your wired network The number of access points required in your facility depends on the area you want to cover with the wireless network The reach of an access point is usually 33 RECOMMENDED HARDWARE around 300 feet For example to cover a 200 x 500 foot warehouse you may need two access points to fully cover the whole facility The number of access points needed may also depend on the amount of equip ment you have in your warehouse For example very high racks can cause inter ference so you may need more access points to cover the same area The illustration shows two access points with a range of 300 feet each the signal range overlaps in the center and reaches to the back wall of the warehouse to ensure all racks and areas are covered There are companies that can perform a site survey before installing the access points to guarantee 100 wireless coverage of the entire facility Recommended Hardware 34 The recommended hardware to use the Magaya WMS Mobile application includes wireless handheld devices access points and antennas The following Symbol handheld devices from Motorola work with the Magaya
180. age One http knowledge magaya com search import_inventory_data The Magaya system enables the use of definitions and criteria that can be assigned to locations and to create sequences in the warehouse These criteria are used in Guided Put Away and Replenishment tasks This feature gives the user recommended locations to put away items using the Magaya WMS Mobile program on handheld bar code scanners How DOES MAGAYA EXPLORER USE WAREHOUSE ZONE AND LOCATION INFORMATION Directed Operations for a Smart Warehouse If your warehouse is set up to fulfill orders online retail customers please see the topic Directed Operations Getting Started Learn how to set up and run your warehouse for fast receiving and put away replenishing inventory locations for optimized picking and loading of orders using sequencing logic Also learn how to set up multiple warehouses in your Magaya system See How does Magaya Explorer use Warehouse Zone and Location Information There are different types of labels to use in your warehouse to identify zones and locations e Barcode labels on shelves and racks to track cargo locations by handheld scanners connected to Magaya WMS or e Signs to mark rows and racks You can enter this information into Magaya Explorer and it will help you know where everything is in your warehouse Labeling Warehouse Zones and Locations When you enter a warehouse zone and location in Magaya Explorer tho
181. aintenance folder or Accounting folder 1 Expand the folder by clicking on the plus sign 2 Select a subfolder for the transaction you want to modify examples Carriers or Invoice List A list of the transactions appears in the viewing pane 3 Select the transaction you want to modify such as a carrier name or the invoice Tip You can double click on the transaction to open it 4 Click on the Edit button on the toolbar A dialog box opens 5 Edit the information you need to change by typing in the fields Click on the tabs in the dialog box to see the fields on each tab 50 How to Use How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG Box How TO MAKE CHANGES TO INFORMATION YOU ENTER 6 Click the OK button to save the changes and exit the dialog box To make changes to information as you work in a dialog box 1 Click on the dropdown arrow in the field you want to change lssued By MC Cargo Company Jamaican Destination Agent 1 Lima Destination Agent ML Cargo Company Form Mian Distribution Center Forw Panama Destination Agent Form Prague Agent Form Saks Fifth Avenue Destination Agent 2 Select the option on the toolbar that displays in the dropdown menu Add green plus sign Edit notepad with pen and Delete red x Browse binoculars Sort Columns grid and Refresh blue arrows NOTE The buttons look the same as on the other toolbars in Magaya Explorer 3 Make changes 4 Click the OK butto
182. allet ID label Affix the label to the pallet if the pallet does not have a label This will identify the pallet Scan en Scan one of the following al 4 location er 4 pallet Barcode Pe cn O etn If you scan or enter the same pallet ID the system will ask you if you want to use the same pallet Click Yes to add more items to an existing pallet Click No to enter a different pallet ID or a new pallet 354 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE PRINT LABELS 3 The next screen shows the pallet in this location and the items list below it HR WwH GY E RECA Receiving wl Captain Morgan Spi Tah Totals _ items T FE 4 Select the first item in the list When you scan this item it will go inside the pallet in RECA When you change that pallet the system will save what you have scanned and the items will not display on the screen You can click Finish if needed and return to the remaining items at a later time You can create another pallet as needed Click OK to return to the item list Labels can be printed at this time by clicking the Labels button 5 Click Finish to complete the task or to temporarily end the task and return to it later All the items you scanned are saved in the database Print Labels To print labels click on the Labels button In the next screen enter the number of labels to print 355 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE PRINT
183. am Double click on the InstMCS exe file to run it The Installation Wizard screen appears i Magaya Software InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Magaya Software Magaya The InstallShield Ri Wizard will allow you to modify repair or remove Magawa Software To continue click Next Software a Follow the instructions in the wizard b Click the Close or Finish button when the setup is completed c Restart the computer if necessary d Double click on the Magaya Explorer shortcut icon to start the soft ware This icon should appear on your desktop If not go to your Start menu to find it in the programs list You can now log in with the Administrator user name and pass word Recommended Next Steps Then follow the configuration steps in the chapter Initial Software Configuration to enter your company information and create employee user names and passwords and other set up tasks To learn 24 INSTALL MAGAYA SOFTWARE STEPS FOR CLIENT SERVER INSTALLATION ON A NETWORK how to navigate the interface please see the chapter on the Magaya Explorer interface Also see the Magaya Software Customization Manual on www magaya com for more ways to personalize and customize your software Training videos are also available on the Magaya Software YouTube Channel If you are installing the software at a large company with employees in different departments we recommend contacting Magaya
184. and the process of moving items When an item is scanned from one location into another the system saves the movement tracing the item every step of the way See the section Create a Mobile Location in the Magaya WMS User Manual 192 Steps How TO CREATE WAREHOUSE LOCATIONS STEPS Tips When selecting bar code labels for racks ensure the barcode stickers are durable can handle temperature changes and can be read from the distance that the barcode reader laser can reach especially for high racks Definitions can be added to locations for picking putting away and replenish ment operations This feature is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and Magaya WMS See the topic Location Definitions for more Follow these steps to add locations 1 Go to the Warehousing folder gt Locations E E Yarehousing P Pickup Orders EP Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts i Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List AE Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List iz Cargo Movements fp Cargo Movement List ie Package Types ee T Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications Note This screenshot shows the Magaya Cargo System Your Ware housing folder may look different depending on your permissions access and if you have a different Magaya software 193 How TO CREATE WAREHOUSE LOCATIONS STEPS 2 194 Click the Add button A dialog box opens Location Identifica
185. and in the CR document Select the Cargo to Release The next screen shows the cargo items and or commodities that can be released A total is displayed on the bottom of the screen 456 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE The buttons across the top of the screen are lists of items such as those in the warehouse by inventory or by location Image from Magaya WMS Create Cargo Release Wizard Select the cargo to release You can select cargo either fro Warehouse FReceiptsfor trom Warehouse Inventory Lot Number Locations Scan o ld 2 Electronics Depot Fill in reverse order R 2 2 Ethemet cards 10 00810 004 00n 20 O 2 2 HP Laptop 22 00x21 00x8 00in 5 Mark all Unmark all Pieces Filter e 2 of elements 457 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE The following screenshot is from the Magaya Supply Chain Solution Create Cargo Release Wizard Select the cargo to release You can select cargo either from Warehouse Receipts or from Insventory s0 Scan E L WH 135 Art Basel Gallery Atlantic Surplus a Fil in reverse order H O 0 WH 134 ABC Sporting Goods Inc J 5 0 E WH 133 Atlantic Surplus Miami Distribution Center L Makal H 0 E WH 132 Atlantic Surplus 0 E WH 131 a O wH O E WH 129 ABC Sporting Goods Ine Filtes x H O S WH 128 ABC Sporting Goods I
186. and the WMS Mobile inter face Setting up warehouse zones and locations and import existing inventory data Identifying items in the warehouse with labels Pickup Orders CHAPTER 1 How TO USE THIS MANUAL WHERE TO FIND HELP e Receiving Cargo and creating Warehouse Receipts on the PC and with handheld devices e Managing and moving warehouse items including using the Warehouse Inspector on the PC to create tasks for handheld users to move items in the warehouse how to create inventory and commodity reports e Counts including performing inventory count sessions Releasing Cargo including creating Pick and Load tasks for the Magaya WMS Mobile users Quotations Where to Find Help 10 If you have questions or need help please see these resources We know it s not always easy to read a huge user manual so we created a search able knowledgebase online that has all these same topics It s available from Page One the welcome screen inside your Magaya software and it s online at http knowledge magaya com See also the Magaya com Learning Center webpage http www magaya com en us Learning Center Videos See the Magaya Channel on YouTube com Contact Magaya Corporation Phone 786 845 9150 Email support magaya com Tips and suggestions are available in Magaya software on dialog boxes and other locations in the software program Click on the Magaya Tip button to access resources such
187. arge Standard Charge Notes Paid az Tax Code x Allow automatic update Show in documents Quantity Unit Price Amount w eo ai uoo Select the charge from the dropdown menu Notice the income charges cc 32 CC o 32 cc 2 cc 32 are fees and income The expense charges are cost and expense o Add a description optional e Apply To Select who the charge is applied to such as a customer or carrier The system defaults to filling in the name of consignee for an 315 CHARGES WORKING WITH THE CHARGES TAB 316 Income charge and the Carrier for an Expense charge If the customer needed is not shown in the dropdown list use the button next to the drop down to show all entities Paid as Select if the charge is Prepaid or Collect Prepaid means the charge is paid or invoiced at origin Collect means the charge is paid at destination It is collected by the destination agent if you have one at the destination Note Define this per customer in their profile on the Payment Terms tab Tac Code Select a sales tax code if applicable to your services In the US sales taxes are not applied to freight services but they are applied in other countries e Select the checkbox to show the charges in the documents if you want the charges to appear in operations documents such as WRs visible to the customer Charges will always appear in accounting transact
188. at may be installed on your handheld For questions about the OS see Microsoft or your handset manufacturer documentation The Magaya Network ID number and name of the mobile user are displayed in the taskbar Other icons show the battery life remaining access to the virtual keypad that can be used with the stylus and cascading screen display MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW OF THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INTERFACE If the Network ID is red click the forklift icon in the top bar to open the Diag nostic screen The system runs a self test Maile 5 4535 24677 ill Copyright 2007 2012 Magaya Corporation All rights reserved Windows CE 6 6 Motorola Symbol amp Magaya Network Network Error amp Magaya Downloads Download error magaya CS Ok Battery Ok 51 Scanner Lib Ok Scanner Ok Other Notes If the application is idle for a long period of time it will log off automatically If a user has a session open on one handheld and tries to log into another one the system asks if the user wants to discard the other session This prevents loss of data from the other session 159 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW OF WMS MOBILE FUNCTIONS If the handheld IP address changes dynamically the current session is kept alive to prevent loss of data for the current task Overview of WMS Mobile Functions The following list is a brief overview of the functions available in the Mag
189. ate the WR on the PC See the section on creating Warehouse Receipts for details Do not assign a location to the items when you enter them in the Commodity dialog box of the WR because the items have not arrived yet The WR will have a status of Pending until the receiving task is completed on the handhelds 345 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING 2 346 From the Warehouse Receipt create a Receiving Task and send it to the Magaya WMS Mobile application running on the handheld devices by following these steps Click on the arrow on the side of the Task button and select Create Task from the dropdown menu Network Send EMail Refresh Folders Filter Actions Create WMS Move Task Receipt Number WVH 5 Recened DateTime Jan 1172013 01 31 PM Receved By lene Taylor Oooo Consignee Information Tropical Landscaping RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING 3 Inthe Task dialog box enter the details of the task such as the user who will perform the task optional the date it is due the Task Type Receive WMS and other details as needed Option You can enter a location here to tell the handheld user where to place the items when they receive them or leave the Location field blank Task Ed Task Task Dates Assigned to we Due 5 20 2015 se 3 00 00 AM Reminder D00 se 8 45 00 AM Created by Task type Receive WMS w
190. ation about your company such as your address and phone numbers select carriers and ports you use frequently set the currency and other information It opens automatically after you download Magaya software Running the Startup Wizard when you first download the software for the first time is required because it contains a screen to enter an Activation Key which is necessary to use the software on a trial basis or when purchasing it The Activa tion Key is obtained from Magaya Corporation When you run the Startup Wizard and enter your email address that information is sent to Magaya Corporation A Magaya Logistics Advisor will contact you with the Activation Key The Startup Wizard cannot be completed without it because it will connect you to the Magaya Network via a Magaya Network ID code that the system will assign after the Activation Key has been entered Tip Entering this information in the Startup Wizard now saves time later because this information will be saved in the Magaya software and is automati cally placed in documents such as Warehouse Receipts shipment documents and Cargo Releases Begin the Startup Wizard When you are in your Magaya Explorer open the Startup Wizard by clicking File gt Startup Wizard If you are using the Startup Wizard for the first time some of the screens may look different from the ones shown here Each screen has instructions follow the prompts If you have any questions please contact
191. aya WMS Mobile application All of the following tasks are explained in detail in the related chapters in the Magaya WMS Operations Manual Initial Inventory This function is enabled to perform the initial inven tory setup when you first use Magaya WMS This function is only performed once See Chapter 4 WMS Mobile Set Up Receive Use this function to receive cargo and create Warehouse Receipts for incoming items This process begins with a task that is sent to the handheld device with all the information about the incoming items This is also called Informed Receiving e Measure Use Measure to enter item dimensions This function speeds up the process of receiving items that have tracking numbers because it enables you to add item dimensions by using the handheld instead of the PC It only works for items with tracking numbers not for Part Numbers Pictures To take pictures from the handheld ensure your device has a camera compatible with Magaya WMS Mobile Motorola as of June 2015 Photographs are automatically attached to the Warehouse Receipt you are working on Move This is used to move items within the warehouse or to process a transfer of items from one warehouse to another one when both ware houses are owned by the same company This process begins with a task that is sent to the handheld device Manual Move Use this to move items within the warehouse This process is started and completed
192. bers receiving 294 Server installation 25 Shipping labels 241 SKU 179 Software components 26 Startup Wizard 55 88 Activation Key 57 Create password 58 Straight Bill of Lading 398 System requirements 21 T Task count inventory 429 Task perform count 430 Taskbar icon 27 Tasks 96 Load 498 Pick 482 Tax exempt entity 148 Taxes display in Quotation 508 Toolbar 87 Toolbar buttons 114 Tracking Details 320 Transaction Log 115 Tree view 92 Trucks as mobile locations 393 TSA 146 U Uninformed Receiving 357 Uninstall software 30 Unpack icon 308 Update Magaya software 27 y Variable weight receive item 292 Vehicle shipping a 299 Vendor add 148 View documents 103 VIN find number 134 Vista Microsoft 86 VPN 25 W Warehouse Inspector 374 Warehouse Location Set Default 290 Warehouse locations 188 Warehouse locations how to add 192 Warehouse Receipt add commodities 287 create 278 Warehouse Receipt number 280 Warehouse transfers 393 status 399 Warehouse zones 188 Weight variable 180 Welcome screen 85 Windows XP Vista 7 21 Windows XP 86 Wireless requirements 33 WMS Mobile diagnostics 159 dynamic IP address change 160 handhelds supported 34 save task 351 scanner signal 387 see also Magaya WMS Mobile 155
193. bles you to set a default receiving location for each warehouse in your system 231 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES DEMOTE A WAREHOUSE The Warehouse Receipt dialog box will display a dropdown menu to select the warehouse E Warehouse Receipt General Shpper Consignee Supplies Carnes Commodities Charges Events Attachments Note O g Empey Number WH 1 544 Date 6 19 2015 4 13 46 Pid Employee Administrator leued By HWE Cargo Company Destination Agent Bonded w H Type Enty Number Enby Date Tuscon AZ WH oe Y Ml amp E MATAYA TIP If you need to change a warehouse and return it to a zone you can do this by right clicking on the warehouse icon and selecting Demote Warehouse See the section Demote Warehouse for steps Demote a Warehouse If you no longer have a separate warehouse you can change your Magaya system to reflect the change 232 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES DEMOTE A WAREHOUSE Right click a warehouse icon in the Warehouse Inspector screen A wizard opens Wagaya Warehouse Demotion Wirard Welcome to the Warehouse Demotion Wizard This wizard will assist you in clearing the warehouse Clearing the warehouse consists of either Click on Khe Next butkon to start Deleting its sequence and arranging its locations later Incorporation the Freed locations back into the root sequence The next screen in the wizard shows the locations to be me
194. c ee teenies 210 Assign the Definitions to Locations 0 0 0 ccc ees 215 Recomimended Next S1eps 2044 4 5 06 2042e sobs edeeSitodteb dit eeee Seas 216 Sequencing in the Warehouse 0 ccc ccc ene ees 217 Introduction to Warehouse Sequencing 0 00 cece eee 217 Create a Sequence for a Single Warehouse 0 00000 cece eae 217 IMpOn A Scun CO eree aea RARE ARG 219 Recommended NeXt SICPS serayerebiutanete rda E AE aers 220 Replenishment 23 s chau d953 3 Saeed a AA a a 8 RA EA 220 Introduction to Inventory Replenishment 0 0 0 0 220 Configure Replenishment Schedule 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 221 Define Replenishment in Location Definitions 0 0 000 00 225 Fulfill Replenishment Move Tasks 0 0 0 0 ccc nes 225 Multiple Warehouses 64 030 500s90 4 24 o9248 6 SASS 8 oe REESE EERE ESS 225 Multiple Warehouses Using the Warehouse Promotion Wizard 226 Demote a Ware NOUSE aisia pandora aac bee ewes wines Bera aes Sate R 232 Recommended Next SLEDS d vus2508 A 5 desea Pane onan a eae s 236 Chapter 8 Identify Items in the Warehouse ccc ccc cece cece ce eeene 237 Introduction to Identifying Items 0 0 0 0 ce eens 231 ID Dy Part NUMDGR erene e a n E ee ak RS ah aa a A 237 ID by Senai Nme eose als ds wee E hd EN 238 ID by Magaya Receiving Label occ ee een eed eee ben AOE DEE G 239 LD by Pallet ID Eabele ao eee aie eins oe eee RE Bae e
195. can each serial number individually 432 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM COUNT ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE 4 The next screen shows the items in that location Because this is an Informed Count the items are displayed on the screen Items To Count Accept count The screen shows columns for the item descriptions Quantity and how many were counted The code column tells you what should be scanned For example L means to scan the Location P scan the Part Number S scan the Serial Number T scan the Tracking Number L Location code Icons If an item has a blue square with a red minus sign on it the item is not in a pallet and the quantity is less than the quantity in the Magaya database If the icon shows a plus sign that means the physical count is more than the amount in the database A checkmark indicates the physical count is the same as the amount in the database For a pallet with a green icon scan the pallet label only Ifa pallet icon is yellow this means the items inside the pallet are labeled and also need to be scanned To count items inside a pallet Click the Pallet button scan the pallet barcode the system will take you inside the pallet Scan items in the pallet When you are done counting items for that pallet click on the Pallet 433 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM COUNT ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE button again You can scan another pallet or leave the field
196. cation 1 Get the Download Program Go to Magaya com and fill in the fields on the web registration form Enter the email address to receive the down loading instructions You must use the same email address for the download and the installation processes The registration form is required so that you can receive an Activation Key to use the software and be assigned a Magaya Corporation identification E INSTALL MAGAYA SOFTWARE STEPS TO INSTALL ON A SINGLE COMPUTER OR SERVER number a Network ID that enables external communication using the Magaya Network Get an Achvabon Key and create a Magaya Network ID Tour comtact mtomabon has been saved and serito Magaya Conporaton Tour request for an Avchryvstion Key it being orocerced We wal contact you or you can contact us Monday through Friday J am to S pm 788 645 9150 or activation mageya com F you dont have the Actyation Rey now you can chope the wizard and oper it later bo enter the key Your information has been saved Enter Activation Key Cieale passwd Corim passed 6 characters minimumi OGick Create ID bo contnue lt Back Cee tome He You will receive an email message with instructions and a link to down load the Installation Program The dialog box you see will depend on your operating system Follow the steps in it to run the program 23 INSTALL MAGAYA SOFTWARE STEPS TO INSTALL ON A SINGLE COMPUTER OR SERVER 2 Install the Progr
197. cation on handheld devices There are two options 1 Begin the Receiving process for incoming items by creating the Ware house Receipt WR on the PC and then send the task to the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld devices to be completed This process is called RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING Informed Receiving The WMS Mobile user completes the process by scanning the incoming items into the Magaya system and assigning each item a location in the warehouse All information is updated on the PC or 2 Begin the Receiving process on the handheld devices to create a WR for incoming items This process is called Uninformed or Blind Receiving The Magaya WMS Mobile user scans the incoming items and assigns them to locations in the warehouse All information is updated on the PC It is important to perform these steps correctly on the handhelds to ensure accu racy in reports or other related transactions The following sections will explain both these options in detail Informed Receiving Informed Receiving is the process of receiving cargo that you know you are expecting to arrive at the warehouse You have the shipper information the client customer name the item descriptions dimensions and other details For example your customer sends you WR data via EDI before the cargo phys ically arrives To receive cargo using the Informed Receiving process begin by following these steps on the PC 1 Cre
198. ce folder gt Configuration 2 Click on the Event Definitions icon on the menu The following screenshot shows the Event Definitions screen Fis Edt See Operon Maintenance AMagaahebeh Accounting Fiapot Optio Heip o oO a A g b K Pages Reber i il Taka Evon Datinmiiton 00 ooa E 1G uiii a T Washoan Ply Lorak aiai behai r Tami Aib Ln Eris ian ipdan Yat Ya Eragi Cge in a Epy tories es ve ni Paheke Mie Pe bliri Tar TE E A Truk Tegi ba cana fer Ya Biia Pree Caga higa Uaia vi Y a ai ureien Tapa he kaser peck d Yet Ta Log Cargo scanned cal Yar Ya f Cage scanned in Yii Yai E Dees e YE Ye Fareed at naen Ya Tar Uniram in Tract ver Ta shapes airs bt nace apa ie Tot Poche igs aL Hg 321 EVENTS DEFINE NEw EVENT Click the Add button A dialog box opens Event Definition Mame Cargo scanned in This event indicates the cargo was scanned in Location Automatic Creation Manual Include in Tracking Cancel Enter a name for the event Enter details on the event optional Select a location to connect with that event optional Select from the dropdown to choose the type of automatic creation for this event There are many options For example you can make an event appear ina WR or Cargo Release when it is created emailed or liquidated Selecting Manual will not automatically create an event You will have to select the E
199. ch as the Number Date and Release To OW Empty Release Number Creation Date Release Date Erniployee lssued By Released to CR 65 117 372015 Eki 117 372015 Hr Time 10 55 01 AM Administrator Drvisior Hil Cargo Company JB Wire Co Release to Address K ansas City UNITEL Chent to Bill MAGAYA TIP Released to JB Wire Co The wizard walks you through entering basic information to release cargo or other items It does not have a screen for entering charges that is done after the wizard Details about charges are explained in the section Charges Tab 455 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE CARRIER INFORMATION Carrier Information Click the dropdown list to select the carrier who is taking the cargo out of the warehouse E Create Carga Release Wizard Camer Information Enter the carier information for this cargo release Carrier Anderson amp Sons Trucking Co 7 Driver s Hame Driver s License Number PAO Murmber Tracking Number Purchase Order Number lt Back Nems Cancel Help Fill in the other fields as needed Driver s name and driver license number PRO Number The PRO Number is a Progressive number a sequential number used by transportation companies to identify and track freight bills Purchase Order number Note After finishing the wizard the carrier information enter here will be saved on the Inland Carrier tab
200. check the Hazardous Material checkbox and enter information in the fields as needed These fields are connected to the INTTRA ocean carriers interface that Magaya offers See the topic on INTTRA for more Commodity Identification EEI Hazardous Notes Attachments Hazardous Material Identification Number Maternal Class Class Qualifier Maternal Description Emergency Contact Maternal Page Flashpoint Temp Special Instructions Description of Class Hazardous Level The information required on shipping papers to ship hazardous materials is listed in the U S Department of Transportation s DOT Hazardous Materials Table HMT section 172 101 The basic description of the hazardous materials must include the identification number of the material the proper shipping name of the material the hazard class or division and the packing group Addi tional information may be required depending on the materials you are ship ping The US DOT s Hazardous Materials website is http phmsa dot gov hazmat The flashpoint is the minimum temperature at which the flammable vapors or a substance will ignite when in contact with a spark or flame An emergency response telephone number is required To enter information in the fields click on the box Hazardous Material to activate the fields Tthe following define the fields in the Hazardous tab Identification Number A code representing the identification nu
201. ck When this option is unchecked the system enables a Quick Finish no verifying Note The system saves a record of all picks as the items are moved by creating a Cargo Movement document in the Warehousing folder The status changes from Pending to Complete If using the Quick Finish option clicking the Move button displays the screen for the final location to be scanned Just scan that location barcode and all the items are automatically moved there in the system Just unload the cart forklift When the Pick Task is completed the system saves a record of all picks in the Cargo Movement document The status changes to Complete 497 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE A LOAD TASK Create a Load Task To load the cargo directly without picking items and repacking or palletizing them follow these steps You can also use this process to move cargo from QC to the shipping door 1 Start on the PC by creating a Cargo Release See the section Create a Cargo Release for details 2 Create a Load task from the Cargo Release by clicking on the arrow on the side of the Task button and select Create Task ft B E Network Sent EMail Refresh Folders i 7 ke a Create Task Find Filter Actions zoom i Create WMS Move Task WC Ca rg O Co mM pa n y Create Partial WMS Pick Load Task W 18 Terrace Miami FL 33172 UNITED STATES Cargo Release a aa Release DateTime Apr R2012 09 45 AM R
202. ckup Order Created on Notes Created by Last m 06 02 2075 Internal Note 1 Administrator O6 Oe Click Save Mem E dit Save Delete Cancel Type your internal note here and click Save To add an internal note click New and type your internal note Be sure to click Save or the note will not be saved For details on adding Internal Notes see the topic section Notes in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search notes_and_internal_notes Finish Click the OK button on the Pickup Order dialog box when you are finished entering information The Pickup Order document will be filled in automati cally Verify the information To make changes click on the Edit button Notice the status in the list view and if you open the dialog box again 267 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER INTERNAL NOTES TAB What Actions can I Perform with a Pickup Order After completing the Pick up Order you have many options in Magaya soft ware You can print the pickup order or a label email the pickup order make a copy or other options This topic covers the options available from the toolbars and the Actions button qT ri Ja lt gt R Filter Actions oom Page gt Options Transaction Listing Attachments ip Orde Create a Copy Create Warehouse Receipt Exclude from Tracking Add to job Magaya Express Link Deli Set Reset In Transit Hous Set Reset Delivered S
203. contact information payment terms rates assign tracking access TSA compliance and more You can import a list of customer names via the Actions button For importing steps see the topic Import your Customer List into your Magaya System 146 MAINTENANCE FOLDER CUSTOMERS Right click a Customer name to see more functions Here are a few Customers a Customers Name Other Reports DJ s Electn Fenati Right click a Customer name to see a pop up menu of options Web Track User List Configure Tracking by Transaction Transactions Listing Qpen Transactions Rates Contracts Query Rates Qn Hand Carga to bill Entity Groups Denied Party screening Choose Columns Import Export Self Registration Allow customers to register themselves on LiveTrack See the Configuration menu for Customer Setup Client Statements View and print client statements by right clicking the customer name from the list Tracking Access Set a customers access to online tracking by right clicking and selecting Allow Tracking Also see Configuration gt Customer Setup for more tracking options 147 MAINTENANCE FOLDER VENDORS Payment Terms If a customer is tax exempt check the box on the Pmt Terms Payment Terms tab Also set the customer s currency preference credit card and more E Customers General Address Biling Address Other Addresses Contacts Rates C
204. counting folder There should be only two items Invoices and Bills Then go to a Ship ment and verify that the Liquidation button is active on the Shipment Toolbar Also verify the access for the Operations Employee PERMISSIONS ROLES OVERVIEW Roles Overview With the Roles feature the system administrator can grant or restrict access for an employee or a group to different actions in the system A role can be an action such as giving an employee e Access to the company financial reports e The ability for an employee to create tracking users e The ability to process liquidations Access to the accounting configuration or other options in the Mainte nance gt Configuration menu A role that is granted or denied supersedes any other permission an employee might have NOTE When a new version of Magaya software is released and you update to it ensure you are familiar with the new features and changes in the release espe cially new roles or permissions because they may change access of employees New features are announced on Magaya com and in the newsletter Add a Role to an Employee To add a role to an employee s profile in your Magaya system 1 Goto Maintenance gt Employees 2 Select the Employee s name to highlight it 79 PERMISSIONS ADD A ROLE TO AN EMPLOYEE 3 Click the Actions button and select Roles Alternative Right click on the employee s name and select Roles from the pop up menu
205. create a Mobile Location first create it in the Locations list and then configure it in the Configuration gt WMS screen To see detailed steps for creating mobile locations please see Chapter 7 of the Magaya WMS Operations Manual After you create Mobile Locations they will display in the Locations list with the Type identified as Mobile Locations Locations Status Code Description Type a Used RECA Receiving Area 4 Receiving Refrigerated Truck Mobile Fork litt 1 Mobile Cart 2 Mobile Cart Mobile Bay area A Shipping RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES FULFILL A MULTIPLE PICK TASK USING A MOBILE LOCATION Users of the WMS Mobile handheld scanners can select the mobile eqipment they need to use for a task Receive Move Fick Load Count Messages View Manual Manual 1 Receive Move g 0 Put Away Measure Exit While one employee is using that piece of mobile equipment no other employee can use it until they select another option or None If a user does not need to use mobile equipment they can select None from the menu Note The user can be cleared in the Configuration menu option Warehouse Equip ment User Identification Please enter your current working zone and equipment Facility Building one Default fone h Equipment The main screen displays the equipment in the bottom taskbar 495 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES FULFILL A MUL
206. cription C Importers Importers are users who have access to Importation they can Ws Account Recervable Users that can enter invoices and receive payments C E vemone Users in this group have minimum access only C Exporters Exporters are users who have access to Exportation An employee who belongs to the Importers or Exporters group will be able to use the Shipment Wizards on the main toolbar to create Shipments 4 Assign Folder Permissions Select the Accounting folder click File gt Permissions Remove the groups Everyone Exporters and Accounts Receivable and click the box Apply these permissions to children Add the Limited Accounting group but do not check the box Apply these permissions to children To limit permissions further for the Operations Staff optional select the subfolder that you want to enable the employee to see such as Invoices the document view only to limit access to reports and the Bills document view Do this by selecting the subfolder Invoices and clicking File gt Permissions and adding the Limited Accounting group Do the same with Bills For the Operations Manager go to Accounting gt File gt Permissions Add Importers and Exporters group Add the group Limited Accounting Do not check the box to apply this setting to children Go to Invoices add Limited Accounting Go to Bills and add Limited Accounting To verify the set up log in as the Operations Manager and go to the Ac
207. ct the parent zone if applicable Select a division optional Select a customer optional This will assign all the locations inside this zone to this customer which saves you time from having to assign each location individually Select a Default Receiving Location if this is a warehouse Click OK to save the information and close the dialog box Locations Warehouse Zone List Hearne ik Description Parent one Cold Storage one Cold Storage one Houston Warehouse Default one Houston Warehouse Houston Warehouse Mian Warehouse Mian ard Outdoor Storage area Mobile Locations Trucks Yans The zone is saved in the list Extra Info If you have more than one warehouse you can define each one as a zone and then promote it to a warehouse by using the Warehouse Promotion Wizard from the Warehouse Inspector screen Learn more in the topic Sequencing in the Warehouse This feature is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and Magaya WMS How to Create Warehouse Locations Warehouse Locations are the places in your warehouse for storing commodities and inventory These often include a Receiving area a Staging area locations on racks in different rows an outdoor storage area a Quality Control area a Ship ping area and others Locations can also be mobile such as a truck forklift or a cart These types of equipment can be defined as mobile to improve visibility in the warehouse
208. ction Forwarding Agent Mame HW Cargo Compary Address 7950 NW Bard Street r lami FL 33166 m NITED STATES Click to see addresses Client tS Tm Add HWE Cargo C EJ Fess arga mar A dialog box opens a Address Default Shipping Address new address gt Default Billing Address Default Shipping Address Los Angeles Warehouse X Let s look at the first tab of the My Company Info dialog box the General tab _ 5 lect address Phanec Company Information General Address Mame Entity ID Phone e Mail Website Account Humber Contact First Name Contact Last Name Identification Number 12345678944 EN ow wt 63 How TO USE THE ACCOUNTING WIZARD ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS How to Use 64 On the General tab The Identification Number can be any of the choices available in the drop down such as DUNS Employee Identification Number EIN etc e The Magaya Network ID is automatically filled in Contacts Add individuals here who are interested parties that you will send transactions to or need to notify When you click the Email button the names will be included in To field of the email The names will be saved in the Contacts list of the Maintenance folder Right click a name for options On the Agent tab enter codes such as your IATA FMC SCAC and TSA numbers These codes
209. ction How to Set Permissions for details on how to add a group to your system Access to this group can be further customized per employee and per folder such as the Accounting folder 3 Assign the Employees to Groups In this example the manager has access to both the AR and AP groups so this manager can liquidate shipments Permissions for Operations Manager General Address Billing Address Other Addresses User Permissions Personal Info Select the groups to which this employee belongs to Name Description C Importers Importers are users who have access to Importation they can HS Account Payable Users that can enter bills and make bills payments HS Account Recetvable Users that can enter invoices and receive payments C E vemone Users in this group have minimum access only C E sporters Exporters are users who have access to Esportation C Limited Accounting The group only access to certan accounting This access can 77 PERMISSIONS SCENARIO LIMITING PERMISSIONS 78 The employee Operations Staff is assigned to the groups of Importers Exporters Accounts Receivable and Everyone This gives this employee the ability to add charges to transactions and create shipments but they do not have access to liquidation Permissions for Operations Staff General Address Biling Address Other Addresses User Permissions Personal Info Select the groups to which this employee belongs to Name Des
210. d take to scan each one You must scan the first item then you can enter the quantity in the next screen Click OK 352 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING 4 Receive the remaining items in the list If the quantity received was less than the quantity stated on the task enter the quantity received The task will appear again on the handheld screen with the number of outstanding items remaining to be received You can print labels or click Finish when you are done or to temporarily end the task You can return to it later All the items you scanned up to this point are saved as Received in the system Warehouse Receipt Ta Description Qty Pek Code PAWHR WH 145 otals Other Options in the WR list screen To receive perishable items with Magaya WMS Mobile Warehouse Item Sa Invoice S mM T WT F 5 1 Lot 2 3 4 5 6 F 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 v Use Expiration 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Expires 27 02 000 oo lt 4 lt 0 26 e ce Today 27 02 14 Click arrow for calendar 353 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING Select the item to edit it and open the Identification tab Select the expiration date Palletize Items From this screen you can also palletize items or create a new pallet if needed 1 Click on the Location Pallet button from the items list 2 Scan or enter the barcode for the pallet The barcode is on a p
211. d Inventory B Delivered Choose Columns T In Transit Import WD Delivered odie Inc v Teral History W Loaded a In Transit Statistics Fos EE in Transit al MANAA amaia Miskihuhaon Center Create a Cargo Release for a lost item and use the Inventory Adjustment for Scrapped Inventory wizard to remove it from the asset account The wizard generates an invoice for zero dollars To use the wizard for this process the items must be resale with a cost defined and be in the status of Loaded e After a Count Session The system creates a WR for found items as usual Then you can adjust the accounting of the items by activating the wizard in the Configuration gt WMS menu If you are not using Magaya for your accounting leave this unchecked The wizard for inventory adjustments is available in the Actions button menu in the WR list Inventory Item Definitions list and in the CR list You can also right click an item in one of these lists to access the pop up menu Using the Inventory Adjustments Wizard 447 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT 448 The following example shows the wizard from the WR list to use for Found items The wizard is similar in the other lists Inventory Adjustment Wizard Adjustment Source Please select one of the options below Item Definitions Warehouse Receipts If you select multiple WR s from the list the wizard will only show those WR
212. d prepare them for loading Magaya WMS Mobile enables many tasks including photographing items in addition to scan ning bar codes of part numbers serial numbers and more Information about the movement and location of the inventory in the warehouse can be tracked with handheld devices and updated in the central database allowing other departments to see how much inventory is on hand what was sold and what is needed This enables shipment and delivery of the correct amount of inventory when it is needed This practice is called Just In Time JIT inventory strategy JIT main tains an efficient supply of goods by reducing the cost of storing excess goods for long periods and increasing customer satisfaction by having inventory when customers need it To speed up the process of picking and loading goods are not required to stop in a staging area but may be taken from their locations and placed directly in the loading area where a Quality Control QC process will take place QC ensures the orders are correct Packing slips are printed and placed on the boxes Configuration options are available to fit your processes Load Goods The goods are loaded onto a delivery truck for transport out of the warehouse Bar code scanners can be used to verify packing lists A Cargo Release document is created If you work with a freight forwarder you can give this document to them when they arrange pick up UPS and FedEx can also be connected to d
213. delete it All the items in that CR will return to your database The record of the cancellation deletion is kept in the Transactions Log on the top menu go to Options WHAT ACTIONS CAN PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE VERIFY A PACKING LIST IN A CARGO RELEASE Verify a Packing List in a Cargo Release To verify items in a packing list in a Cargo Release follow these steps Xx F dit Delete Find Filter HWC Carge 2725 Ni 18 Terrace Miami ai C Applicable Charges at Ww a lt d ling Actions soam Options Transaction Listing Verify Packing List Exclude From Tracking Add to job Cargo Release Set Reset In Transit Select Template History ime Apr27 2010 09 45 AM Release By llene Taylor Click on the Actions button and select Verify Packing List A screen opens Packing List verification for cargo release 17 dh All cargo for 17 W 2 10 24 Air Filter 30 00 45 00 12 00in 2 W 8 10 24 Air Filter 30 00 45 00 12 00in 8 dh All cargo for 17 Valid Codes 0 The items to be verified appear in the top half of the Packing List screen Scan the items As items are scanned they appear in the bottom half of the screen To enter a bar code manually click on the Enter Code button and type in the bar code number To create a report or restart the count click on the Actions button and select the option needed 481 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CR
214. dictate when it is counted how often and by what method The accounting and finance objectives are often different from supply chain management objectives The financial view of inventory is assessing its value to the company s balance sheet while the supply chain management view of inventory is geared toward supply efficiency having enough inventory to ship when needed and managing deliv eries for timeliness For example the goal of the Just In Time method of inventory is to ensure the right amount of goods are in the warehouse when sales orders come in for those goods so they can be shipped when the customer wants them improving customer satisfaction 19 ONLINE TRACKING While having a lot of inventory in a warehouse may make a company look like they have more assets the supply chain point of view perceives this to mean that goods sit for long periods and do not rotate but take up valuable space in the warehouse which is costly and reduces operating efficiency Online Tracking 20 With Magaya LiveTrack your customers have online visibility into their cargo inventory invoices and more Other communications features in the software include the optio to send links and documents to customers to update them on their items and invoices CHAPTER 3 MAGAYA SOFTWARE INSTALLATION INTRODUCTION Chapter 3 Magaya Software Installation Introduction This topic explains the system requirements for installing Magaya softwar
215. ding commodi ties Check this option if you want the system to perform this way Create an informative Task when breaking down compound items Click the Save or Reset button Inventory Adjustments Configuration The Inventory Adjustment configurations are explained in Chapter 12 Counting Inventory 41 CONFIGURE WMS WMS MOBILE CONFIGURATION WMS Mobile Configuration The functions on the WMS Mobile configuration tab enable the setup of processes and users of the handheld devices WMS General Inventory Adjustment WES Mobile Directed Operations WES Mobile Units Used to configure the measurement units For the WMS Mobile users Warehouse Equipment Used to configure the type of equipment used by the warehouse personnel WS Mobile Users Used to configure the permissions printer configuration etc of the of the WMS Mobile users Counts Numbers Used to configure the generation of numbers For count sessions Operations Settings Used to configure the behavior of the operations in the Wis Mobile Enable initial inventory For WMS Mobile users Only for Magaya Cargo System Users moving to WEIS Mobile Create pallets outside Warehouse Receipts in WMS Mobile Manual Receive verify items after batch pick WMS Mobile Units Click on this button to open the measurement units dialog box Measurement Units Measurement Units Length Area Squared foot fF ka Volume Cubic foot y Weight
216. duction to Logistics chapter in the user manual for your software product Working with the List View The List view provides you with many options You can sort the columns in the list to view the information in a variety of ways You can search for documents and transactions and run reports The List view is available when you are working with e All the list subfolders under the Warehousing folder such as Warehouse Receipts Pickup Orders and Cargo Releases list All the subfolders under the Maintenance folder such as Carriers Vendors and more 104 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS WORKING WITH THE LIST VIEW e Many subfolders under the Accounting folder such as lists of Invoices Payments Bills Deposits Checks and more Most lists have a Date range field at the top of the list Use the Date range to view the transactions you want to see from a certain time period such as last week or last month amp Dates Custom w From 1 1 2009 To 12 31 2010 Y 2 ie Status Number Date Shipper Conzignee Carrier Pieces The system includes preset date ranges Click the Dates dropdown menu Pickup Order List P Dates alone rom 3 31 2001 Today a Statys Thiz week hipper Pa This week to date z wi asti eree b lando Gal W Arriving This month to date WL Large D On Hand This year t Basel G T Aving A EN date Irlando Gat wi AVI set week UtoLite Au wi 4rving Last week to date ell Helmet
217. e On Hand Then move the items in the system scan the items and scan the new locations When done delete the old locations IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY Inventory will be imported as Warehouse Receipts WR The following table illustrates the minimum data that must be imported 1 Goto the Warehouse Receipts list click the Actions button and select Import Status Mumber Date Shipper Consignee iE OUnHand WH FO Ub 4 2010 Atlantic 5 Biscayne Bike Sh T On Hand wH 69 Ub 4 2070 Atlantic 5 Biscayne Bike Sh Wondand ADJUST 0001 06 14 2010 I On Hand wH 68 05 25 2010 Florida Ma T On Hand wH 67 O65 201 0 Honeywell 9 Pending WH 66 05 24 2010 Florida Na WD On Hand wH 65 05 24 2010 OnHand wH 54 05 24 2010 ee W OnHand WH 63 05 24 2010 ee WP OnHand WH 62 05 24 2010 eorum I OnHand WH E1 05 24 2010 pects oOnHand wH 60 05 24 2010 ee E OnHand wH 59 04 19 2010 Ee eee cre Warne WD On Hand wH 58 0415 2010 Send Ta Din Proc WwH 57 03 24 2010 E in Proc WH 56 03 12 2010 Choose Columns WD OnHand WH 55 03 02 2010 MAE Gu O Pending WH 54 02 12 2010 aaa WD Delivered WH 53 02 10 2010 Pe ei ID In Proc 43 06 29 2009 ee a 7 x Add Edit Delete Filter Actions IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY 2 Inthe dialog box click the Import CSV button Data Import Warehouse Receipt List Shipper Consignee Import CS Import eSh
218. e Receiving jal Used RET Recewing fal Used RE Receiving ml Used REC UPAR Fia Aeceving a Used R3 Export Storage lal Used Rz Storage fal Used F1 Choose Columns State If you receive an item that is defined as having variable weight then weigh the items and add the total For example if you receive 10 boxes of one item such as chicken and all 10 weigh 100 pounds together enter 100 pounds Releasing variable weight items is explained in the Cargo Release chapter Identification Tab On the Identification tab enter information in the fields as needed For example you can select or add a commodity description such as Electronics or Perishable Click the dropdown menu to select a description or click the 292 COMMODITIES IDENTIFICATION TAB plus sign in the submenu to add a new description This Commodity definition is used to classify items for pricing and for rates and tariffs Commodity a Identification ST TERT Definition Commodity Description Code Identification Electronics 210730 serial Freight All Kinds b FAK kuare tomber Hazardous Materials HAZMAT Perishable PERISHABLE P O Number dt a x To E ra Add descriptions Commodity Definition Commodity Identification Lot Humber Job c sa gt Came in Expiration Expires On D 7 24 2013 Serial Numbers 293 COMMODITIES IDENTIFICATION TAB When receiving items with seria
219. e perform the following steps NOTE When updating to a new version familiarize yourself with the new features especially new permissions and roles because these may change how employees access functions New features are announced in the newsletter and on Magaya com CAUTION Follow these steps in this order 1 Ensure all users are logged off the Magaya system 2 Backup your data via the Magaya Database Server Agent For details on backing up data see the Magaya Software Customization Manual 27 UPDATE MAGAYA SOFTWARE 3 Stop the Magaya Communication Server Agent by right clicking on the icon in the taskbar and selecting Stop Communication Server Then right click again and select Exit Reload Configure Monitor Login Logout Start Communication Server Change Password Abouk F k S mj eee 4 Right click on the Magaya Database Server Agent icon and select Stop Database Server Then right click again and select Exit 5 Go to the Magaya software installation folder and double click on the OnlineUpdate exe file to run the file This is the icon 6 The Online Update will update the Magaya Software files from Magaya s servers all modules must be closed fou need to be connected to the Internet to execute this process To begin press the Start button myo a File copy progress n Corph agara Cargo System atabaseUl exe Update progress food 0 Kb o
220. e the steps to install the software on a single computer and on a network a list of what components are installed steps for uninstalling and for updating the software System Requirements To install Magaya software each computer must have the following minimum hardware and software requirements 30 MB available on the hard drive 512 MB RAM memory 1 GB recommended As your database grows you will need more space Magaya software can be installed on any PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system or higher This includes e Windows XP e Windows Vista e Windows Server 2003 e Windows Server 2008 64 bit and Windows 7 operating systems For a network installation a minimum of 1 GB of memory is required for the server 2 GB is recommended The following port needs to be enabled Port 6110 TCP for the database server 21 INSTALL MAGAYA SOFTWARE STEPS TO INSTALL ON A SINGLE COMPUTER OR SERVER Install Magaya Software Steps to Install on a Single Computer or Server 22 To install Magaya software first download the installation program and then install the software from that downloaded program The software can be installed for a single user or installed on a network that connects many users The steps for installing any Magaya software on a single computer or a server are the same whether the installation is done on a PC a laptop or a server in a corporate headquarters or at a web hosting lo
221. e Equipment Users can select the mobile equipment to use such as a fork lift or cart For more details on mobile equipment see Chapter 7 of the Magaya WMS User Manual When tasks are pending the quantity of tasks will be displayed under the func tion name The list of items will display the item description by default To view the items by part number or tracking number tap on the column heading and select the option 161 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE SCANNER SIGNAL Tap on or select the Description column header to access a sub menu where you can select how you want to view the details Warehouse receipt Receipt Mo WH 71 Description Part Number Tracking Mumber Columns Lines Bleee E0 Scanner Signal The scanner signal symbol appears in the top corner of the screen indicating the scanner function is available from that screen Wa rehouse receipt on the screen you can use the scanning function of the handheld for this step Receive items Emh Em Emh Em 162 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE SCANNER SIGNAL If the barcode scan signal has a red x on it run the Diagnostic tool 163 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE SCANNER SIGNAL 164 CHAPTER 7 SET UP YOUR WAREHOUSE Chapter 7 Set Up Your Warehouse This chapter explains how to e Import Existing Inventory Data Define Inventory Items o Set up Warehouse Zones and Locations e Define Package Types Work with Co
222. e Magaya Software Customization user manual The Magaya Document Designer can also be opened from your computer s Start menu by navigating to the program in the Magaya folder 117 118 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS PRINT LABELS This label shows the WR number YOUR COMPANY NANE OR LOGO HERE 8 25 WW 18th Terrace Miami FL 33172 UNITED STATES YOUR CONSIGNEE HER HAREHGUSE SECEIPT NUMBER 678 2075 22 DESCAIPTIOH lt Ix 7 i VCRs DIMENSIONS ART MUMBER Susain NOTES Magaya Cargo Systex www Magaya con WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS PRINT LABELS This label is for a Cargo Release MAGAYA DEMO 6725 NW 18TH TERRACE SUITE 205 AIARI FL 33172 UNITED STATES TANPA AIRLINES SA SEE ALSO TRANSPORT OVAIR AGENT OVERSEAS MASTER AIR WAT BILL NUMBER AIR HAT BILL AUABER 135 43587025 LAOL UANAIII BS BS 5 ite we TPIP Tracking Nusber SyetesI0 Warehoues Fecoipt Ties tO i 1 l I J l i 1 6 3678 NL 205 E an e e ee ee ee o ME EO OO NOTES ONE BOX OPEN SEE PICTURE Magaya Cargo System www hlagaya com 119 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS PRINT LABELS 120 To email a document click on the Email button on the toolbar across the top of the Magaya Explorer interface See the topic Batch Email The Options button enables you to print only the fields of a form or document and the optio
223. e Magaya Supply Chain Solution The handhelds can be used for every step of the process of receiving cargo moving items in a warehouse sending items out and more The keypad stylus and appearance of the application on the display screen may vary depending on the model you purchase Consult your manufacturer s docu mentation for any questions about the hardware The screenshots in Magaya documentation illustrate the application on a Motorola handset For a list of compatible hardware see the Magaya com webpage for WMS Mobile 155 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW OF THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INTERFACE For details on setting up the wireless infrastructure and performing initial inventory setup see the chapter WMS Mobile Setup in the Magaya WMS Operations Manual Overview of the Magaya WMS Mobile Interface Turn on the handheld device and access the Magaya WMS application The first screen is the login screen Magaya WMS Mobile Please enter your user name and password to log into the system sername wMSUser Password Select the user from the User name field and enter the password for that user Click the OK button to log in If you have more than one warehouse and have assigned users to those ware houses then this screen will have a button Warehouses to click and select the warehouse 156 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW OF THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INTERFACE If you have as
224. e are four types of charges two income and two expenses An Income Charge can be a flat fee or depend only on measurements of items used to invoice a customer e An Income Freight Charge This price depends on origin destination mode transportation packaging and measurements of items used to invoice a customer e An Expense Charge can be a flat fee or depend only on measurements of items used to pay a vendor e Expense Freight Charge depends on origin destination mode transporta tion packaging and measurements of items used to pay a vendor The Charges tabs in different transactions may look a little different from each other Some of the buttons may be in different places but they have the same features in each of the transactions CHARGES REPACKING CARGO For example take a look at the Charges tab in a Warehouse Receipt WR Warchouse Receipt Status Description Prep Quanbhy 9 Open Handing Fee Tes Click ta senerate Charges Totals JA Esperta Income Pralik USD 0 00 USD 7786 06 USD 7786 06 x The Add Edit and Delete buttons are on the right side The Generate button will generate the charges and create applicable accounting transactions such as invoices and bills After they are generated the charges will have a status of Posted For more information see the section Generate Accounting Transactions from a WR Total expenses income and profit are displayed on the botto
225. e locations stocked with inventory to avoid downtime Definitions can include locations for fragile items or heavy items and you can also define which part numbers will go in which locations While these recommendations can be overridden by the handheld user depending on circumstances these definitions are designed to improve the processes After defining the locations the definitions can be assigned to locations individ ually or in bulk The locations can be organized into a sequence to improve the workflow processes of picking and putting away items The Location Definitions work together with the WMS Configuration of Directed Operations and with the WMS Mobile Tasks If you have multiple warehouses you can define the locations and sequences for each warehouse and assign users to each warehouse 209 LOCATION DEFINITIONS STEPS TO DEFINE LOCATIONS Steps to Define Locations 1 Goto Warehouse gt Locations gt Actions gt Location Definitions Locations 210 2 Locations Status Code Description Empty Type jal Used REC ard Recenving Area Miami Ho Recel O Empty T High Cube Truck 1 Yeg Mobile E Used STAGE Staging Area Roe p Hit CI Empty SHIP1 Shipping Are pi ml Empty RFT Refrigerated View Items pile fal Used RECE ene A d m Used RELA Recewing Ar ss El fal Heed Aa Back 2 Assign sme aida l e Re Rack 2 Warehouse ones E Used R Rack 1 ac fil Used OCE Quality Contr A ete een oc lit z U
226. e receipts and cargo releases e Give customers price quotes for the services you provide such as picking up cargo storing it in a warehouse and shipping cargo Perform accounting tasks such as create invoices and bills perform banking tasks and create financial reports e Communicate with other companies in the Magaya Network The Magaya Explorer offers an easy way to get all your tasks done Because there are so many capabilities this topic will focus on the basics first As you learn about the menus and toolbars click around to see the software in action Start exploring the Magaya Explorer MENUS AND TOOLBARS TOP TOOLBAR Menus and Toolbars Top Toolbar The Magaya Explorer window contains toolbars menus folders and different panes The toolbar across the top contains the following buttons The buttons on the toolbars vary depending which Magaya software product you have O08 6 g b 8 46 A G Q Back Pickup Pleceive Release Print Fired Metak EMal Task Refresh Folders Back and Forward buttons to navigate from one document to another Pickup This button creates a Pickup Order Receive This button creates Warehouse Receipts Release This button creates Cargo Releases Find button Gives you the option to search by transaction number with the Quick Find feature or to search by any text in a document See the topic Find Button Magaya Network Accounting Reports Options Help
227. e removed and the status updated Import or export data from the Quotation list You can import informa tion into Magaya Explorer or export data out in XML PDF or CSV formats A dialog box opens with options To choose a different template for the document select the option Select Template this option is only available from the document view For example the template Quotation with Taxes is used to display the taxes for each charge You can also print print a batch copy or email a Quotation ACTIONS FOR QUOTATIONS STEPS Filter the Quotation List The Filter button allows you to select how you want to view the information in a list For example you may want to see only transactions for the past week or transactions for a certain customer or destination The Filter button has two options Standard and Advanced For details on using the Advanced Filter see the topic Filters 509 ACTIONS FOR QUOTATIONS QUERY RATES Query Rates To access the Query Rates function click the Actions button in the Quotation document view or list view The Query Selling Rates dialog box opens 1 2 510 Freight Serice Class ial Query Selling Rates Customer Query Date Method Optional Origin Destinator Other Changes Select _ Cunency USO United States Dollar Cargo Infomation Pieces Contsiretized Weight Vohume Paurd lb Commodi Typ Cubic footiif Prica m USD Densipia
228. e serial numbers as you scan them The numbers can also be entered manually in the Commodity dialog box on the Identification tab Serial numbers can be displayed in LiveTrack grouped together for your customers to see ID by Magaya Receiving Label Items can be identified by printing a Magaya receiving label with a Magaya identification number on it This number contains your Magaya Network ID number the Warehouse Receipt WR number and the line item in the WR for that item whether it is the first item listed the second etc Print this label from theWR document view by clicking on the arrow on the side of the Print button and selecting Print Labels 239 ID BY MAGAYA RECEIVING LABEL The image below is a WR label The Magaya identification number appears under the bar code which consists of the system ID 3678 the WR number 2075 and the line number for this item 2 in hexadecimal format YOUR COMPANY NANE OR LOGO HERE 9 29 NW 18th Terrace Miami FL 33172 UNITED STATES COUSIGMEE ITEN ID i ISDE E PERE WRAEROUGE n EIPFT HUMER LOCATION TOTAL PIECES Sve ientO Haraha housun Moced Fi i jini E Hi Wt iii 3678 2075 22 arn O Tie a tnt DIMENSIONS PART MUMBER AGEL SERIAL HUMBER SNSNGLN i NOTES Magaya Cargo Systea WwW Magaya con Using Magaya labels is useful for regular cargo items that do not have a part number If a customer p
229. e such as refrigerated or bonded commodity type and other criteria Invoices can be automated to recur on a regular basis Locations can be defined for Receiving e Storage DIRECTED OPERATIONS o Replenishment to keep locations stocked with items Picking to fill individual orders or batches of orders Quality Control QA e Shipping Release e Mobile forklifts carts etc Directed Operations Directed Operations is a phrase for all the procedures that make a smart ware house This type of warehouse is used for not just receiving storing and ship ping cargo it also replenishes orders has directed i e guided put away and picking sequences that optimize warehouse space and employee time Magaya software includes features that help these types of warehouse busi nesses including 3PLs Distribution Centers DCs and others Procedures include Location Definitions Warehouse Zone Definitions Sequencing to Put Away and Pick Items and the Tasks for WMS Mobile on handheld scanners e Replenishment Including configuring your Magaya system and defining minimum quantities to create automated replenishment tasks for WMS Mobile on handheld scanners For more details see the topic Directed Operations Getting Started in the Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search directed_operations_getting_started Accounting Integrated All accounting procedures are included in Magaya WMS
230. ear Select the Origin from the dropdown menu Domestic Foreign or Mili tary Required Enter the Export code Click on the button to search Frequently used codes are OS for General Export and HH for Household Goods If you are shipping a vehicle click the checkbox for Is Vehicle Click the Vehicle button and enter the information about the vehicle Click OK to save it and return to the EEI tab If you have the VIN Decoder plug in you can save time entering data by using the Vehicle choice on the pop up menu when you first add a commodity to the WR or other transaction This option will not appear if you do not have the plug in Supplier Carrier Commodities Charges Events Attachments Add vehicle Description Pieces Length in Height ir Toyota Tundra 233 66 93 02 aa If you want the vehicle information included in the EEI check the box Include in EEP The VIN displays inthe Commodity dialog box title bar and on the WR document NOTE Correct filing of EEI is required to avoid violations and fines When you send your shipment and EFI information you will receive an Internal Transaction Number ITN which is proof of filing If you receive an error while filing contact U S Customs Border and Patrol www CBP gov 299 COMMODITIES HAZARDOUS MATERIALS TAB Hazardous Materials Tab On the Hazardous tab
231. ed Operations WMS Mobile Units Operations settings Warehouse Equipment feds ae General Receiving WETS Mobile Users o l l Receiving operation settings Counts Numbers V Enforce default receiving location Operations Settings P F Only use For WS Mobile Enable initial inventory For I Skip entities C Create pallets outside Wa Confirm item creation E C Verify items after batch pii Frompt properties when new item is created S E Allow empty pallets Default to item creation without code How these settings affect operations is explained in the following steps 357 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING To receive cargo using the Manual Uniformed Receiving process follow these steps 1 Click the Manual Receive icon on the main menu of the handheld Magaya WMS Mobile 9 Gs Gur 7 06 k Magaya 5 2 5618 275113 tt Warehouse Management System a E amp Receve tli Put Away Move 1 A ial Piele 1 Messages Manual 4 Receive E FG Manual anual Put Guided Put 2 Inthe next screen scan the location where you will receive the cargo unless a Default Receiving Location was configured then you will not see this screen skip to Step 3 Select the location ay Enter the location where you are going to receive the carga Location RECOL For example this cargo will go
232. ee eee 241 ID by Magaya shipping Wabel sevc ss c4weisivet sadeh te tee eaew tan iek ae ts 241 Chapter 9 Pickup Orders i233 5 6 ows ciorl ic a Sel ee Sa ol eee Gees ee ON eee cae 243 LATOdUCHONE ses ee denote wh ceo ie yes da ld Ps BE Rw 243 Pick Up Cargo Create a Pickup Order 0 0 0 0 0c cee eee eee 244 Coe r AO E cha eek ob du hse eo E a ob idee Santee eens Se a Oe 245 SOIP Er LAD netven seer ee eee er ees eae eee en eee eee dete s 247 Comen e balls4 anara tee laut Se ee are Paes ee eos 250 SUPPE LAW i 4 os auto dees Hann oi 2 Gea eed Gace 4 phe As eee 8 252 Ca e Ee 6 ee E ene Oe eae ee rene ee a 252 COmimodiies VAD cx citing cos ane e Mckee led oom GRA G Sees Mask Gites Oe 254 Charges TaD rae hea Ee en rr eR Ser oa a ar a an A 261 EV CHS 2A0 s 4 404 mah t de awe ened s aba eee avec aba eebe award 262 AHA amens 1 aD 34464 ceneus eee bhe eae eh RAS ee one ee Shes Kae 264 Delo aera reg me a em Ea a Eg re gre ee 264 INGICS EAD senera tre saute hey BE Lo whee ee dia head Poe Rae Ole eed 266 Atenas NOLES Wl AIO x 620s oe ears ea eee arate on ad ee eae acne ee eee ee 267 What Actions can I Perform with a Pickup Order 0004 268 Print EaD IS aaa ae ee ane eee ae ae eee ee a ee a ee ee ee 269 Actions Button for Pickup Ordets 3 42o44 400 45 2e0etbesausewagiduswa bed 271 Generate Accounting Transactions from Pickup Orders 273 Chapter 10 Receiving Caro sorscrrrseroore t ean ea ace neaeee S 2
233. eed two employees using handhelds you may select the MC3090 in this case you need to add 2 x 1300 total 2600 Your hardware cost should be 4400 Remember this does not include hardware installation cost which depends on the installed infrastructure of your facility and the number of access points you need to install This pricing data is current as of the publication date of this documentation Consult with your vendor for exact pricing 36 INITIAL INVENTORY SETUP ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE Initial Inventory Setup on Magaya WMS Mobile To set up the inventory in the warehouse you must assign a location to every item by scanning the barcodes for items and their locations This process is only done once To enable the Initial Inventory function on the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld devices go to the Maintenance folder of Magaya Explorer WMS General Inventory Adjustment WETS Mobile Directed Operations WS Mobile Units Used to configure the measurement units For the WMS Mobile users Warehouse Equipment Used to configure the type of equipment used by the warehouse oer sori WES Mobile Users Used to configure the permissions printer configuration etc of the Bo Ei MS Mobile users Counts Numbers Used to configure the generation of numbers For count sessions Qperations Settings Used to configure the behavior of the operations in the WS Mobile Create pallets outside Warehouse Receipts in WMS Mob
234. ehicle option opens a dialog box so you can search by Vehicle Iden tification Number VIN The system will find VINs when you enter the last six digits of the VIN Please enter the VIN number of the vehicle Any VIN in your Magaya system can be made available to find online in Live Track for your customers 134 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE ACTIONS BUTTON The Find Folder option opens a search box with a General tab and an Advanced tab You can search for an air waybill number on the Advanced tab General Advanced Match Case General Advanced Find a shipment Air shipment Ocean shipment Ground shipment The Actions Button The Actions button is available in the Magaya Explorer when you view lists or documents The Actions button provides many functions Depending on the list or document you are viewing you will have different actions available Common functions available from the Actions button To run or create reports on a list such as the Warehouse Receipts List click on the Actions button and go to Reports Select the report type from the menu Options include creating a report by shipper by consignee by supplier etc The report can be saved emailed or exported Tip In the report double click on an item to display the dialog box for that item Reports can be filtered and also 135 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS
235. elds gt Selected Field or Filtes Name Type re Code Test rai casi Text Description Text fides ee Quantity 1 Text Contains ka Quantity 2 Text Used Bool an a WA Al conditions AND Click on the field you want to use in your filter by selecting it from the list of Available Fields on the left For example Description Set the condition you want to apply Tip Select Contains so you can enter a keyword or partial commodity classification If you select Equals you must enter the whole commodity classification If not the filter will not find it e Enter the description keyword in the field next to the condition drop down e Add any additional conditions as needed Click OK to see the filtered list The filter applied in the Commodity Classifications list will remain active until you clear it as it will for any list The counter at the bottom of the screen tells you how many items are displayed out of a total possible The filtered list will also display when you view cargo on the EEP tab inside the Commodities tab 200 COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS ACTIONS WITH COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS LIST of a Warehouse Receipt or Pickup Order You can change the filter by clicking on the Browse button to open the list General Shipper Consignee Supplier Carrier Commodities Charges Events Attachments Me Status W Loade Bow Commodity
236. elease By llene Taylor 3 Fillin the information for Load task in the Task dialog box The screen is the same as explained in the Pick Task Step 3 except for selecting the type of task select Load WMS 498 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM THE LOAD TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE Perform the Load Task on the WMS Mobile Device Load tasks are for cargo that does not need repacking but is going directly out of the warehouse a Pick task is not issued in this case This will speed up the shipping process 1 Clickon the Load icon on the main screen of the WMS Mobile handheld device obile ae oe R Receive Move 2 Pick Load 1 Count 3 1 1 gt amp amp y Messa view Manual Manual Receive Move E 0 J Put Away Measure Exit 19020 WhiSUser Scanner Enabled Magaya WMS Mobile Emh Ga Ga Ga 2 Select the Load task to complete If there is more than one task click the Task tab to see them or scroll RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM THE LOAD TASK ON THE WMS MOBILE DEVICE through the tasks by clicking on the arrows on the bottom of the screen Task List Load WwMS3 1 of 1 7111 2012 Sent basn Administrator Number Client Ed s Crane Service From Jail A L Q433 QCA Select Clase iB Tasks Ce ek 3 Scan the location to begin loading the items ee ALA Storage B 52 inch Rebar C mig Storage No cod
237. em in a batch Send a monthly recurrent invoice for storage e Send a marketing message to all your customers at once You can send batch emails from any transaction list You have the option to select a few entities such as customers or vendors or send to the whole list The WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS BATCH EMAIL emails will be sent to the entities involved in those transactions including their contacts 1 Goto the list you want to send batch emailing hold the Shift key and select multiple transactions or entities a Aving FPU 35 06 15 2011 Tropical Landscaping u 0n Hand FPU 34 06092011 ABC Sporting Goods Ine PU 33 1229 2010 Jamaican Destination 4gent PU s2 OF 0 2010 Orlando Garden Shop WP Delivered PU 31 0415 2010 Tropical Landscaping T Aving PU S0 O41 2 2010 Tropical Landscaping 2 Click on the arrow on the Email button and select Send Batch Email Options Help amp amp amp E Network Refresh Folders intact First Name Contact Last Name Send Document by Email F4 Other 0 wina Cabo Other O Other 0 an Pierre Chavanel Other T _Other U 125 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS BATCH EMAIL 3 Inthe dialog box that opens your company email address is automatically filled in E Send Batch EMail Your Company Name displays here subject Message for sys_recipient_n from sys_company_r subject Field BUW DEASB 2 4 arvr5 Body Field
238. emplate Expiration dates are often used with items that have lot numbers NCM Code The NCM code is the Harmonized Tariff Schedule code for inter national commerce in the South American common market Mercosul which includes Argentina Brazil Paraguay and Uruguay The NCM code has 8 digits the first 6 digits correspond to the HTS The NCM code can be viewed as a column in the WR dialog box on the Commodities tab in the Commodity List under the Warehousing folder and the Inventory Item Definition List or run as a report On the FFI tab select the Schedule B code The EEI is required for export ship ments valued over 2 500 if any one item has a value of 2 500 or more or if the total value is over 2 500 Schedule B codes are commodity classifications used by US Customs to control exported goods The codes are updated in your Magaya system via a Web service To manually check for updates go to the Commodity Classifications list COMMODITIES EEI TAB in the Warehousing folder click Actions gt Update To learn more about Schedule B codes see the Commodity Classifications topic Commodity General Identification EEI Hazardous Notes Ata 4 Include in EEI 4 EEI Schedule E coef e x tc tCS Measurement Quant 13 Guye Value 0 License Type ECCN License Number Origin State of origin x Export Code El leVehicle Vehicle Military Check the box to include
239. en in your software 30 Next Steps CONTACT MAGAYA HELP NEXT STEPS Click the Help menu in the top toolbar of your software to access resources such as videos user manuals the Knowledgebase and more Accounting Reports Options Help i X Help Topics PP D P Print Find Video Tutorials a User Manuals Fram 4 8 015 1 Frequently Asked Questions Tell a Friend shipper Lc Contact Magaya Corporation Larner O15 Orlando Gardens Ja Magaya Horne Page O15 HL Cargo Comp Fr 014 seoed af e Knowledge Base FedEx 014 Orlando Garden 5 Tr AE ar olen 014 AutoLite Automotive E UFS Gr U4 Bell Helmets Biscayne Bike Tips and suggestions are available in Magaya software on dialog boxes and other locations in the software program Click on the Magaya Tip button to access resources such as how to articles and videos It is recommended to leave this on but if you want to turn it off go to the Maintenance folder gt Configuration gt General This user manual and others are available from the Magaya website www magaya com Learning Center page Video tutorials are on www magaya com and on YouTube com If you have any questions or require assistance please contact Magaya at Phone 786 845 9150 Email support magaya com You can request Tech Support from Page One and check that status of an existing support case To get started using the software you can begin creating transactions or enter
240. en with the dimensions etc Uncheck this if you want the user to skip the screen Check Allow empty pallets if you want to allow the user to create a pallet but not place any items in the pallet Note To change any of these WMS Mobile Configuration settings ensure users are not logged into the handhelds Check the other checkboxes as applicable to your business Enable initial inventory for WMS Mobile users only for Magaya Cargo System users moving to Magaya WMS This will be done when first transitioning from the Magaya Cargo System to Magaya WMS You will scan each item and its location so it is in your WMS When done you can delete this checkbox to remove this task from the handhelds Create pallets outside Warehouse Receipts WR in WMS Mobile Manual Receive This gives the handheld user flexibility to create pallets that are not assigned to a WR when manually receiving items This pallet will show in the Warehouse Inspector view but not in the WR CONFIGURE WMS DIRECTED OPERATIONS CONFIGURATION Verify items after batch pick If you want the system to verify items after picking check this box Click the Save to save your settings or click Reset to return to the defaults Directed Operations Configuration The Directed Operations tab enables you to set up functions such as inventory replenishment and put away WMS General Inventory Adjustment WMS Mobile Directed Operations Replenishment Enable inventor
241. endors as needed Click the Next button for each 65 PERMISSIONS PERMISSIONS INTRODUCTION screen For more details see the Magaya Software Accounting Manual on www magaya com 7 _ Click the Finish button when you are done Your information will be saved AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK When you have completed all the screens in the Accounting Wizard you can modify and add to the accounting details at any time by opening the Accounting folder or by returning to the Accounting Wizard via File gt Accounting Wizard Permissions Permissions Introduction 66 Administrators can assign permissions to employees in your company based on the employee s job or role For example you may want to give the Accounts Receivable AR clerk access to certain billing functions allow a warehouse employee access to other functions or limit access to certain functions such as accounting for certain employees who do not handle accounting in their job role Overview of Permissions Available In the Permissions dialog box is a table of cells that enables you to restrict access according to the following Create Allows a user to create but not modify or edit a transaction o Read a user can read only or view but not make changes to files Edit a user can edit files e Delete a user can delete files e Export Allow a user to export files out of the Magaya system including the ability to email data from the system this does no
242. ent they will be using This is an optional checkbox When a task is created for this user the system will know their location so the user will not be required to enter it each time If you check this box the permissions for this user will be affected by the equipment assigned to that employee e Select English or Spanish as the language for the WMS program e To change permissions fora WMS Mobile User uncheck the box for the types of tasks you want to remove permission for this user to perform The system default turns on all the tasks Permissions will be overridden if you check the box to Ask for user identification location equipment For example if a piece of equipment is not used in Receiving tasks then the user who has that equipment assigned to them will not be able to do Receiving tasks on their handheld even if it is checked here If you do not check that box the Permissions here will not be affected by equipment assignments To set up the Printer configuration for labels or for Packing Slips the set up must be done from your company s server or computer server the one running the Magaya Communication Server Counts Numbers Click on this button to open a dialog box to enter the number you want to begin inventory count sessions with You can also add a Prefix or a Suffix if needed Document Number Humber Format Prefix Cancel S uffi Help Start number at The created numbers have the following Format
243. entory Adjustment Vendor This account records the Bill that is created during adjustments The total will be zero Inventory Adjustment Client This account records the Invoice created during the adjustments process The total will be zero Define the maximum number of charges per inventory adjustment transaction Check this box to limit the number of charges per Bill For example limit it to 10 charges per Bill The system will create a new Bill for every 10 charges Start inventory adjustment wizard when count session is closed Check this box if you want the system to automatically start the wizard at the end of a Count Session that resulted in Found or Lost items being discovered Save the settings CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY CREATE A COUNT SESSION AND COUNT TASKS Create a Count Session and Count Tasks 1 2 Ss ml Move Find Location Go to the Warehousing folder in Magaya Explorer and click on the Ware house Inspector E i Warehousing Ep Pickup Orders i Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List Me Cargo Releases AE Cargo Release List Cargo Movements Cargo Movement List ie Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector all Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications Click on the arrow on the side of the Counts button and select Create Count Task from the menu Warehouse details E Yard Zone B E one A fay
244. er Commodities Charges Events Attachments Note Camier Anderson amp Some Muckrg Lo Diver s Name Dres Licence Mumbar Lenny PRO Number Tracking Number 7134 Enter information in the other fields as needed They are optional The PRO Number is an inland carrier s bill of lading number also called a progressive number The driver s name may be useful if any cargo is damaged or missing Commodities Introduction to Commodities The word Commodities means different types of items such as cargo inven tory items you sell or store for your customers vehicles or other types of items They can be added to many transactions in Magaya software such as Quota tions Warehouse Receipts Pickup Orders Cargo Releases and shipments Depending on which Magaya software you have commodities can be added to additional transactions such as Bookings Sales Orders and Purchase Orders This topic explains the process of adding commodities by showing it in a Ware house Receipt We ll look at the different tabs in the Commodity dialog box and the fields in each tab We ll also learn about serial numbers lot numbers adding 286 COMMODITIES INTRODUCTION TO COMMODITIES hazardous materials details containers photographs how to scan barcodes and repack cargo The Commodities tab looks different for different transactions but the func tions are the same For example the Cargo Release and Quotations Commodi tie
245. er 123 00 7 Part Number 123 123 6 10 30 2015 Choose columns Choose Item Definitions columns for tems Choose Items columns Configure The option to load by Lot Numbers is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and Magaya WMS It can only be used for items that are On Hand Warehouse Inventory Lot Humber rrr my w 125848 Wheelbarrow 52 EO P AC2 Perishable Vaccine Type 2 3 BO mm amp K 99504 WH 11 Penshable Vaccine Type 2 12 0087 0 0024 00in H O T25 Tile Saltillo 75 H O T30 Tile Porcelain 75 Click Locations to load cargo from locations in the warehouse WMS only To select all the items in one location select the location and click Mark All All items in that Location are available to be selected except those in Pending Tasks or On Hold warehouse Inventor Locations Scan ES Default Zone fE F1 0 3 Lettuce 20 00220 00 10 00in 20 T 3 Bell Peppers 15 00510 0057 00n 12 fi R1 460 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE Click PO to include items from Purchase Orders or click SO to select items from Sales Orders Note available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution Click the Scan option if using a scanner to scan the bar codes on the packages Note The bar codes are the ones created when you received the cargo and pr
246. erify if a filter is active by clicking on the Filter button To unfilter click the Unfilter button Also the counter on the 128 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS ADVANCED FILTER bottom of the list tells you how many items are displayed out of a total number of items The Filter button is not the same as the Find button It will not search the way the Find button will Advanced Filter The Advanced Filter screen has a list of Available Fields on the left Conditions on the top and results of the Condition s you apply on the bottom Advanced Filter Awcilsble Feld Ha F S latiad Feld or Filer O Ere td Attachments Yes No Balance USD Decimal Conkition Bing Chere T Egua w H 7 Bonded WH type Ted CFS Humba Teel Came T d O Chargeable Weaght b Dicini Fiter Change to OR Agd SND _ Ade OF gt ee Detephon as A AN cond AND O Consignee Adder Tae Customs Erry Oaa Daba D Date Cate Deina Agert eel Destination Agert Address Tenet Destination Court Taa a Chestmstion Fort Td Dineen Tga The list of Available Fields changes based on the transaction you are filtering For example the available fields in the Pickup Orders advanced filter include Delivery Date Pickup Address Driver s Name and more Many of the same fields are available in all the advanced filters such as carrier date etc The Avail able Fields are listed in alphabetical order The Available Fields also
247. ers Vendors Salespersons Contacts RB Employees 4 Ports wh Countries Configuration PO GRO BS it When you add information into the dialog boxes of this folder many of the tabs are similar from one entity to another For example on the General tab there is a lookup button next to the entity name field Click this to see if the entity was already entered in the database so you can avoid duplicate entries Note The term entity refers to customers vendors carriers and others entered into your Magaya system Forwarding Agent General Address Billing Address Other Addresses Contacts Participation Agent Rates Name European Consolidators g Entity ID Venfy existence Phone The Entity ID field is usually an internal number that you might use if you need to give a customer or entity a unique number to help identify it This is espe cially useful for couriers who may have customers with the same name Any entity can be made inactive by checking the Inactive box in their profile this does not delete them but saves their profile if you want to use it later The Account number is often used by air carriers and it functions like a customer number Learn more about setting up customer account numbers in the Configuration menu gt Customer Setup Also please see the Configuration chapter in the Magaya Software Customization Manual The Contact name fields first name and last name are
248. es BOCA QualityCo Liners for juice s ee eke lel 500 4 5 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES PERFORM THE LOAD TASK ON THE WMS MoBILE DEVICE Scan the items to load them You can also click on the item and the Quan tity button and manually enter the quantity instead of scanning each item Items scanned loaded will have a checkmark on the item icon For items scanned you can click the Move button to move the items You can also scan all the items first and then click the Move button to move them all at once When you click the Move button scan or enter the location where the items are going See Pick Task Step 6 above for details Click the Finish button when done The system will save the task If you click Finish when items still remain to be loaded the system will ask you if you want to finish If you click Yes the system will clear the Load task from the main menu To temporarily close an incomplete task and return to complete it later click the Cancel button All scanned items are saved Set Cargo Status to In Transit After the Load task is finished the status of the items is Loaded To set the items and the transaction as In Transit when the items depart the ware house go to the PC open the originating Cargo Release and click on the arrow on the side of the Action button Select Set Reset In Transit from the menu 501 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS
249. es Internal Notes Account Accounts Payable Transaction Date 12710 2012 we Cha rges Accounts Status Description Quantity Price Amount amp Faid Trowel Cost 20 00 4 00 ol 010 Q Faid Wheelbarrow C 50 00 155 00 YF 50 00 Paid Tree staking twi 30 00 35 00 1 050 00 Faid Patting sail Lost 30 00 a 00 240 00 Click the Accounts tab to view the inventory adjustment amount which is negative MS Accounting Transaction Bill Adjustments Events Attachments Motes Number Account Accounts Payable Transaction Date 12710 2013 Ww Adjustments Account Charges Account Name Amount Description Inventor Adjustment 80 00 Inventor Adjustment rr o0 00 Inventory Adjustment 1 050 00 lnventor Adjustment 240 00 451 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT The Found items will increase in Inventory Adjustment Account as displayed in the Balance Sheet access via the Chart of Accounts Actions button 452 CHAPTER 13 RELEASING CARGO INTRODUCTION Chapter 13 Releasing Cargo Introduction This chapter explains the process of releasing cargo from creating a Cargo Release on the PC to fulfilling Pick and Load tasks using the Magaya WMS Mobile application on handheld wireless devices A Cargo Release is the document created for in and out deliveries and any time you send cargo out of your warehouse for local delivery If you s
250. es based on the information entered in a Pickup Order 273 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM PICKUP ORDERS For example when charges are entered in the Charges tab the charges remain Open are not posted to the Accounting system until you click the Generate button or they are liquidated Then they are Posted Pickup Order General Shipper Consignee Supplier Carers Commodities Charges Events Attac Status Description Prepaid Guantity Price AMOU Add 5 Open Irland Freight Cost Yes 1 00 100 00 100 0 S Open Inland Freight Yes 1 00 200 00 200 0 Click to generate charges Totals a ee Generate Expense Income Protit USD 100 00 USO 200 00 USD 100 00 ox cones He _ After the charges are generated or liquidated the system will collect all the charges and group them and create invoices for each customer The charges that will go to bills are also grouped and bills are created for each vendor Then these are posted into the Accounting system Note Accounting charges cannot be generated if a Pickup Order has items used in a Warehouse Receipt or loaded into a shipment You can also create accounting transactions from the Pickup Order by listing all the transactions for that release To do this follow these steps 274 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM PICKUP ORDERS 1
251. ether there is a classification elsewhere into which the item will fit more specifically Other classifications under the same general heading should be examined NCM is the code for commodities in Brazil and other countries in South America Enter it on the Commodity dialog box on the Identification tab 197 COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS ACTIONS WITH COMMODITY CLASSIFICATIONS LIST These codes are required in shipments exported from the US The code must be on the EEI formerly SED All the codes are available on the EEI tab in Magaya Explorer when you enter commodities or add a container into a Warehouse Receipt Pickup Order or Shipment Commodity Hazardous AMS General E Include in EEI Schedule E Code Identification EEI External Trackir i k Browse Code Description Mm 9803200000 MILITARY EQUIPMENTS NOT IDENTIFIED O 3803100000 MILITARY WEARING APPAREL OF ALL Ty M 39802400000 ARTICLES DONATED FOR RELIEF OR CHE Select All ALL WEARING AFFAREL INCLUDING FOI O 3802200000 MEDICINAL amp PHARMACEUTICAL PRODUC O 3802100000 COMMINGLED FOOD PRODUCTS DONAT LJ 3801200000 INTERNATIONAL SHIPPING CONTAINERS O 9801100000 YALUE OF REPAIRS OF ALTERATIONS O M 3706000000 ANTIQUES OF AN AGE EXCEEDING ONE H LJ 9705000090 COLLECTIONS amp CLLCTAS PCS OF lt 00LC O 305000060 NUMISMATIC COLLECTORS COINS ECE O 3705000020 GOLD NUMISMATIC
252. ew Event 265 0 3 540 445 08eedeowicetinh a tbenteaededekew dees 321 Attachments samea iea Gh ar sd as Saas ea ca a pee a T aRS 323 Introduction to Attachments 0 0 0 cc eee ee eee eee nee 323 Add an Attachinent 2 ass gas Bo Bs 8 D0 eh oe lee ead tebe 324 Add Attachment from Scanner 0 0 0 cece eee eee ee ee eee 325 Notes anc Intemal Noles nerea wees Cheese eee eee eee ae eee 331 INO E ia bee eee ate Oe tant gets Sit a tk ets ee cee ue wea aes Be Bs he 331 Add Clauses to Use in Notes 25 5 osc 6 a sed cede a Sane eet a tek dS ee A 331 PIMPIN LIN Ole Se arare aa tester a nnactea coca Pte E E A A EEA face 333 What Actions can I Perform with a Warehouse Receipt 0005 334 Modic Ohanes 8 ee tals ee a wos ae ete ee ea oo 5k OR SR Ae 334 Generate Accounting Transactions froma WR 2 ees 334 Linking Transactions y 00 a4 eh ee dR Re PLA DAR ESR EERERSEREERE 336 OMME CLOTS ss 2 Stee Brassil vas eaten oe fs deed ates eter mentee a A os tee et eS 338 We CS Pane erre haaa an a ese cet a ad aoc ae be eae one oes aha eee a 343 Receive Cargo with Magaya WMS Mobile 0 000005 344 litormed RECEN Os ace oft ce Goes ihe WG Sed nn ANS Bebe RA oe hed aS Beans 345 Print WavelS 2s 2ctieea E ee E eh Pe ee ee oe E 355 Uninformed Receiving Manual Receiving 0 0 eee 357 Pallet eis 2 ods 2 hh e tuk Sob eles ea ht eb aa S are Be abe Goad 8 A 368 10d Pers 1S 0 oa aa a ae oT REN PORE OM EN a
253. f 67940 00 Kb Cancel 28 7 8 UPDATE MAGAYA SOFTWARE When the update is complete the Magaya Database and Magaya Commu nication services will start x i Magaya Communication Service Default x This service is now Running Connection Type Online through Gateway We 1 46PM Restart the computer or server to apply the update Then the update will be active on all the computers in your company that run Magaya software When the user logs in again the new version will run If you receive a message stating that you need to restart your server follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Click OK on the message notifying you that the Communication Server cannot connect to the Database It will run in the next step Click on the Magaya Cargo Explorer icon on your desktop Type Yes in the field that asks if the backup was done Now the Commu nication Server will be able to connect to your database Click on Start and go to All Programs gt Magaya Software gt Magaya Communication Server to manually start the Communication Server The server computer has now been updated to the latest version If you are running an older version of the software the system may alert you if you need the installation of the XML Click the OK button and the system will automatically perform the installation After that process computer is ready to use the latest version If y
254. f you need to find commodities in your Magaya system use the Find or Filter button in the Commodity List To view details about a commodity click the Detail button Save a view by clicking the star button at the top of the list 403 How TO FIND COMMODITIES IN MAGAYA EXPLORER USE THE FIND BUTTON You can also add columns to your Commodity List to make it easy to find infor mation at a glance Go to the Actions button and select Choose Columns For example to see if any items are on hold select this column from the list E Column Settings Name Type Description Text Pieces Integer Length fin Decimal Height in Decimal width fin Decimal Weight Ib Decimal Volume F Decimal Location Code Text 5 Dangerous Yes No 4 On Hold Yes No Use the Find Button TASK 1 Click the Find button on the top toolbar A search dialog box opens Find Type v From 12 1 2008 To 26 2009 Findby Transaction Number C Text Humber glove Resuke Type Hame Date Warehouse lhem Baceball glaves 12 06 2008 warehouse kem Baseball gloves 12 06 2008 Warehouse them Batting Gloves 12 15 2008 Warehouses hem Batting Gloves 12 15 2008 4 elements found 2 Inthe dropdown menu for Find Type select Cargo Item 3 Set the date range 4 Select to find by either transaction number or text 404 How To FIND COMMODITIES IN MAGAYA EXPLORER USE THE FILTER BUTTON 5 Enter
255. for the ventilation and temperature set up After you have entered the information needed click the OK button This returns you to the Pickup Order The charges entered in the Charges tab are integrated into the accounting system in the Magaya Explorer and will appear on invoices bills etc To add a charge click the Add button and select a charge type Remember the Client to Bill field on the Consignee tab If you set that field on the Consignee tab then that entity will automatically be filled into the Charges dialog box making it easier to create charges If you want to change the entity select another entity from the dropdown list a Pickup Order Attachments Po General Shipper Consignee Suppher Carriers Commodities Charges Events Status Description Prepaid Quanity Price Amount Apply to J Open Documentabon Yes 1 00 35 00 35 00 Electronics Depot Income Charge Income Freight Charge Expense Charge Expense Freight Charge a in F Totals Lruts Expense Income Profit 62 Eae USD 0 00 USO 3 00 USD 35 00 Cancel Hep 261 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER EVENTS TAB Since the mode of transportation is Ground the Income Freight Charge and the Expense Freight Charge will be Ground For local deliveries Inland Freight is often used If you have rates set up in your Magaya system and automated to appear in Pickup Orders they will appear on
256. form with a Warehouse Receipt Introduction There are many functions you can do with a Warehouse Receipt WR The information you enter in the WR can be transferred automatically into other documentation by using the Actions button The following section will explain how to generate accounting transactions and other actions that can be performed from a WR Generate Accounting Transactions from a WR Magaya Explorer gives you the ability to create accounting transactions such as invoices based on the information entered in transactions such as a WR It s recommended that you generate charges when you need them to be invoiced or billed i e when you need to collect that income for example before a Pickup or when the items are received E Warehouse Receipt am ee General Shipper Consignee Supp be Cana Commoadties Changes Events Attachments Note Status Description Prepaid Quantity Price Amount Adi Open Storage Fee Yes 1 00 0 00 B00 U E Open Repackmg Fee es 272 08 0 50 136 04 U 3 Open Inland Freight Cost Yes 1 00 68 00 68 00 U F fit Totals Urita Expense Ineo Pratit USO 66 00 USD 136 04 USD 68 04 Cancel Help 334 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM A WR The accounting department can create a bill or invoice inside the WR or via the Accounting folder and then link the bill or invoice see more about linking in the
257. g box will close The information you entered will be saved in the database and in the form you are working on such as an invoice or Pickup Order Add Button Use the Add button to add a new transaction of the selected type to the database When the Add button has an arrow then options are available When you click the Add button a dialog box opens Enter the information in the dialog box to fill in a form such as Pickup Order or Warehouse Receipt The Add button offers options that are specific to the list you are viewing For example in the Accounting folder the Add button for Payments offers the option to add a Customer Payment or a Vendor Refund The Add button for Cargo Releases will open a wizard with screens that walk you through entering the information to create a cargo release Edit Button This opens the same dialog box used when adding new information so you can edit or change information Exception The Cargo Release Edit button will open a dialog box not the wizard you used to enter information Delete Button Enables you to delete or cancel the selected transaction in your list For example if you delete a transaction such as a Cargo Release the items in that Cargo Release will be returned to your system and be available To view any deleted transaction go to Options gt View Transactions Log For more on the Transac tions Log see the Magaya Software Customization Manual 115 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIS
258. gaya LiveTrack with real time updates Let s look at the toolbar and buttons 374 WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR INTRODUCTION TO THE WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR The Warehouse Inspector screen displays the zones and locations in your ware house Expand a zone to see locations Expand a location to see items inside that location If you have more than one warehouse you can define it by using the Ware house Promotion wizard The icon will change as shown in this screenshot which shows icons for the Tuscon AZ WH and the Houston Warehouse in comparison to the other icons rey laj y Y ox H ap Ki Move Find Location Find Items Filter Unfilte Configure Delete Pallet Warehouse detalls Locations Show empty zones Tuscon AZ WH Package Description Miamt Warehouse Ses Miami ard Houston Warehouse ce Eas Mobile Locations H 0 Default Zone Clicking a zone to highlight it will open new tabs on the right side of the Ware house Inspector screen You can view the locations in the zone or click the Sequence tab to see the sequence for the locations H Tuscon AZ WH Current sequence Putman x 1 GE chaje A y aF 4 im Shader 1 ye aaah Shara Ciji Descripiian Ernpty Type Tare i SS Elud i Bark L ha Storage Houston Warehouse aon T ae meer El usad h hack Z Fin Tagja Hmon Jaehn SHB Cold Storage Zone Dud R3 Rack 3 No Shorage Houston Warehouse CHIP El used RECI Recing Ares ha Fecesing Hoton Warehouse a Elisedd QG Quatr Control Mo Gusty
259. gaya system depending if the items are lost or found From the Warehouse Receipts list For found resale items with a status of On Hand Criteria The items cannot be included in a Purchase Order or have a Bill associated with them e From the Inventory Item Definitions list to select resale inventory part numbers Inventory tem Definitions Inventory Item Definitions Part Humber Description ltem Type WEE Wilson Basketball Stock ltem x _ SG100 Other Reports d Stock Item AT S20 Reports P Stock ltem ATA SO Stock tem ATEO Stock ltem Al 444 Stock ltem RT4 Adjust Accounting for Inventory Kit Iter AT a3 ie Stock bern AT 100 Import Stock ltem A5 100 Export Stock ltem ABZ Stock ltem WCIDWEP Choose Columns Stock ltem PYACZ Stock ltem PAC Update quantity of pieces Chock ltem PT500 Peer Stock Item 446 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT e From the Cargo Release list For items that are lost damaged or stolen called Scrapped Cargo Release List Status Mumber Date Released to W Loaded Reports W In Transit Transaction Listing WD Delivered Go to document W Loaded Print Batch W Loaded Verity Packing List T Loaded Exclude From Tracking W In Transit Add to job a W Loaded Magaya Express Link wi Loaded W Delivered Set Reset In Transit wl Delvered J Delivered Create Picking Tasks al Delivered W In Transit Adjust Accounting For Scrappe
260. geable Aate Charge Total Amount Pieces Weight Ib YWolurne FF Ww eight Ib o owo om oo oo v usb ooo e Select the freight service class This will pull the type of freight from the Items and Services list in the Accounting folder o Enter a description optional Select who to apply the freight charge to such as the carrier for expense charges or apply to customer for income charges If the customer needed is not shown in the dropdown list use the button next to the dropdown to show all entities Ifyou want to customize the rates click the Rates button A dialog box will open for that carrier or customer Enter data and click OK to save the rate and return to this screen When you change how you apply the charge by weight pieces etc the totals across the bottom change The unshaded fields yellow will be multiplied automatically to calculate the total You only need to fill in the unshaded fields e Select if the charge is Prepaid or Collect Prepaid means the charge is paid or invoiced at origin Collect means the charge is paid at destination It is collected by the destination agent if you have one at the destination e Allow Automatic Update Check this option to allow changes made to the charge to be calculated automatically e Select the checkbox to show the charges in the documents if you want the charges to appear in operations documents such as WRs visible to the 317 CHARGES WORKING WI
261. h as Pickup Orders Warehouse Receipts and Cargo Releases If you have the Magaya Supply Chain Solution you will also see Tasks Jobs Purchase Orders and the Warehouse Inspector Maintenance Lists the same options that are under the Maintenance folder such as lists of your carriers and customers 89 MENUS AND TOOLBARS MAIN MENU Magaya Network This provides access to the Magaya Community you can also access the Magaya Community by using the Magaya Network folder on the left side of the Magaya Explorer You can also access your Inbox and Outbox the Communications Center also available by pressing the F4 key and the Send function Magaya Network Accounting Reports Magaya Community Outbox InBox Sent Communication Center F4 send To Accounting This displays the same list of subfolders that are also under the Accounting folder on the left side of the Magaya Explorer Reports Access financial reports sales and purchase reports multicur rency saved reports and more You can customize reports with fonts and more by clicking the Configure button in any report For information on accounting and financial related reports see the Magaya Software Accounting Manual Options Use this to display or hide the toolbar status bar folders or ship ments You can also Refresh your system view here or press the F5 key view your transactions log and access the Configuration options Hel i Views t
262. hange Erneta amp Employees aie Hiara Fiora Eiis Fes ccu Haria oma r Haea Coisc lactis Idnes biari rma Ipen IC 1 Test arpa Cija D T Opeatiers Sit Dij D 1B Operations Hanaga Dihi D E FOD Usl Tiha 0 be Take thes i E Operation Stet 1 Di il Accruntant Crha i I AP Cink Cite D BAA Chet Dije D T Epriaz Tiha j B Eprian1 Diha 0 Bh W shna Eph Diha E wiii ithe i T ha Dita fi j Adma Cites D E Detail Pamalt FRigieg a re Operations Manager Piste Desni Cae Dotan Sherrard dfo nks fu case Doan Sheet Configas Csgo inaubnne Comkgure Capi lnurance Dea Bhra Mange Tracking Uses iye eapi ho siie jaie baing _ 138 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS RESIZE WINDOWS AND PANELS Select different panels of details by clicking the dropdown Panels menu on the top of the list For example the Shipment List offers panel details such as Charges Events and more Panels AMS and ISF Results E 111 Attachments Charges Status Detailed Inventory h Events Open History 5 Upen House Listing 5 Open HTML Sirlinies Internal Notes Open Liquidation sads Lorp 5 Upen Ocean Carriers Messages code Corp 5 Open Profit and Loss stribution Ce Summarized Inventory Transaction Listing Transaction Listing for Consolidation Actions You can view the line item print or email it from this list Resize Windows and Panels Dialog boxes such as for
263. harges Prt Temes J Payment Terms Terms a Payment Terms The common type of payment is Prepaid r Incotenms Preferred Currency USD United States Dolla The Credit Limit is 0 00 USD ls Tax Exempt Parent Entity Invoice panodically Use Default T TS4 Compliance This entity ts a known shipper Known shipper expiration date M 17 22015 Manage Online Payment Accounts Payment Accounts tare Helo For more customer features see the Maintenance gt Configuration entry for Customer Setup which allows your customers to register directly from Magaya LiveTrack See the Magaya Software Customization Manual Charges Customize inventory prices for a customer on the Charges tab or automate any charge for that customer Unique account numbers can also be set up per customer For details on setting payment terms see Chapter 6 in the Magaya Software Accounting Manual Vendors Add vendor contact information and TSA compliance Examples of vendors would be an accountant insurance broker utilities you pay and other service providers Periodic billing for vendors can be set up on the Pmt Terms tab To customize charges for vendors go to the Charges tab this is the same 148 Salespersons MAINTENANCE FOLDER SALESPERSONS dialog box for customers Click the Add button and enter information in the Custom Charge dialog box Custom Charge Change Customs Broker Cost a Vendor Custom Broker 4
264. hat port for that transac tion Update Ports The latest Schedule K and D ports are updated regularly but you can update the list manually by opening the list from the Actions button Fram the Parts m STO Mm LIS Mm LIM Ma PTY my ON mi ATM M PHO J Add List Stockholm Lisboa Lima Fanama City Color Rotterdam Prr H arrr irt Reports Add Forts Schedule D Codes schedule K Codes fone Definitions Choose Columns P i Vv Y Edit Delete Filter E US OUTLY1 TAWAN RI TURES ANI SWEDEN PORTUGAL PERU PANAMA PANAMA NETHERLA NIGERIA 153 MAINTENANCE FOLDER COUNTRIES Then click Actions in that Schedule list to update The Magaya system connects to a Web service and retrieves the current port information so your system is updated Ho From the schedule foue hlo code list Import ALL UTHER MOZz4MBIQUE PORTS Choose Columns PORT LOUIS MAURITIUS mR All OTHER hi liAITIIS PORTS a hl a gt i ve aj un YP xf re Filte Actions Close Note Schedule D codes are U S ports Schedule K codes are outside the United States Countries Add country names states and codes Configuration The Configuration menu gives you access to options to customize your Magaya system such as setting up document numbers transaction tracking messaging formats add custom fields tasks divisions events and more The options in the Configuration menu are explained in the Magaya Software Cust
265. have a Type associated with them Text Date Yes No Integer and Decimal These Types are defined as follows e The Text type of field allows text to be entered Available Fields that accept text include Carrier and Shipper The text field is not case sensitive The Date field has a calendar for choosing the date and conditions such as On for on this date or On or Before for on or before this date There are many options for using the date field e The Yes No field type is used for questions that can be answered as Yes or No It uses logical or Boolean operators that help refine a search It is used to answer Yes No questions such as Has a shipment been liqui dated or Is it excluded from tracking If you use Equals then select Yes or No 129 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS ADVANCED FILTER 130 e The Integer field allows a number to be entered If you select the available field of Pieces you can enter a number an integer for the number of pieces Enter a whole number not a fraction Integer is often used for overstock pieces or pieces on hand The Decimal type allows a number with as many decimal point places as needed The Decimal field type can be used for weights values currency and more When you select an available field it is displayed in the Conditions section of the screen For example if you select Arrival Date the Conditions are the da
266. he Magaya Cargo System 0 0 ccc eee es 175 Create an Inventory Item Definition 0000 ee ees 178 Step Dy SEP Procedure 24 ca4nr Giese cad poukaka thoes caer a gad g 178 Inventory Item Definitions List 0 0 0 0 eens 183 Other Actions with Inventory Item Definitions 0004 187 Warehouse Zones and Locations Introduction 188 How does Magaya Explorer use Warehouse Zone and Location Information 189 How to Create Warehouse Zones 0 0 cc eens 190 Warehouse Zones OVErview s onc 5 odd dh oho keh oe ee 190 Steps to Created W aTCNOUSe ZONG lt 5 duct gah ao oe aia Ore E TE Reena 19 How to Create Warehouse Locations 0 000s 192 PCPS yaer eee Owes wee ean A Oe Ok Sea ee 193 Commodity Classifications HTS 0 0 eee ees 196 What are Commodity Classifications 2 0 0 0 0 ees 196 Actions with Commodity Classifications List 0 0 0 eee eee 198 PACK ACS LYP S arraien thay Wee Gia Gah ened WE Gog ew GO eh eed BE Gere 203 Introduction to Package Types 225 64 dita Sh eee a Dea Peetu 203 How to Customize a Package Type 0 ccc ens 204 MODE LOCION erinra bd be ae eae ee oa ee ace a eae 205 Creaic a Mootle LOcanOm oys 4s b4ec gears Gide beet aces ede eed 205 Location DenniiOns 5 s4 40 nbs i nI Ten an OLE Ba REE EPA SA 209 Introduction to Location Definitions 0 0 0 0 0c ccc eee 209 Steps to Define Locations 0 0 c
267. he WR e Magaya WMS Mobile Using the handhelds to receive cargo 277 RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT INTRODUCTION Receive Cargo Create a Warehouse Receipt Introduction 278 In Magaya software a dialog box helps you create a Warehouse Receipt WR document All the information you enter in the dialog box is converted into a WR document for you automatically Then you can edit print or email the document The dialog box is expandable and has a series of tabs across the top that you click on to enter information E Warehouse Receipt General Shipper Consignee Supplier Carrier Commodities AL i O In Process Humber WH 133 Date 4T re20 4 E Time 93 39 35 AM Employee Administrator Diiin lssued By Hil Cargo Company Destination Agent Bonded WH Type 7 Entry Humber Entry Date 117267201 E Click and drag to expand the dialog box F This example explains how to fill in the fields by starting at the General tab but you can enter information in any order Not all the fields are required The system will notify you of required fields You can change the information in any field by either typing in the field or by using the dropdown menu for the field RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE When you are finished click the OK button The dialog box will close and the information you have input will be saved and appear in the Warehouse Receipt d
268. he carrier who will pick up and deliver the cargo the location that the cargo will be delivered to applicable charges and the dimensions and description of the cargo When a customer calls you and asks you to pick up their cargo and bring it to your warehouse or to deliver it directly without going to your warehouse you will create a Pickup Order in your Magaya Explorer Pickup Orders are located under the Warehousing folder You can view the Pickup Orders as a list or in document form H A Magaya Network Hfi Tasks E3 w Cuokations a Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts E Warehouse Receipt List J Commodity List S Cargo Releases 8 Cargo Release List Cargo Movements EA Cargo Movement List ie Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector T Inventory Item Definitions Hij Commodity Classifications 243 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER INTRODUCTION The Pickup Order dialog box contains the following tabs Pickup Order General Shipper Consignee Supplier Carniers Commodities Changes Events Attachments PC O iming Humber PU 35 Creation Date 6 15 2011 Time 309 37 PM Pick Up Cargo Create a Pickup Order 244 There is more than one way to create a Pickup Order in your Magaya system depending on your business model For example you may give a customer a quote first Then you can convert that Quotation into a Pickup Order which transfers the information for you from one transaction t
269. he inventory list with the most recently received items at the top of the list Mark All will checkmark all the items in the view Unmark All unchecks all the checkmarked items Pieces is explained above Filter works similarly to any Filter button in Magaya software with Stan dard and Advanced options The filter you see differs when viewing the list of warehouse receipts locations or inventory This section explains the filters for the Cargo Release wizard For more details especially on the RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE Advanced Filter see the section The Filter Button in the topic Working with Document and List Views When viewing the list of Warehouse Receipts the Filter button Standard opens the Warehouse Receipts filter dialog box Warehouse Receipts Filter Filter Type Shipper Match all conditions 1 Match at least one condition Consignee Date From To Inland Carrier af 3 2015 af 3 2015 Supplier Number lssued by PU Humber Invoice Humber Destination Agent Status Warehouse x cany I Ocean or Ground Origin Foart 2 any gt Mode of Transport Destination Port Bonded WH Type Division Cancel Help 463 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE Inventory filters by the Item Definitions or the Items warehouse Inventory Locations Scan sea MLA HP 250 HP Lapt
270. hese permissions to children Delete Ho Ho Mo Mo Export No No We Accountants Mo Mo No Yeg iz 4 Click the cells in the table to set Yes or No permission to Create Read Edit Delete and Export 5 Click the checkbox Apply these permissions to children if you want to apply the permissions to all the subfolders under the folder you have selected 74 PERMISSIONS SET Up PASSWORDS FOR EMPLOYEES 6 Click the OK button to save the information and exit the dialog box Examples of System Functions Related to Permissions If an employee belongs to the Importers or Exporters group they will be able to use the Shipment Wizards on the main toolbar If an employee belongs to the Accountant group AR or AP group they will be able to liquidate cargo operations such as Cargo Releases and Shipments See also the sections on Roles to fine tune access to the system To quickly see what folders each employee has access to click the Detail button in the Employee list and then select Folder Permissions option from the dropdown menu Panels Folder Permission Glick to select panel l Ben Lipton Folder Read Edit Create Delete Export IE Page Une Tes No Ho Mo Mo ra Magaya Network es es es Yez Tes et Community Tes Yes Yes es Yes l Messages YEs Yez Yes Yes Yes amp Outbox Yes Yez Yes es Yes we ribo Yes Yes Yes es Yes T gt Sent Yes Yes Yes Yeg Yes
271. hip via truck across an international border use the Ground Shipment wizard which provides more options such as Customs documents The Cargo Release wizard in Magaya Explorer walks you through the process of creating a Cargo Release step by step Sections in this chapter include e Create a Cargo Release Generate accounting transactions from a Cargo Release e Verify the Packing List e Use the Magaya WMS Mobile application on wireless handheld devices to Pick and Load items to release them from the warehouse Release Cargo Create a Cargo Release The following steps explain how to create a Cargo Release using the wizard which creates the Cargo Release document for you While working in the wizard you can move back to a previous screen as needed After completing the wizard all the information you entered is saved and filled into the document Then you can edit it add other charges print it email it etc Start 453 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE GENERAL INFORMATION Click the Add button A wizard opens The first screen in the wizard is for entering General information to create the Cargo Release CR document Cargo Paice H O a h H Ko 7 i A amp gt 7 oa Frit Pras Add Delete Fire Filter Ogteons Zoom Optic HVVC Cargo Compan 8 Greate Cargo Release Wizard benedial biboimalion Erda thn garia al a BR an ababa Hich ai a Aiea Dial el Aai To Ral te Cul i Fa Pi ease to loans
272. his PO number the corresponds to the commercial transaction that purchases the items Carriers Tab The fields on the Carrier tab are The Inland Carrier is usually an overland trucking company This entity provides transportation for the Pickup Order 252 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER CARRIERS TAB The Main Carrier is usually an ocean carrier if the cargo is sent by sea after the pickup is done This applies when this is part of a complex transportation arrangement that has more than one leg a Pickup Order General shipper Consignes Supplier Carriers Commodities Charges Events Alle Inland Carrer Main Carrier Carrier Carrier PRO Number Return Address Change Oriver s Name Driver s License Number Booking Number Tracking Number Preferred Mode of Transportatior Cancel The Return Address is the address where the container is returning to this is mostly used by an NVOCC The PRO number is optional Enter it if you have it It is a progressive or sequential number used by the inland carrier trucking company to identify the straight BL and to track freight bills If you have the driver s name and license you can enter it here If the carrier gave you a tracking number enter it Enter the Booking number if this Pickup Order is part of a B
273. his to select the transporation charges the freight service class and who to apply it to If you have rates saved in your system you can select them here for that entity You can choose to set it to Prepaid or Collect Decide if you want the charge to show in documents Do you want this 467 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE CHARGES TAB rate to be updated automatically if changes are made to your system by you or another employee who has permissions to modify rates Status Descnptior Prepaid Quanbty Pice Amount Appl to EJ Open Documentation Yes 1 00 23 00 2200 Tage Income Charge Income Freight Charge Expense Charge Expense Freight Charge Totals Expense income Fralit USD 000 USD 25 00 USD 25 00 MAGAYA TIP lose ancel Expenses Expenses include handling charges and other charges that are not freight related Expense Freight Charge For transportation costs The Charges tab also includes a button to enable you to change the units for this transaction such as inches or centimeters etc A detailed discussion of charges is covered in the topic Charges 468 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE CHARGES TAB To generate charges click the Generate button Cargo Release General Inland Carrier Commodities Charges Events POD Attachments Notes Intt gt Status Description Prepaid Quantity Price Apply
274. ht c one B Aow 3 right b one B Row 3 right a one B Row 3 let c one B Row 3 lett b one B Row 3 lett sh one E Row 2 right c one B Row 2 right b one B Row 2 right one B Row 2 lett c one B Row 2 lett b one B Aow 2 lett a one E Row 1 right b a F Er Heo Ho es Heo Heo es Heo es Mo Yes es es Yes Yes es Yes Mo es Yes Mo es Mo Mo es pty ii Filter Type Receving Storage Mobile Aecevirg Receiving Storage Storage Quality Control Quality Control Shipping Shipping Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage Pieces fa 41 one Yard Default one Mobile Locations one B One Airport Warehouse Airport Warehouse one B One one B One one B one B one B Reports Warehouse zones Import Export k Choose Columns Actions 169 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT LOCATIONS 2 Select Import A dialog box opens Data Import Location List Code Description Empty Tyne i Import LSW Import MIL Save e Mail Print View Document Delete 170 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT LOCATIONS 3 Click the Import CSV button A dialog box opens select columns to Import Click Browse File name C Program Files Magayva Corp
275. i Data Dat A Al conditions AND Rekared to Text Contain Ervique Date Date On of Alter Mar 062008 Conditions can be nested under the first condition to narrow your list results even more Example of a Filter To find a cargo release from March 6 2009 or earlier that was released to Enrique 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select the Available Field In this example select Released to In Conditions select Contains This will allow you to enter a first name or just a last name If you select Equals you must enter the exact name In the field next to Equals enter in the person s name you are searching for Enrique The text field is not case sensitive Click the Add button Select another Available Field Date In Conditions select On or Before Enter today s date the default Click the Add button Click OK The result list will display in Magaya Explorer If the result is found you will see the transaction you are looking for but if not refine your search by clicking the Unfilter button and then return to the Advanced Filter to change the terms or refine the search by removing a condition and adding a different one After filtering a list it can be saved by clicking the Star button at the top of a list 131 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE FIND BUTTON The Find Button To search for a document or
276. i ee thse g atone aod dey hues Gand dase hae 98 Warchousmo HOIICE xf sts n0 a0 ote See RE amp KES RY ws hk Soe RA WO Rw EA 99 Maintenance Folder eener neiere awn cuisd abies celetaue se teed 100 Rates Folder ses sessedntsce ha aia east wo eee ee ae hehe a oe ae ae A 100 ACCOMMUNG Fold eerie eee tae es EONS OLE SEIS Ree Rees 101 Miseellancous Folder o1is 4 4 ate nosed 6 ae DA Ree Se AEST EN RSS Le AEE ES 102 Working with Document and List Views 00 ccs 103 Working withthe LISE VIEW qesmi ad dorris irin Rade ea cea ucdepenart die Rade rare 104 Related OMS eene aeia a e E ed Se AN De E 109 Toolbars in Document and List Views 0 0 ccc eee eens 114 Buttons on the Toolbars 0 0 0 eee eens 115 PHO G0GlS s poy tok CRs ee RRS ok ERR seL Reason d eee sen eewe 116 PU i Pg eera sess caccse a cis Rik ste chan aie ante Sua Satay ak ste ean ae acne ee aca 122 Bate MPAA cg cua eea aae Oe Sel aae ORR ee he Oe ale aN 124 Tlie Pilier Bun OO 4 225300 oct ve iah RA E EATE aera a eas 127 Advanced Fero seoa Gao sh eho r a E E e Beis Re Se Be NS a Bee 129 MS Fai BUON ec 3 oy de hes ce og batt dense ot E 132 TNE ACHONSHD UMNO 4 5 55k 4 Ba nnts hoes catenin ok das wh ba ae GA dog lnt woes 135 Tie Detar BUNN serrer de 5 Se ea Ok acts eat 0 aaah OER Read Pe ae eo 138 Resize Windows and Panels acts weet id belied b BER RU ATA RRS CREE 139 Maintenance Folder ssrds raaa fase ee aiea a see bes axe snad e bases a ede s 140 Maintena
277. ialog box s EEI tab The code and description will be filled in automatically These codes are updated via a Web service to ensure the system has the latest Fill in the other fields on the EEI tab Enter the Measurement information for Quantity 1 and 2 as needed This is determined by the Schedule B code entered When two units of quantity are specified in the Unit of Quantity field for a Schedule B clas sification both primary 1st and secondary 2nd quantities are required to be reported in the AES The first Quantity is required unless using a limited export code The second Quantity is required if the commodity requires it unless using a limited export code Not all Schedule B codes require this field and X by the field indicates it is not required Enter the value the total monetary value Use whole numbers Do not enter zero This field is required Enter the ECCN the Export Control Classification Number issued by the Bureau of Industry and Security www bis doc gov Enter if the license type requires it Enter the license type for the commodity Click on the button to search A frequently used code is C33 for No License Required Also enter the 298 COMMODITIES EEI TAB license number if required If the license type is a code for military ship ments the Military button will be activated Military Information Exemption Humber Significant Military Equipment a Quantity
278. icable checkboxes to enable access to the following Allow Magaya Network access gives the employee access to the Magaya Communication Center and its features such as the chat Allow Magaya Software API access establishes this user and pass word access to the Application Programming Interface API if your company uses the API feature to import or export data Allow Magaya WMS Mobile access gives the employee use of the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld scanner devices Click the OK button to save the information and exit the dialog box 76 PERMISSIONS SCENARIO LIMITING PERMISSIONS Give the user name and password to the employee For details on other user login authentication options see the Magaya Software Customization Manual An employee s access can be disabled on this screen also Scenario Limiting Permissions This section provides an example of setting up permissions for different employees based on what functions you as an administrator want an employee to access This is especially useful for limiting access to accounting functions in the software For example you can give different permissions to an Operations Manager and an Operations Employee 1 Create the Employee For this scenario we added the employees Operations Manager and Opera tions Staff Your employees will be entered by their names 2 Create the Group We also added a group called Limited Accounting Follow the steps in the se
279. ick the Select button to perform this task The next screen that opens shows the location if the location was specified in the Task If the location is not specified scan enter it The next screen shows the items that need to be received Select an item and click the Quantity button Warehouse Receipt EJ amp gt qi am 2 10 Warehouse Receipt Description Qty Pek code Note on Locations If a location was assigned you can change the location if needed by clicking on the Location pallet button to enter a new loca tion For example if a location is full or the items ar toolarge and you need to assign these items to another location the change can be made here and it will be saved in the system As you scan items to receive them the items will be assigned to that loca tion in the system and saved when you change the location or pallet or click Finish Each item that is saved will no longer be displayed on the screen because it is saved You can end this step before you receive all the items if necessary Then later or the next day you can continue where you left off 351 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING 3 Scan the items or manually enter the quantity Total hy iz o O Quantity az o O General ok cancer Tip Manually entering the quantity instead of scanning is useful when there is a large quantity of items and you want to save the time it woul
280. ied Mame Description Description HESYY ITEMS Over 50 lbs each Click the Add button to add criteria Click the arrow button to move a selected criteria to apply it to this location definition The criteria can also be seen on the Inventory Item Definition dialog box Assign the Definitions to Locations Assign the definitions individually or in bulk also referred to as in batch 215 LOCATION DEFINITIONS RECOMMENDED NEXT STEPS Individually Right click a location Select Assign Location Definition from the pop up menu k Location Definitions Description Type Level Allows Loose Carge Replen Small Replenishment MIDDLE Yeg Replen Large Replenithment LOWEST Yeg Pick Large Picking LOWEST Yes Pick Fragile Picking MIDDLE eS 4 of 4 elements Bulk or Batch Assignment Filter the list or select multiple locations by clicking shift on the keyboard and then right click and select Assign Loca tion Definition from the pop up menu Recommended Next Steps After defining locations you can add them to zones If you have multiple ware houses or want to treat one zone in your warehouse separate from the others you can promote that zone to a warehouse Be sure to read the topics about creating zones receiving cargo moving items in the warehouse and releasing cargo to get a full view of warehousing opera tions Additional topics for guided put away replenishment and pick
281. ied Party Screening pop up menu Modes of Transportation Vessel List Choose Columns Import Export Rates Rates that carriers give you can be added to a carrier s profile on the Rates tab Any rate entered here is also saved in the Rates folder Carrier rates are explained in detail in Chapter 2 of the Magaya Software Customization Manual Also search the Magaya Knowledgebase for keywords such as Rates GRI and Contracts Forwarding Agents Add forwarding agent information such as address payment terms participa tion assign tracking access IATA code FMC SCAC TSA number and more Send Documents to Agents You can also add their Magaya Network ID if they use Magaya software also This will enable you to exchange Magaya transactions with them saving work and reducing errors If the agent is a known shipper check the box on the Pmt Terms tab the payment terms tab and set their preferred currency also set in Configuration 145 MAINTENANCE FOLDER WAREHOUSE PROVIDERS Agent Participation To learn how to enter agent participation see the section Agent Participation in the Liquidation topic Reports See reports of agent profile by clicking the Reports menu in the top toolbar of your Magaya Explorer See Sales Reports and Profit Reports Warehouse Providers Add contact information for a company that provides you with warehousing services Customers Add Customers Add
282. ile Manual Receive MeriFy items after batch pick 37 INITIAL INVENTORY SETUP ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE Follow these steps on the handheld device to assign locations to items for the initial inventory process 1 Click the Initial Inventory icon on the main menu of the Magaya WMS Mobile at ah Initial Receive Move 1 Pick Load 7 oe w Count Messages View Manual Manual Receive love 2 0 SD Manual Manual Put Guided Put Move Aaway Away 2 Scan or enter pieces Initial Inventory Scan the items to relocate W 3CAD 29 1 3 Enter quantities 4 Scan or enter current location Perform these steps to scan all the items needed Since this initial setup can take a long time the recommended process is to begin entering the most important items first or the items that will remain in the warehouse for the longest time and then enter the remaining items progres sively 38 CONFIGURE WMS INTRODUCTION TO WMS CONFIGURATION When the process is completed go to the Maintenance gt Configuration gt WMS and click on the checkbox Enable Initial Inventory for WMS Mobile Users to uncheck this option Then the icon for Initial Inventory will disappear from the WMS Mobile screen If you are upgrading from the Magaya Cargo System please see the section Upgrading from the Magaya Cargo System Configure WMS Introduction to WMS Configuration The WMS configuration section in the Maintena
283. ile name columns Type Import A P aC Part Humber Description Text Pieces Integer Default Model Text Customer Text Include Header Manubacturer Text i Package Text F Schedule B Code Text Schedule E Description Text License Type Text Delimiter F Export Code Text O Amount Per Pallet Integer separator Comma C linimum Stock Integer F Aniving Pieces Integer Field Type Integer F Unitary Value Decimal C Sale ltem Text own Process this column Select the columns to import by clicking the box to checkmark it For example if you want the SKU select Item Code The list of columns shows the column name and type such as if it s a text field or date field etc The column header Import will display a Yes or No for each column indicating if that column can be imported or not 4 Click Browse to open the file on your computer or network that contains the data you want to import Recommended fields of data to import are the part number manufac turer description length height width weight and price For example Part Battery Duralast 66 00 6024 002 Battery Duralast 67 00 6070 167 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT LOCATIONS Part 003 Battery 26 Everlast 69 00 6026 You can import other fields such as Customer Model or custom fields depending on your needs Other options in the dialog box are I
284. ily Frequency W Once at 3 02 33 AM Ev ery Days Hours Minutes T 2 Oo Start 3 00 00 AM End 4 00 00 PM Also set the time of day If you select once per day set the time If you select the option Every then define if you want to run the schedule every 419 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE hour every 2 hours etc Then set the start and finish time for the schedule to run during the warehouse hours of operation Weekly If you want the replenishment schedule to run weekly select the days of the week to run it If you want it to run each week select 1 If you want it to run every other week select 2 Task Frequency Every 1 week s Monday Tuesday W Wednesday C Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Monthly If you want to run the schedule monthly select from the following options Task Frequency Frequency Monthy z 7 i Z 3 4 g 7 8 4 10 Li 12 13 ld jw 15 Le F 18 15 Fa i 22 24 24 2 26 27 2 24 3i 31 Every I months The rs Manda Every months Days Select which days of the month to run the schedule and if you want it to run every month select 1 every other month select 2 etc Task Frequency Frequency Mankthly Dam L 2 3 4 5 E 7 q 10 Li 12 3 t 15 Le L7 IE 13 20 Pad ae J3 m 25 26 ar 28 zd 30 FI Ewery z months First Porc Every i manths The other option for a monthly schedule is to select a day each month to r
285. in Receiving area 01 RECO1 Scan or enter the location codes exactly as they are defined in your Magaya system The 358 3 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING system is not case sensitive upper case or lower case letters are not required Note If a default receiving location was set in the WMS Configuration screen then the user will not see this screen on the handheld The system will automatically use the default location you configured Then the hand held user will not have to scan the Receiving location repeatedly Click OK In the next screen enter the entities to receive the items the Shipper the Consignee the Tracking Number and the Bonded Type if applicable such as Domestic C F S or G O and the Entry Number WH Receive s ray Shipper name ee cs consignee name PS a Use for prefered entity Tracking Number Bonded Type Entry Number cosy ST Entities E lt cey To access the list of entities in your Magaya database enter the first few letters of the shipper or consignee name This will activate the Get 359 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING 360 button Click on the Get button to retrieve the list of names that start with Venezuela Fool and Patio Client venezuela Shoe Distrihutors Client Look up and select client name Note To skip this screen check the box to Skip ent
286. ing are available and can be done in your Magaya system if you have this type of operation Please see the topic Directed Operations Getting Started to learn more 216 SEQUENCING IN THE WAREHOUSE INTRODUCTION TO WAREHOUSE SEQUENCING Sequencing in the Warehouse Introduction to Warehouse Sequencing This topic explains how to manage the locations in your warehouse by adding a sequence to them What is sequencing Sequencing is the order that you define in your Magaya system that tells the warehouse employees which locations to place items in when putting items away and which locations to pick from The system creates tasks for the WMS Mobile handhelds that use the information from the sequence to recommend locations for the user This is especially useful for batch picking because it defines an efficient path through the warehouse saving time Before begining the sequencing procedure in your Magaya system ensure your operations are clearly defined by answering questions such as Which locations do you want the system to recommend to fill first when putting away items If one location is full which location do you want to fill next Do you want to use the same sequence for picking and for putting away Create a Sequence for a Single Warehouse This section explains how to set the sequence for a single warehouse using the Sequence tab view in the Warehouse Inspector screen Clicking a zone to highlight it will open new tabs on
287. inted labels The scanner enters the bar code numbers into the Cargo Release To use this option your system must have the Magaya Bar Code plug in activated You can also scan by external tracking number when loading the CR o If you want to create a partial shipment of the cargo select the item in the list and click on the Pieces button Enter the number of pieces Part of the box next to the item will be shaded indicating that part of the inventory was released not all of it To include all the cargo in a release click on the box next to the item The full box will be shaded If an item is defined as having variable weight the system will ask for the number of pieces and total weight of those pieces Select Partial Pieces WH 133 Chicken drumsticks 0 000 00x0 00r 10 Pieces 2 of 10 Pieces Weight 9 5 lb of selected pieces Cancel The total weight and piece quantity will be updated in the Inventory Item Definition list shown by the column Total On Hand Weight The WR and the storage fee will also be updated This is useful for items such as perishables that vary in weight per package Other buttons on the screen help you work with the screen WY Fill in reverse order Mark all Unmark all Pieces A Find View Configure 461 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE 462 Check the Fill in Reverse Order button to see t
288. ion the Part Number is grayed out and cannot be changed If the Part Number is not correct delete the item and create a new Inventory Item Definition for the item The Criteria tab displays criteria used in the Location Definition to help whne doing procedures for putting away this item replenishing it or picking it for a release For more see the topic Location Definitions Inventory Item Definitions List The Inventory Items Definitions list can be used to displayed a variety of infor mation about your inventory in a way that is helpful to your specific operation For example you can set columns by using the Actions button Save a List View You can save a view so you don t have to create it every time you want to see certain details Follow these steps First filter the list to view only the items you want to see Save that view by clicking the star on the top of the list and select Save this view iT nen Manage views 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 g 183 CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITIONS LIST Name the view to save it Custom View view name Hazardous Materials Creator Administrator Save time frame L ee eee MUD Sse This view of the list can be accessed at any time by clicking the dropdown menu which shows all the views saved Hazardous Materials Package Kits List 4 Box Resale terns Bag 0 yes Box fo No Actions But
289. ion Contact Mame Country Fort Los Angeles Warehouse UNITED ST Los Angeles Houston CE Add Enter your branch addresses Description Houston Office Contact Phone How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG Box How TO MAKE CHANGES TO INFORMATION YOU ENTER Then you can select from the address list in transactions such as the Entities tab of a shipment To select another address in a transaction Forwarding Agent Mame HW Cargo Compary Address 7950 NW Bard Street r lami FL 33166 m NITED STATES Click to see addresses Client tS Tm Add HWE Cargo C EJ Fess arga mar A dialog box opens a Address Default Shipping Address new address gt Default Billing Address Default Shipping Address Los Angeles Warehouse X Let s look at the first tab of the My Company Info dialog box the General tab _ 5 lect address Phanec Company Information General la ddresal Mame Entity ID Phone e Mail Website Account Humber Contact First Name Contact Last Name Identification Number 12345678944 EN ow wt 53 How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG Box How TO MAKE CHANGES TO INFORMATION YOU ENTER 54 On the General tab The Identification Number can be any of the choices available in the drop down such as DUNS Employee Identification Number EIN etc e The Magaya Network ID is automatically filled in Contacts Add individuals here
290. ion and as you work with it 5 Pickup Order Supplier Carriers Commodities Charges Events Attachments POD Notes ESE O W Emp Number Creation Date 572972015 Time 1015 00 AM Fick up Date 5 29 2015 Time 1 30 00 PM Deliver D ate magr 2015 Time 4 00 00 PM E mployee Administrator Issued By Administrator Destination Agent MAGAYA TIP How are Pickup Order numbers defined Magaya software comes with a default numbering system for transactions To change it to any combination of letters and or numbers go to Maintenance gt Configuration gt Document Numbers We wont go into detail about the numbering here That is covered in the Magaya Software Customization Manual Chapter 3 See also the topic Intro duction to the Configuration Menu in the Magaya Knowledgebase The numbers are used to identify the transaction in your Magaya system The Date and Time fields for Creation Pickup and Delivery all default to today Change them as needed by clicking the arrow The Creation Date is the date and time that this Pickup Order is created in the Magaya system The system automatically fills in the name of the user in the Employee field The Issued By field is set to display your company by default Change it if you are an agent acting on behalf of someone else The Destination Agent
291. ion docu ments such as invoices and bills Enter the quantity applicable for the service you are charging For example for handling services at 2 00 per pound enter the amount of pounds o Enter the Unit you are using For the example above enter pounds lb Enter the price for your service for example 2 00 per pound If you set up the price in Items and Services it will available from the dropdown e The amount will be calculated by multiplying quantity by price Click on the Notes tab to add notes optional if you need more informa tion on the invoice about the charge Click OK to save the information and close the Income Charges dialog box This will return you to the Charges tab of the Warehouse Receipt dialog box Add additional charges as needed Use the Edit button to make any changes Use the Units button to select units of dimensions and weight For Income Freight Charges and Expense Freight Charges Remember Income Freight Charges depend on origin destination mode trans portation packaging and measurements of items used to invoice a customer CHARGES WORKING WITH THE CHARGES TAB Expense Freight Charge is what you pay a vendor based on the origin destina tion mode transportation packaging and measurements of items Expense Freight Charge Ground Freight Charge leat Freight Service Class C Allow automatic update Apply by Show m documents Weight wt No of Gross ross Chan
292. ique per item For example the computers in an office may all be from Dell and they may be the same model but each one has a different serial number If one computer needs a repair and will be sent back to the manufacturer for the repair the serial number will ensure that the correct computer is sent for repairs Check the box to Save Serial Numbers When Items Go Out if you want to track the serial number only after the items are dispatched i e for Customs clearance at destination countries e The package type dimensions and Unit fields are optional but are helpful to speed up the receiving process We recommend you fill them in here When this item is received in a WR or sold ina SO this information will be automatically added to those transactions Has Variable Weight This option is useful for items such as perish ables By checking this the item can be received in multiple boxes and weighed together but it can be released in partial releases During release the user can enter the weight of the partial pieces being released so the correct charges are calculated The system will adjust the weight o f the remaining on hand pieces accordingly A column for Total On Hand Weight can be selected from the Choose Columns dialog box in the Inventory Items Definition list which will show the calculated weight of variable weight items 180 4 MAGAYA TIP CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION STEP BY ST
293. irectly from Magaya software 15 WAREHOUSE FLOORPLANS AND LOCATIONS Warehouse Floorplans and Locations 16 Warehouse floor plans vary according to the type of warehousing business and factors such as the frequency that items are picked and loaded the need for specialty storage space such as refrigerated or a cold storage area etc area storage Secure area NY a Office Quality Control area Within a warehouse zones and locations are defined so items can be stored and found again easily and to facilitate inventory counting More details can be found in the topic Warehouse Zones and Locations Variations A company such as a manufacturer may own a warehouse and the sales orders come from within their own company so goods can be shipped out to customers If you need purchase orders or sales orders see the Magaya Supply Chain Solution for your business If a company rents warehouse space from another company the warehouse company provides the services for a fee such as receiving and storing goods picking and loading and delivery A freight forwarder may make arrangements for a customer s goods to be stored and delivered If you ship internationally or handle dangerous goods see the Magaya Supply Chain Solution for your business Invoicing customers is done based on charges such as inland freight charges that calculate distance weight and other factors length of time items are in storage the type of storag
294. irst Then add locations so you can assign a location to a zone 190 How TO CREATE WAREHOUSE ZONES STEPS TO CREATE A WAREHOUSE ZONE Steps to Create a Warehouse Zone To create a warehouse zone follow these steps 1 Goto the Warehousing folder and click Locations 2 Click the Actions button and select Warehouse Zones Cold Storage Part 2 i Reports ar Cart 1 Views Items a eee Location Definitions ay area Fone B Row 3 right c Assign Location Definition one E Row 3 right b Zone B Row 3 right 4 i Warehouse Zones one E Row 3 left c Add to Warehouse cne fone B Aow 3 left b l Zone B Aow Slettshelfa one B Row 2 right c Default Recening Location Import Zone E Row 2 right b i fone B Row 2 right shela Export Zone B Row 2 lett c Choose Columns Tane P Brim lett h l Filter Actions Detail a Note Some of these menu options will be grayed out unavailable depending on which Magaya software product you are using 3 In the new list that opens click the Add button A dialog box appears Warehouse one General Name Cold Storage one Description Cold Storage one Parent one Houston Warehouse Divisiort Customer Default Recening Location Cancel Help 191 How TO CREATE WAREHOUSE LOCATIONS STEPS TO CREATE A WAREHOUSE ZONE e Enter the name of the zone Enter a description of the zone Sele
295. irst two buttons on the top right are used to add a commodity Add if you want to add a line item that does not need inner detail Or add a container Add Cont which will have many commodities and details inside it To view those details after you place items inside click the Detail button If you need to group items inside a container or other package type click the Repack button To add a commodity such as a box a pallet or other item click the Add button This opens the Commodity dialog box where you enter the details Then PicK UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB that commodity is added tothe transaction You can add as many commodities as needed The Commodity Dialog Box The Commodity dialog box has many fields and tabs It has tabs you can scroll through and use as needed but for this topic we ll focus on the General tab To learn more about the Commodity dialog box now see the article in the Knowl edgebase http knowledge magaya com search commodities_tab On the General tab of the Commodity dialog box you can enter information about an item for pick up The information can be filled automatically when you select the Part Number field or you can enter the details manually Commodity General wl Arriving Part Humber Description Package Type Location Pieces 1 Dimension L sW Hy 0 00 0 00 E By Totals Weight 0 00 Volume 0 00 Quantity Unit Unitary
296. it hia Fl 431177 Cer it UNITED STATES B Cory Pee E rpi A Ca Pleat E crereret Li Package Paes Document View LOLU Deaimentview fp M Eere aian hF Phi Ragan Ey lee Tayfor GF eira Shipper information Tenaga Informatica E Warehouse npma PVC Piping Co anegena Construction To i rento kantei Laa H Oriana Awe pj Gamea Cali Orinda FL Cartegena a A p UNITED STATES COLOMELA pt HL Hedren Inland Gamier and Supplier information ramar Hama Cid Dominion Freight Crier ice PRI Number appie Name Py Pigg oo Tracking Aum ber To Humber 734 995 Drier Marna Puch kumia Hotes Applicable Charges ponam Freight Sere The main toolbar varies depending which Magaya software product you have To view a list click on a subfolder with the word List in the subfolder name such as the Pickup Orders List A list will be displayed in the list view pane of the Magaya Explorer Right click a name to view more options Many of the same buttons and options are available when you view the docu ment or the list For example you can see the history of a specific Warehouse Receipt WR from the list or the document Air Waybill Documents Refer to the shipping topic for information on Air Waybills and the Bill of Lading documents For details on the standard fields in each of these documents search the Magaya Knowledgebase for keywords Air Waybill and Bill of Lading Also see the Intro
297. item and will place it in the found repository expecting to see if this item is reported as a lost one later on the count process and adjust it appropriately This new item that is created will be placed also inside a temporary Warehouse Receipt that is created per count session The Warehouse Receipt number is the same as the count session number The purpose is to avoid having to create these items that is why we recommend first accepting the items that were lost and then those that were found Fie Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting Reports Opt Back Pickup Receive Release Print Find Dates al From E Status Number Date On Hand ADJUS T 0001 0671472010 wH BG 05 25 2010 Ea Magaya Network fl Tasks E3 ia Quotations a Warehousing P Pickup Orders D Pickup Order List Warehouse Receipts PTE ITT T np wW H 65 Sragen dh Commodity List Py Ce a For lll bon a one a Temporary WR created with Count Session number 438 Recounts CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY RECOUNTS When you have finished accepting the count results there should be no items in lost and found repositories in this case it means that items were moved from location to location but not actually lost If you have finished a whole count cycle including all the warehouse locations and at the end you have items in the lost repository it means that these items where really lost or broken etc If there
298. items will go The Place field is used if you have Rates entered in your system Rates are recommended but optional Refer to the explanation in the section Shipper Tab If you know the client who will be billed select it The Client to Bill field is the entity that will pay for the charges The system defaults to the Ultimate Consignee for this field Change it as needed When selecting an entity for the Client to Bill field on the Consignee tab this affects the Charges tab by telling the system to default to that entity when you add charges on the Charges tab making charge creation faster Of course you can add a charge for any entity not just the one set in the Consignee tab as the Client to Bill Simply create the charge and select the entity you need to apply the charge to We ll learn more about charges when we get to the Charges topic Client to Bill 251 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER SUPPLIER TAB Supplier Tab The Supplier may contain some of the same information as the Shipper tab The Supplier is the entity who provides the goods for the Shipper Select the entity name for the Supplier for this Pickup Order a Pickup Order Invoice Number Address Change Purchase Order Murmber tara Heb Enter the Invoice number if you have it This invoice number is for the commer cial transaction that pays for the items Enter the Purchase Order PO number if you have it T
299. ities in the WMS Configuration menu Then the user will not see this screen they will be taken straight to the next screen where they can begin scanning RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING 4 On the next screen you can begin to scan barcodes on items to receive them Py ae Default s Stee Wal E RECA Receiving Clickhere W Warehouse Receipt Eik iy Ale Note on the interface In a screen such as this one that displays a list you can choose the columns by tapping the Description columm header 361 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING 362 The settings are stored for each user for each operation except Pick and Load which share the settings Tap Description heading to display menu Warehouse REIR E v Description Part Number Tracking Number Scan the item or part numbers If you cannot scan an item click the New button to type in the part number WHEL _ k Location Pallet Location allet Einish cance If the code you enter does not match an existing item in your database the system will ask if you want to use that tracking number to create the item RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING Click OK to use it If you click No the system will not create that item WHR D The Tracking No 34567838UU does
300. ity aoe J Messages Folder Prine Ctrl P a rs Select image Print Pallet IDs Permissions Licenses and Amount of Pallet IDs Print Setup Your printer name here USBO01 The WMS General configuration tab also offers other options Set the default package type for new pallets by clicking on the dropdown to make a selection 40 CONFIGURE WMS INVENTORY ADJUSTMENTS CONFIGURATION Check the other checkboxes as applicable to your business Keep inventory by serial number When cargo arrives you will scan the serial number for each item so you know the location of each serial number If an item is moved the serial number must be scanned during a Move When an item is shipped out the serial number must be scanned Save serial number when items go out This will enable you to know which shipments and customers received which serial numbers The handhelds will ask for the serial number Inventory will be closed on or before this date a checkmark in this box activates the date field If you set this date this will affect assets as of the date set here Any transactions before this date cannot be modified by users Only the administrator can make modifications Prevent the loading of items that are in Receiving locations Check this box to ensure that items that are in a Receiving location are not loaded into a Cargo Release or a Shipment Force the selection of existing part numbers when ad
301. k Cancel Help You can use the Repack option more than once in a WR For example if you receive 10 items you can repack 5 items in one pallet and the other 5 items into another pallet The items must be from the same location You can also create additional pieces by adding a number in the field for Addi tional pieces This is useful if a customer sends you a Sales Order or informa tion via EDI in advance of the items physically arriving at your warehouse If the quantity that arrives is different than the information on the EDI then you can add an extra pieces here Click the Finish button when you are done Extra Info Pallets are often used in repacking in the warehouse while containers are often used when creating ocean shipments 309 CHARGES REPACKING CARGO Charges 310 Overview Magaya software enables you to add edit and process charges for transactions such as Pickup Orders Warehouse Receipts Cargo Releases Bookings Quota tions and Shipments Extra Info Charges can be automated to appear in transactions To automate a charge go to the Accounting folder gt the Items amp Services Open the item or the service and go to the Automatic Creation tab to set the automation Charges entered on a Charges tab will be used for accounting functions such as generating bills and invoices Information from Items and Services is used to calculate the charges and liquidations of shipments Ther
302. ks lists by clicking the Actions button and selecting the report option Pending Tasks List Actions Button Reports Import Export History Choose Columns re Ackions Detail By Status By Type By Subject By Owner By Employee By Elapsed Time By Transaction Type By Transaction Number Options include reports by status of the tasks by elapsed time and more The elapsed time report shows when a task was started and completed and the amount of time it took to complete it TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES INTRODUCTION Transfer Items Between Warehouses Learn about how your Magaya system enables you to transfer items from one warehouse to another and keep track of the movements Transfer Items Between Warehouses Introduction If you have more than one warehouse you can create a Move Task and send it to the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld devices to load the cargo into a truck transfer it to another warehouse and place it in a new location there With the Warehouse Transfer feature you can keep track of the items at all times by defining the trucks as your mobile locations in your Magaya database This feature works using existing concepts in Magaya WMS such as warehouse zones and locations Transfer Items Between Warehouses Setup First you need to define each warehouse facility in your organization as a warehouse zone and
303. l mga Fe a pen a EFH a eps F t am e ony fr TEX rimp hate mi lem ik Fi T Pem darri I ti a ark zi P in 3 Pian Fins wtih a 7 oo nal i a Tie fae he Hil Week Load pg amp ha fig ites CE te ma HH em l g er cure i as zs i Arei k Pred PRO Humb wuppie Hare Orlande Garden Shop aia me et ee te TEEF ee Mach Humes ice Humba tantae Omen PO Humbe ii Noirs Applicable Charges A dialog box opens Let s review how it works In this dialog box you will enter details that will be automatically placed in a document for you You do not need to type any documents The dialog box saves all the data you enter so you can print a document send it via email directly from your Magaya system or use any of the information in reports You don t have to retype anything so you save time and reduce errors Tabs are listed across the top of the dialog box You can click any tab to view it Use the arrows to scroll and see more tabs To widen the dialog box click and drag the bottom corner We ll look at each tab one at a time and explain the fields in each tab The General tab is the best place to start but it s not required Let s look at each field on the General tab A blank Pickup Order will have the status of Empty 245 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER GENERAL TAB 246 which is noted on the top of the General tab This status will change after you save this transact
304. l numbers there are options that depend on whether you scan bar codes or enter the numbers manually First ensure your system is configured to save serial numbers This can be done system wide in the Configuration gt WMS menu Configuration we 7 WMS Online Payments a l Pallet IDs Used to configure the gener E _ ets bile Units Used to configure the meast Online F US Customs Systeme MW Keep Inventory by Serial Number Used to configure the type o Used to configure the permis Configure to receive serial numbers Used to configure the gener Ings Used to configure the behay Default package type For new pallets Pallet Save Serial Number When items go out Enable initial inventory For WMS Mobile users Only For Inventory items can be saved by serial number by checking the box on the Inventory Item Definition dialog box Inventory tem Definitions Type Stock ltem Part Number ATS20 Description Rattan Chair Square Save serial numbers for Individual tems Keep inventor by serial numbers Save serial numbers when items go out Receive the items with serial numbers with or without a bar code scanner 294 COMMODITIES IDENTIFICATION TAB With a bar code scanner Scan the Part Number and each Serial Number to receive the items e To enter multiple serial numbers for the same Part Number manuall
305. lable on toolbar er 7 h Y x K Add Edit Delete Filter Actions Detail Delete Filter rifilte Actions Detail View Read Only If a user can create but not edit Invoices the OK button will be grayed out not active when they open an invoice dialog box They can view read only but not make changes To enable a user to create shipment documents but not edit them go to the ship ment folder gt File gt Permissions and click Yes for Create and No for Edit for that user s group A user must be assigned to a group first see the section How to Set Permissions A user can also be given permission to liquidate a ship ment but not modify the transactions created in the liquidation by clicking Yes for Create and No for Edit for shipments 68 PERMISSIONS ADD A NEW EMPLOYEE Add a New Employee Add a new employee as needed If employee names are already entered in your Magaya system go to the section How to Set Permissions 1 Goto Maintenance gt Employees Ve Maintenance s Carriers Forwarding Agents he Warehouse Providers pr Customers a vendors Salespersons fell Contacts 2 Click the Add button 3 Enter the employee s name address and other information as applicable by clicking on the appropriate tabs 4 Click the OK button to save the information and exit the dialog box The employee s name now appears in the list How to Set Permissions Overview To
306. lace online 276 exclude from tracking 272 generate accounting transactions 273 location of 243 make a copy of 271 view attachments to 271 Pieces field 291 Pieces released 461 Pieces versus Quantity 291 Plus sign 92 Port to enable for database 21 Ports add 151 Preview 86 Print button 116 Print labels 355 Print labels from WR 340 Print multiple documents 122 Printer settings 117 PRO number 286 456 Proof of Delivery Cargo Release 471 Q Query rates 510 Quick Find 133 Quotation cargo 503 create other transactions from a 507 view history of 508 Quotations 98 503 R Rates add 142 Receive cargo with Magaya WMS Mobile hand held devices 344 Receive identical items 366 Receiving Task 346 Refrigerated 305 Related columns 109 Release cargo 454 using Magaya WMS Mobile handheld devices 482 Repack cargo 308 create multiple packages 308 Replenish inventory notice 181 Replenishment setting 182 Reports In and Out 409 Inventory 406 Reports menu button 90 Requested arriving pieces 407 Requested pieces 407 Returned items 279 Roles how to assign 79 S SCAC 59 Scan attachments 325 Scan cargo for receipt 306 Schedule B code 296 Schedule B codes 196 Schedule B D and K codes 60 Schedule D work with list 151 Schedule D and K update port lists 153 Schedule K work with list 151 Search 403 Serial number on Inventory Item Definition 180 Serial numbers count inventory by 432 Serial numbers on labels 238 Serial num
307. lds Quantity field This field is also used if you are declaring insurance or if you need a Commercial Invoice and need to have the value per item This is not often used for cargo moslty for resale inventory and for commercially purchased items For example if you have 1 box with 8 items inside enter 8 in the Quantity field If the item has a value defined in its Inventory Item Defin tion then the Unitary value field will fill in here By Totals Check this box if you do not know the weight of each box then enter the total for all the boxes in the Total field When you check the box the weight field will be grayed out so you can enter the total weight This selection is saved Location If you assign a location to the item then the status of the item will be On Hand after you click OK and save the data entered in the dialog box Option Set a default receiving location by right click a Receiving location in the Locations list and selecting the option Default Receiving Location The loca 291 COMMODITIES IDENTIFICATION TAB tion must be of the Type Receiving set it as a default This speeds up receiving items m I Set a Default Locations Receiving Location Stats Code Description Empty Type a Used REL tard Recerving Area biam No Recerving g Empty T1 Reports Mobile Used STAL l Quality Control fl Used me ane Shipping ET Empty FFT Warehouse Zones Kohile fa Used RECE Add to Warehouse Zon
308. lect Create Task 2 a AJIB T iF Network Send EMail Task Refresh Folders a T f pm sie p a lied Taels Find Filter Unfilter Actions Zoom e Wc Cargo Company W 18 Terrace Miami FL 33172 UNITED STATES Create WMS Move Task Create Partial WMS PickiLoad Task Cargo Release seal Release Date Time Apr 2 2012 09 45 AM Release By llene Taylor 3 Inthe Task dialog box enter the details of the task Task Task Dates status T Creatior anazama 2 25 48 PM Assigned ta WMSUser x Due Created by Reminder 9 13 2014 RA 2 25 48 PM Task type Subject Pick patio furniture Location OC we x Notes w enen gt 483 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE A PARTIAL PICK TASK Assign the task to the WMS Mobile user who will perform the Pick task Note If you have not set up WMS Mobile users go to the employee s profile and check the permission box on the User tab Select the task type Pick WMS Enter a location required This is the final destination location where you will move the items to not where the items reside before or during Picking There are only two types of locations available from this menu Shipping and Quality Control When you create Locations in your Magaya system ensure you create these types Note If using mobile locations the user selects the mobile location on the handheld Set the due date The reminder i
309. lick on the Dock button it now has a red arrow pointing right instead of a green arrow pointing left Select what you want to find by clicking on the Find Type dropdown You can search all elements or choose what transactions to search in such as warehouse receipts or invoices To combine search elements choose Selected Elements from the dropdown Check the boxes for the elements you want to search You can also use the button with the three dots next to the dropdown Set the date range by using the From and To dropdowns You can search by Transaction Number or by Text To search by text type the text into the Text field and click Find The advantage of using the Text search method is that you can find any text that appears anywhere in a transaction You can even search by a partial phrase For example if you do not know the whole name of a carrier or vendor you can search by using part of their name The results list will display any transaction or document that contains the text you entered The total number of found items will be displayed on the bottom of the find screen To view an item in the results list click on it and click the View button The dialog box for that transaction will open Tip You can also double click on the item in the results list to view it To go to the document or transaction click on the item in the results list and click the Go To button You can stop the search at any time by clicking on the Stop
310. looking for type the first letter of the word and the list will jump to that section saving scrolling and searching Enter a description of the container optional Enter the container number Enter the Seal number If there are two seal numbers enter both Enter the dimensions of the container if needed If you select one of the container types of 20 or 40 foot containers or the LDs units the dimensions are filled in automatically Check the box if you want to add the weight of the contained pieces to the total weight Select a warehouse location from the dropdown menu to define the place where the cargo will be picked up The Notes field is optional The Identification tab contains fields for the invoice number and PO number Enter the invoice number the PO number and the Job if applicable Charges Tab Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER CHARGES TAB The fields for EEI Hazardous Materials AMS and Attachments tabs in the Container dialog box are the same as for the Commodities dialog box Please see the Commodities section for information on entering data in these tabs Note When you use the Add Container button that container will appear in the Container Reports available from the Shipment List Actions button If you use the Add button to add a commodity and then selected the container type from the Package Type list it will not appear in the Container Report The Refrigerated tab contains fields
311. low the system to recycle the Following records Clauses 323 ATTACHMENTS ADD AN ATTACHMENT Photographing cargo when it arrives at your warehouse and attaching the photograph to the WR creates a record of its condition for you and the customer Tip Smaller file size is better for photographs they will be easier to email and view on LiveTrack Drag and drop attachments from a Microsoft Outlook email message into Magaya Click the attached file in the Outlook message and drag it into the Attachments window in Magaya Add an Attachment Attachments can be added to transactions in one of the following ways s Click on the Add button on the Attachments tab to attach a photograph or other document one at a time or hold the Shift key to select multiple items to attach To view it after adding it select a image or document and click the View button You can also delete it or save it in another location such as on another computer in your network or in a different folder on your computer e Click and drag items from your computer into the Attachments screen 324 ATTACHMENTS ADD ATTACHMENT FROM SCANNER The following is an example of a photograph and a PDF attached to a Ware house Receipt and displayed in the Attachments tab Warehouse Receipt Select Device HS OWTe P O 10 64 KB Scanned 8 7 2009 1 1 20 MB
312. m definition contains expiration dates the system will not close a count session if it has new or found inventory that is missing the expiration date Recounts There are other options that may be useful while accepting the counts for example if you verify a count result for a location and you are not sure about the results you may want to recount that location by clicking the Recount button A new count task opens for that specific location and you may decide to assign it to a different mobile handheld user to verify the results 439 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY DISCARD A COUNTED ITEM Delete a Count You can delete the previous count as well click the Delete Count button For details onthe accounting of lost and found items please see the section Perform an Inventory Adjustment at the end of this chapter Chapter 12 in the Magaya WMS User Manual Discard a Counted Item 440 If the count results of a location contain an error because a quantity was counted incorrectly then you may decide to discard the count for that item in the loca tion by selecting the item and clicking the Discard button Then process the count after discarding the one item because the remaining results were okay Real Time Status of Counts At any time you may see how a count task is progressing what locations have been counted what remains to be counted what count results were processed or accepted what is pending to
313. m of the tab General Entities Routing Charges Events Delivery Attachme Status Description Prepaid Quantity E Open Ar Freight Service Cost Yes 419 52 5 Open Al Freight Service es 419 82 gt Expense Income Protit USD 524 78 USD650 72 USD 125 94 Totals 311 CHARGES WORKING WITH THE CHARGES TAB The Units button enables you to change the measurement units Check the Units button to open a new dialog box In the Units dialog box you can change the measurement units such as length to change it from the default of Inches to other choices Meter Foot MM CM or DM Each of the Units can also be changed to calculate to a different decimal place than the default 0 00 Use the dropdown menus to make changes Click the OK button when done to save The changes will apply to this transaction only To change the measurement units for your entire Magaya system go to Maintenance folder gt Configuration gt Measurement Units For the following example we will use the Charges tab from a Warehouse Receipt to illustrate the functions Working with the Charges Tab 312 When you click on the Add button to add charges a menu pops up Income Charge Warehouse Receipt 9 Income Freight Charge Expense Charge Stane Deacrplior FPepad Quantity Expense Freight Charge 1 Click the Add button E
314. m recommends the next location you define The user can override the recommendations BE Location Definition Them Definitions Quantity Item definitions Item Definition Max Quantity Min Quantity Refill Quantity ua uantity Item Definition Quantities Item definition Maximum Quantity 1 Minimum For Replenishment 0 Quantity to Refill 0 Delete Click the Add button to open a dialog box to choose a Part Number Item Definition In the Quantity dialog box select the Part Number from the Item Defini tion field The Maximum Quantity is the maximum number of items the location can hold The Minimum for Replenishment can be set as a percent or quantity This tells the system to create a Guided Put Away Task to refill the location with more items Then the Guided Put Away Task is automatically sent to the handhelds The Quantity to Refill field is how many items to include in the Task Manual Put Away Tasks can override the recommendations set here This field is optional Click OK to save the Quantity information for the item 214 LOCATION DEFINITIONS ASSIGN THE DEFINITIONS TO LOCATIONS 5 Criteria tab Use this tab to add all the available criteria to add to define this location better A criteria is a broader way to describe what a location may hold and what is preferred to be held in this location EB Location Definition Item Definitions Quan Criteria Available Appl
315. m that system to the Magaya WMS Magaya Supply Chain Solution or the Magaya Commerce System this section will explain how to set up your inven tory in the new system 175 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA UPGRADING FROM THE MAGAYA CARGO SYSTEM 176 If you re installing Magaya WMS or Magaya Supply Chain Solution then follow the steps in the section Import Existing Inventory Before you begin to migrate data you may need to delete some locations from your Magaya Cargo System if you will not use those locations in the new soft ware program All items that are in a location you delete will then be available to move to new locations Follow these steps in your Magaya Explorer to delete locations 1 Goto Warehousing gt Locations 2 Select a location or multiple locations and click the Delete button If items are in any of the locations a notice will appear Magaya Explorer i P At least one of the selected locations contains items Are you sure you wank to delete it Click Yes to continue or click No to return to the Locations list If you click Yes the location will be deleted from the Magaya system and the item s will not be listed in the Warehouse Inspector The item can be found in the Commodity List but it will not have a location assigned to it The status of these items will be Pending If you need to create new locations and zones in your Magaya Explorer see the section Warehouse Zones a
316. mber assigned to the hazardous material The most commonly used are the UN 300 AMS Tab COMMODITIES AMS TAB codes considered appropriate for international shipments as well as domestic shipments e Material Class A code representing the hazardous class or division desig nated for the material in the International Maritime Dangerous Goods IMDG code Class Qualifier A code that describes the hazardous material class Click on the button with the three dots to select the code from the list that opens e Material Description The proper shipping name of the material desig nated as hazardous e Emergency Contact The name and or phone number of the person or department to contact in case of an emergency Material Page The page number in the IMDG code in which the hazardous material identification appears e Flashpoint Temp The lowest temperature at which the vapor of a hazardous combustible liquid will ignite in the air Degrees Centi grade Celsius Special Instructions The material name special instructions and or the phone number if applicable o Description of Class Free form description of hazardous material classi fication division or label requirements Hazardous Level Select the danger level of the hazardous material To add the Harmonized Tariff Code codes from the Harmonized Tariff Schedule HTS click the dropdown menu for the Harmonized Tariff Code field If you have used this dropd
317. mmodity Classification Codes e Create Reports of Inventory and Commodities Import Existing Inventory Data Introduction To start using Magaya WMS or the Magaya Supply Chain Solution existing inventory needs to be entered into the application This process can be divided into three steps e Import Part Numbers Import Locations o Import Existing Inventory When importing data the format of the data file must match the format in the new system For example if you have three columns of data in the spreadsheet such as part number location and quantity then you will need to select the three corresponding columns in the Magaya software Import Data dialog box 165 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT PART NUMBERS Import Part Numbers If you have been working with another system part numbers can be exported from the old system and imported into your Magaya system To import part numbers follow these steps 1 Goto the Inventory Item Definitions list in the Warehousing folder and click the Actions button 2 Select Import A dialog box opens Data Import Item Definition List Part Humber Description Pieces Model Import CSW Import ML The system can import CSV or XML data This example will show how to import CSV 166 IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT PART NUMBERS 3 Click the Import CSV button The following dialog box opens select columns to Import Click Browse F
318. mns to choose from These elements are all the transactions and data related to the Commodity List Click on the dropdown menu of Related Elements and select an element Related Columns Related Elements Cargo Release Commodity Type Division Incoming Shipment Item Definition Job Location Manufacturer Gukgaing Shipment E Delivery Date Division Driver s License Number Text Driver s Mame Text Employee Text Related Columns Related Elements Gukgoing Shipment wt Available Columns Mame Type Type of Move Text Value Decimal Ventilation Setup Text EIN Text Wolurne ft gt Decimal Volume weight vib Decimal Voyage Text Warehouse Receipts Text Way bill Mumber Text Click to see Related Columns Add gt gt lt lt Remove Selected Columns lt lt Remove Rename Select the column 5 able Columns to Related Columns Related Elements Available Columns 20 Containers 40 Containers 45 Containers 2 AES Filing Date AES ITN Number AES Status AES XTN Number Arrival Date Billing Client Booking Carrier 6 Column Settings Hame C Vehicle Make Vehicle Model C Vehicle Trim Vehicle Class Vehicle Type Vehicle Manufacturer Vehicle Body Type Vehicle Country L Vehicle Engine Type C Vehicle Title Number C Vehicle Title State
319. n Enter a Customer name optional Select a Freight Service Class such as Ocean Freight Service Cost Query Selling Rates Customer Banana Boat Cosmetics wt Freight Service Class Air Freight Service w i Origin Miarni Currency USD United States Dollar ka To include multiple charges in your query click the button with the three dots that is next to the Freight Service Class field A dialog box opens with ACTIONS FOR QUOTATIONS QUERY RATES options Check as many as apply and click OK Products and Services list Description Code Account Name Security Surcharge SEC INC Insurance Income Bunker Surcharge BES INC Ocean Freight Income Fuel Surcharge FSC INC Alr Freight Income Friorty Freight Service FGTF INC Aur Freight Income Ground Freight Service GANFGT INC Ground Freight Incom Ocean Freight Service OCEFGT INC Ocean Freight Income Aur Freight Service AIRFGT INC Ar Freight Income T of 106 elements 3 Enter the Origin and Destination in the Query dialog box 4 Click Find or enter more details such as weight and commodity type Results The results of the query search will display in the bottom of the screen displaying rates that are entered into your Magaya system Prices in USD Description Rate Amount Entity Minimum O Ocean Freight Service Cost 1 200 00 1200 00 7 Shipping Line Mo M Ocean Freight Service Cost S00 00 SUO 00 Tropical Shipping No The best option will
320. n Listing You can filter the list so it only displays the transactions you want to see For more on what you can do with the transactions list such as generate accounting transactions see section Generate Accounting Transactions from Pickup Orders Attachments To view the attachments such as photographs or documents attached to the pickup order click on the Actions button and select Attach ments If an attachment was added to an individual commodity view it by clicking on Edit to open the dialog box Then click on the Commodities tab and open the commodity cargo item by selecting it and clicking on the Edit button It can also be viewed from the Commodities list in the Warehousing folder Create a Copy Click to copy the pickup order with all the same information This is useful if you pickup the same type of cargo from the same location or supplier Create Warehouse Receipt If the cargo has been picked up and brought to the warehouse you can create a Warehouse Receipt WR from the Pickup Order All the information from the Pickup Order will be transferred automatically to the WR You can edit information such as package dimensions or weight 271 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER ACTIONS BUTTON FOR PICKUP ORDERS 272 When you create the WR from the Pickup Order a dialog box of the commod ities opens You can select all the cargo or pieces Select Commodities Status Package Description Part Number
321. n Hand WD OnHand Box W ir Transit Ee Choose Columns Right click an item yo Export for menu J History Add Copies J Reports Break down Compound Iter Rebuild Compound Item Pallet ID Print Packing slip Print All Packing Slips Print Label On Hold General Tab On the General tab of the Commodity dialog box enter the commodity description Part Numbers A part number identifies a type of item in contrast to a serial number which identifies a specific item The serial number is unique and assigned by the manufacturer For example computers have part numbers to identify which type of computer is it but each computer has a serial number to identify each individual computer You may receive 50 computers with the same part number but each will have its own serial number Extra Info If you are receiving inventory items that you want to keep track of by part number select the Part Number This will populate many of the fields with the item details and speed up the receipt The Part Numbers are those that were defined as an Inventory Item Definition Any item can have a Part Number not just resale items 289 COMMODITIES ADD COMMODITIES 290 Location Assign the item to a location in the warehouse or yard Extra Info If your company always receives cargo in the same location you can set the receiving location as a default so it does not have to be selected every time See the L
322. n a Network 0 0 00 29 Terminal Services Installation seisi isou 2665300 naa RELA KOS HERS 26 Software Components Installed 0 0 0 eee 26 Update Magaya SOMnWare 3 45 5 Gah bie erate Ge dua depts bee eran a dua dene bd 27 Uninstall Magaya Software 0 ccc ence eee eee ee ett enna anne 30 Contact Magaya HEID cerren e tla ees a E re 30 NEXESIEDS aoira d Inoa A eh oa E aa ee aa oa Ea a E ERS 31 Chapter 4 WMS Mobile Setup soessssessoesoocessocessoeosocsooessoeeoo 33 Introduction WMS Mobile and Wireless Setup 0000 cee 33 Wireless Infrastructure Setup and Hardware Requirements 33 Recommended Hardware e ra xe ouch 4 cued be A a nO Sa RE 4 RR ed cae ea 34 FIG Wak CoC OS US asta statute s E waist Oo cas acticin Sa a ee Ea eee 36 Initial Inventory Setup on Magaya WMS Mobile 0 000008 37 Conmioure WMS lt 1 caucevetvcmset an pana ane AnA AEEA REER 39 Inventory Adjustments Configuration 0 0 0 ccc ccc eens 41 WMS Mobile Configuration noaa nnnnnanaa anaana 42 Directed Operations Configuration 0 0 0 cee 47 Chapter 5 Initial Software Configuration cece ccc cece cece cece eens 49 Introduction to the Startup Wizard 0 eee eens 49 Why Use the Wizards ws 4 s eas ates ea erent ares tom Eas 49 How to Make Changes to Information You Enter 0000058 50 How to Use the My Company Info Dialog Box
323. n to calculate the totals in the fields of a form automatically Document Options Warehouse Receipt Print fields only Adjust document to paper Show the paper on the drawing Calculate fields automatically Select any options needed The defaults set are Show the paper on the drawing and Calculate fields automatically Note The Options dialog box will show the name of the document you are working on such as a Warehouse Receipt or Cargo Release Print Pallet IDs WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS PRINT LABELS To print pallet IDs go to File gt Print Pallet IDs Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magawa Network Accounting Reports Options es DB eo My Company Info Startup Wizard Release i Accounting Wizard Download Document E il b bo F7 xX First Previous Wexk Last Add Edit Delete Prin Find Mer d Prink Ctrl F Print Setup HVVC Cargo Company offo hv 18 Terrace Print Labels Miami FL 33172 Frink Pallet IDs F Print Pallet IDs Select image capture device Amourt of Palet IDs 10 Permissions Licenses and Services Vide VHP Lasesiet P2015 Sen USEODI Save Copy S E Eto ML meena Cancel ave to fe UNITED STATES Exit 121 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS BATCH PRINT Batch Print To print a group or batch of documents select them from a list and click the arrow on the side of the print button to
324. n to save the information and exit the dialog box 5 Continue with your initial transaction or task NOTE Many of the fields in the dialog boxes are optional For example when you create a Warehouse Receipt you may not know who the ultimate consignee is so you can leave the Consignee field blank The software will tell you if a field is required the My Company Info Dialog Box You can use the My Company Info dialog box to enter information about your company information such as address and contact information Option The 51 How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG Box How TO MAKE CHANGES TO INFORMATION YOU ENTER 52 same information can be set up in the Startup Wizard except for multiple addresses This information will be used in documents in the system 1 2 3 Go to File and select My Company Info Edit Sales Operations Maintenance sh My Company Info e Startup Wizard Accounting Wizard Enter information in the fields on the tabs such as phone number website and address es Most of the fields are optional Click the OK button to save the information and exit the dialog box when done entering information on all the tabs that apply The My Company Info dialog box offers you a place to add your company address and other addresses if you have additional offices in other locations Company Information General Adress Bing Adds Other Addresses Contacts Agent Descript
325. nalyzing your workflows and then configuring your Magaya software to facilitate the work flow Magaya software is capable of helping you create and fulfill your goals of a smarter warehouse The following topics will help you plan and implement a smart warehouse Warehouse Setup Define warehouse zones and locations in a single warehouse Importing existing data See the topic Warehouse Zones and Locations Introduction in the Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search intro_WH_zones_locations Find an overview of the Warehouse Inspector in this topic http knowledge magaya com search warehouse_inspector Warehouse Operations Receiving Storing and Moving Items Releasing Directed Operations Define criteria for locations See the topic Location Definitions in the Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search location_definitions Define sequences for guided put away and picking tasks See the topics on receiving cargo and releasing cargo See also http knowledge magaya com search sequencing warehouse Replenishment tasks See the topic Replenishment in the Knowledge base http knowledge magaya com search replenishment If you have multiple warehouses you can view them all in your Magaya system by defining them with the Warehouse Promotion Wizard See the topic Multiple Warehouses in the Knowledgebase 415 REPLENISHMENT INTRODUCTION TO INVENTORY REPLENIS
326. nc _ X S 00 E WH 127 ABC Sporting Goods Inc Find H O WH 126 ABC Sporting Goods Inc Yie m oO WH 124 ABC Sporting Goods Inc ABC Sporting Goods Inc oO E wH 120 Configure eO B WH 117 H O WH 116 O WH 114 Aftican Intemational Suppliers Agricultural Manufacturer i DA WwH 113 Nilarna Garden Shan Miami Diarihuiian Canter ini LL eee T of 53 elements 458 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE The following image is from the Magaya Cargo System Create Cargo Release Wizard Image from the Magaya Cargo System Select the cargo to release Tou can select cargo ether from Warehouse Receipts or from Inventory Warehouse Inventory Scan H O 2 WH 109 HC Cargo Compary A Fill in reverse order a wH 108 Atlantic Surplus WH 108 Edger Black amp Decker LE 750 45 0011 E aL WH 108 Edger Black amp Decker LE750 45 001 i WH 1T06 HC Cargo Company E WH 104 ABC Sporting Goods Inc ae WH 102 AutoLite Sutomotive WH 1TO1 Atlantic Surplus bei E E E fs WH 99 HC Cargo Company Cartagena Construct i ri WH 9 Art Supplies Art Basel Gallery WH 95 HC Cargo Company WH 69 HC Cargo Company SPR ol TE ar ERM CO pas ee Pr ON ORM S EE UI C L L C C i L S L S L si J8 of 58 elements lt Back J Fiisn Let s look at each of the options to release cargo Click the
327. nce gt Configuration folder contains settings to set up the Magaya WMS Mobile plug in application and related functions WMS General Inventory Adjustment WIS Mobile Directed Operations Pallet IDs Used to configure the generation of Pallet IDs Default package type For new pallets Pallet iiil J Keep Inventory by Serial Number Save Serial Number when items go out Inventory will be closed on or before this date Si 6f2015 Prevent loading of items that are in receiving locations Force the selection of existing part numbers when adding commodities Create informative task when breaking down compound items Let s first look at the options on the General tab 39 CONFIGURE WMS INTRODUCTION TO WMS CONFIGURATION Pallet IDs Click on this button to configure Pallet Ds numbering format In the dialog box that opens enter a Prefix and or a Suffix optional and the number to begin numbering the Pallet IDs Document Number Numbers Format OF Pretix 4i4cd Cancel S utti Help Start number at 102 The created numbers have the following format Frefis Number S utis To print the Pallet IDs go to File gt Print Pallet IDs Enter the amount you want to print in the dialog box aE Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting Reports Options P BR Release i Print Find My Company Info 4 Startup Wizard Accounting Wizard Download Document ame Type Commun
328. nce Folder Overview ccc cece cece eee eeceenceenas 140 Cae 1 4 8 4 G0 Gd See ete a ls oy Oa Gat eae ie hie eee ee te cd 142 FOrwardin AG Cnts a fost 5 ise Ca EA Ce TREE RR ew EE 145 Warehouse Providers erario eiar hha tie eee ase deed ee eae eae 146 GUO TIC TS aes arses erent tees oud er ieingemond EE Grin dea Be a EEEE eee es 146 W CNGOIS saberen G4 oe a bbws oa BPSK e RA EES KER See ee Ras 148 PAlESPCISONS 4 4 cha wets e Ener CAE aN Se HRT oN Gs CLE O See TREE Rees 149 OPM AC US sieer ahs Bhi a Gee rahe ON aa E es EG OO 150 EDIO lo ieee ena E onan a A EE ae ere ee 150 POR e ee Seu Coast gi a tases th gh ease gs et E AE eae Mee Dates WE ne A A 151 COUMEICS EE E E S E E ENA E awe eee ee E 154 COnNEUrIHON 16h ines donk bee wor bene enee Oa E Ee aa 154 Magaya WMS Mobile User Interface 0 cece 155 Overview of the Magaya WMS Mobile Interface 156 Overview of WMS Mobile Functions 0 0 ccc eee 160 CAME SONOMA S aedeagal E E E aa era ams cars She een 162 Chapter 7 Set Up Your Warehouse ccc ccc ccc c cree cece cere ee eeeee 165 Import Existing Inventory Data 0 0 00000 165 IAEOCUC HOM ss esere nee RS 9 5 OE Sas Bie ean a AE Aa Se 8 Aig ee AEA 165 Import Rath INUMDEIS onsen ae caste ww ule gt TEET yw alae ees 166 lapor LOCAVONS ano scons cage eed we eat ee Bea Eee oe eae eee 168 Import BE MAISUNG VENON errie telcos ao cea e eee eae wiees 172 Upgrading from t
329. nclude Header If you click the Include Header checkbox then the system will import the data starting on the line below the column header in your spreadsheet e Delimiter Choose double or single quotes based on what you have in your original file The data is between the quotes You may also choose not to have a delimiter Separator If you want to separate data by comma semicolon or tab make the selection from the dropdown Separator If you are importing a CSV file choose Comma Field Type This defines the type of field you have selected in the list such as Text Decimal etc If the field is checkmarked in the list the box for Process this column will be highlighted Verify the data after importing it Import Locations 168 Locations can be exported from another system or a spreadsheet and imported in Magaya software It is recommended that you define your warehouse zones in your Magaya data base before you import the locations For details see the topic Warehouse Zones and Locations in this chapter IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA IMPORT LOCATIONS Go to the Locations list in the Warehousing folder and click the Actions button Locations Code TREL STAGE RFT REC B Description Yard Receiving Area Staging Area Refrigerated Truck Recewmng Area B Recewing Area 4 Rack 2 Rack 1 Luality Control one B Quality Control ore A Bap area B Bap area 4 one E Aow 3 rig
330. ncludes all locations within a zone a row or aisle It is very impor tant that all locations are counted to complete the cycle e Physical counting is the process of counting all stock This process usually requires stopping business for a day or more A complete physical inventory must include all locations even if the system shows them as empty When a Physical Count is created the system will prevent users from entering or changing transactions that modify the inventory until the Physical Count session is closed BE AWARE of this condition before choosing Physical Count 426 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY CREATE A COUNT SESSION AND COUNT TASKS e Click OK The Create Count Task dialog box opens Create Count Task Count Session 0001 Type of Count v Count selected Part Number Part Number Count selected locations or zones Location Locations H O ER Yard O E Zone B OEE Zone 4 OEE Default Zone 7 Select the type of count Informed or Blind e An Informed count is a task that is created on a PC in your network with all the information about the items to be counted If you are using the WMS Mobile handheld devices then the devices will show all the items and their quantity in the location The user will be able to see the system inventory on the screen A Blind count requires the user of the WMS Mobile handheld device to enter or scan both the item and
331. nd Locations in this chapter To import locations see the section Import Locations IMPORT EXISTING INVENTORY DATA UPGRADING FROM THE MAGAYA CARGO SYSTEM Initial Inventory Set Up Follow these steps to enable the Initial Inventory function for the Magaya WMS Mobile handheld users 1 Goto Maintenance gt Configuration gt WMS and click on the checkbox Enable Initial Inventory for WMS Mobile Users configuration WMS ia Pallet IDs Used to configure the generation of Pallet ID WES Mobile Units Used to configure the measurement units For 2 Ma a a eee nk Warehouse Equipment Used to configure the type of equipment user WETS Mobile Users Used to configure the permissions printer cor Po 7 a bi Counts Numbers Used to configure the generation of numbers obile Operations Settings Used to configure the behavior of the operati rf T To Default package type For new pallets Pallet Scales e l Keep Inventory by Serial Number U Save Serial Number When items go out a Enable initial inventory for WMS Mobile users Only For Magaya Cargo 4 Custom Fields pi Inventory will be closed on or before this date 1i 212015 Note If the Magaya WMS application is running on the handheld device when you set this configuration you may need to exit the application and restart it When the process is completed return to this Maintenance gt
332. next screen enter the dimensions Dimensions and Weight Tracking 555222 Length Width Height Weight poe Mote Dimensions and weight are by pieces This is useful because you can go back to an item and enter the dimensions at any time with this Measure feature You do not need to enter the dimensions while receiving but it can be done later on the handheld instead of the PC If there are multiple items with the same tracking number the system will assign the same dimensions to them all 371 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE MEASURE 372 CHAPTER 11 MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS INTRODUCTION Chapter 11 Manage amp Move Warehouse Items Introduction This chapter explains how to identify and manage items in the warehouse Magaya Explorer has a feature to help management of items called the Ware house Inspector It is located in the Warehousing folder gq Warehousing P Pickup Orders P Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List AE Cargo Releases AE Cargo Release List Ej Cargo Movements Eri Cargo Movement List ie Package Types Locations W Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications This chapter explains how to perform Informed Moves and Uninformed Manual Moves of cargo and how to find locations and items in your Magaya Explorer using the Warehouse Inspector feature 373 WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR INTRODUCTION TO THE WAREHOUSE INSPE
333. nformation Also see the topic on Pickup Orders to learn more about adding a container Warehouse Kece lp Cert al ei a Pe F a T in I m es i TT F Corea Shpa Conies Sapp Cane ATP F Caga Evati iii Cavers ideriicaien FE Harakin AAAS E lahat Faci g yee aE l aki Sei Ge Pedig Contam ppa Tarpt Rj uaii aai okama E 0 Wb aighk 00 es ay wamak CL Bg Ws os Sie the maghi cil ores GT Click on Add Cont to open the Container dialog box e On Container dialog box start on the first tab Container Select the Container Type from the dropdown menu s Enter a description of the container optional Enter the container number Enter the Seal number If there are two seal numbers enter both Enter the dimensions of the container if needed Check the box if you want to add the weight of the contained pieces to the total weight Select a warehouse location from the dropdown menu to define the place where the cargo will be picked up e The Notes field is optional The Identification tab contains fields for the invoice number and PO number s Enter the invoice number the PO number and the Job if applicable The fields for EEI Hazardous Materials AMS and Attachments tabs in the Container dialog box are the same as for the Commodities dialog box Please see the Commodities section for information on entering data in these tabs Note
334. ns and accounting tasks a Cae Cempany Magaya opiner ein i ter Pde F Mapei Be ee eet When you first open the software a welcome page called Page One displays in the main screen It contains links to training news about new features and more It displays after the system has been idle also You can access it at anytime from the Page One menu on the left 85 WHAT CAN You DO IN THE MAGAYA EXPLORER To widen the preview window click and drag the line between the two panes Alternatively click on the Folders icon on the top toolbar This hides the folders list To view the folders list again click on the Folders icon button again The status bar on the bottom of the Magaya Explorer displays A brief description of the selected menu command Magaya Network ID Employee name or role Magaya connection icon Green means you are connected to the Magaya Network Red means you are not connected Employee Connected Network ID 19020 Ilene Taylor If you are using Microsoft Vista instead of Windows XP there will be slight differences in the appearance of Magaya software such as colors when compared to the screenshots included here The functionality of Magaya soft ware remains the same as described here What Can You Do in the Magaya Explorer 86 The Magaya Explorer user interface contains functions for tasks you do every day such as Receive cargo in the warehouse create warehous
335. ns subfolders of entities such as your customers vendors employees ports and more and the Configuration subfolder with options to set up your Magaya system according to your needs Each subfolder has various actions and reports available that you can access by using the Actions button or by right clicking on the entity name The subfolders are F EI Carriers Forwarding Agents warehouse Providers Customers vendors Salespersons Contacts ri Employees 4 Ports wh Countries Configuration PO GRO BS it For details on all the functions in the Maintenance folder see the topic Main tenance Folder For details on the Configuration menu see the topic Intro duction to the Configuration Menu by searching in the Knowledgebase found in Page one the welcome screen of your Magaya software The Rates folder is used to enter your rates for carriers and customers Routes for multimodal shipments are also saved here pe Rates Standard Client Rates EF Client Rates FEI Carrier Rates ia Client Contracts la carrier Contracts 1 Route Segments Ii e Ty eo Routes The Rates are explained in the Magaya Software Customization Manual Accounting Folder FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS ACCOUNTING FOLDER The Accounting folder contains the following yE Accounting amp Chart of Accounts 8 Items and Services Invoices Invoice List Bills m Bill List EF Payments EF Payment List
336. nternal Notes 473 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE INTERNAL NOTES TAB Internal Notes Tab The Internal Notes tab is for notes within your company Customers will not view these and the internal notes will not display on documents E Cargo Release Cs General Inland Caries Commodities Changes Events POD Attachments Notes Intemal Notes Created ori Notes Created by Last modihe 03 03 2015 Add intemal notes to the Cargo Release transact Adninistrator 03 09 2075 Full details are covered in the topic Notes and Internal Notes What Actions can I Perform with a Cargo Release This topic will explain how to generate accounting transactions and other actions that can be performed from a Cargo Release Generate Accounting Transactions from a Cargo Release Magaya Explorer gives you the ability to create accounting transactions such as invoices based on the information entered in operations transactions such as Cargo Releases 474 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM A CARGO RELEASE Magaya Explorer links the transactions and transfers the information from one transaction to another For example when charges are entered in the Charges tab the charges remain Open are not posted to the Accounting system until you click the Generate button or they are liquidated Then they are Posted Cargo Release
337. number of pieces 0 4 Click the button with the three dots A dialog box opens to schedule replen ishment tasks 417 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE In the dialog box that opens check the box to enable to scheduling Then click the Add button A new dialog box opens which includes the settings for this replenishment schedule eS A am ae General Information Hame Schedule Repeating gt Enabled Task Frequency Frequency Daily Every l Dal Frequency Once at 9 02 33 AM Days 0 Start 12 00 00 AM End 11 59 59 PM Time Span Start 7 29 2015 l F End 7 29 2015 No End Description Will execute every 1 day s at 09 02 AM starting 7 29 2015 1 Enter a name for this replenishment schedule The system enables you to have more than one schedule 2 Select if you want this schedule to run one time or to repeat in ie J ao IZ PLE General Information Name Schedule Task Frequency Freguency Every l davis 418 3 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE Select how frequently you want the system to create Tasks which will be sent to the handheld units The options include daily weekly or monthly Daily The system will check daily to see if inventory needs to be replen ished according to the setting you define here Select if you want it to run every day or every 2 days or 3 days etc Task Frequency Da
338. o Use this option if you need to issue a credit or a refund to a customer Bill Add a bill of what you need to pay Credit Use this option if you overpaid a vendor and they give you a credit The Actions button for the Transactions List has the option to link the transac tion to a bill or to an invoice or to a Pickup Order You can also unlink it If you 275 WHAT ACTIONS CAN PERFORM WITH A PICKUP ORDER GENERATE ACCOUNTING TRANSACTIONS FROM PICKUP ORDERS 276 created a bill or other accounting transaction separate from the Pickup Order you can link it this way You can also receive the payment or pay the bill from the Actions button Additional Options You can send your customers invoices to an online payment system and the customer can pay it via credit card or bank check For details see Chapter 9 of the Magaya Software Communications Manual Customers can also place Pickup Orders online and print their own box labels with all the item details linked to the bar code For details see the Magaya Soft ware Communications Manual CHAPTER 10 RECEIVING CARGO INTRODUCTION Chapter 10 Receiving Cargo Introduction When cargo arrives at the warehouse creating a Warehouse Receipt WR will add all the information about the items into your Magaya database Cargo is also called commodities or inventory items The WR includes the date and time that the items arrived when it was unloaded checked in and the location
339. o Wloading 38 12 13 2013 Buyer 1 Unfilter 3 of 13 elements Next specify the destination location Next specify the capacity of a task If you limit how much weight can be in one task then the system will create multiple tasks to distribute the weight across tasks Multiple Pick Task Setup Picking Capacity Please define the maximum capacity allowed in one pick task Specify maximum weight 200 00 Poundlb Specify maximum volume Specify maximum number of pieces In the next screen the system generates the tasks for you to review 493 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES FULFILL A MULTIPLE PICK TASK USING A MOBILE LOCATION Click Finish to save the tasks and complete the wizard The system creates the tasks for you and create a Movement document in the Cargo Movements list Now users can complete the tasks with the handheld scanners Fulfill a Multiple Pick Task using a Mobile Location 494 If you use a mobile location such as a forklift or cart to complete a task the WMS Mobile application will begin the same way for any Pick task and then it will give you a screen to move the items to the mobile location For example you scan an item and the location such as a shelf or rack and then scan the mobile location such as the cart Then you move the items to the final location and scan that final location as you remove the items from the cart and place them in their final location To
340. o another If you don t make Quotations you will need to know how to create and issue an order to pick up cargo Let s look at how to create a Pickup Order from scratch Note For an introduction to creating transactions in your Magaya system for picking up cargo including learning about document templates see the topic Introduction to Pickup Orders in the Magaya Knowledgebase available in Page One the welcome screen in your software To create a Pickup Order go to the Warehousing folder and click Pickup Orders Note You can create a Pickup Order from the list view or the docu ment view This topic explains the process from the document view General Tab Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER GENERAL TAB cc 29 In the toolbar click the Add button o O 0 amp amp fF 2G i eS Bick ae Oia Goad Fas fired Hirai red Trend Tu Peh oa Sf 4 bilig igi Hote g a y n a ike Ted H FF Pn di 5 w hf hoe i al r a Drim I7 Pept Bee ado feet fma bodies ai bam rn liper i hi ENT F F z 4 i piia ie i i pae Pickup Order laa mm hpu C Gaol Cm Cor tl Chea a airs PCF ee 1 EEEE se Se I n l E pH Cordage Gade Coma Comrie pee Dedi nei aug hamba PU 66 a ipSa O Eun fon DateTime Cea2v204 03 11 PM of weha Beto ain atte pe DakwTima v RO O21 PM s wen cat oF Cee Dne Obit 00 11 PM EVJE a Li Tii 4i 5 m A mer mm SS Se a E RE __ Empire z
341. ocations After the WR is created using the handheld the next step in the process is to verify the cargo information on the PC by opening that WR and adding charges photos or other details needed as needed Then the receiving process is completed To move items from different Warehouse Receipts to a pallet set the Configu ration option explained in Chapter 16 s configuration section Extra Info If you receive items with the same part number but different Purchase Orders Lot numbers or invoice number the system will make sepa rate line items for each PO or lot or invoice To learn about the different types of tasks to put away cargo or items see the topic Put Away Cargo or Items 369 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE MEASURE Measure Using the Measure option on the handhelds speeds up the process of receiving items that have tracking numbers because it enables you to add item dimensions by using the handheld instead of the PC It only works for items with tracking numbers not for Part Numbers After a manual receive for items with tracking numbers is done click tap Measure to enter item dimensions Magaya 2 0 5121 26850 yi D Warehouse Management System 7 im Count Messages we h Manual Manual Receive Move th Put Away Measure Equipment ad Exit 19020 Administr fs Miami Warehouse 370 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE MEASURE In the
342. ocations can also be mobile such as a truck forklift or a cart These types of equipment can be defined as mobile to improve visibility in the warehouse and the process of moving items When an item is scanned from one location into another the system saves the movement tracing the item every step of the way This is useful also if the battery is exhausted on a handheld scanner all the data about the moved cargo will be saved This process links the equipment with the location enabling it for use with WMS Mobile tasks When an employee needs to use a piece of mobile equip ment they can select it from the WMS Mobile handheld screen You do not need to assign mobile equipment to an employee in the WMS Mobile Users Configuration dialog box An employee can also change from one piece of mobile equipment to another at any time Create a Mobile Location Overview To create a mobile location you will need to perform two steps First create a mobile location in the Locations list and then configure mobile equip ment in the Configuration menu of Magaya Explorer This feature is available in Magaya software 9 3 and above Let s look at these steps in detail 205 MOBILE LOCATIONS CREATE A MOBILE LOCATION Create a Mobile Location 1 Goto Warehousing gt Locations Click Add In the dialog box enter a description of the mobile location such as a name for the cart or forklift Location Identification Code
343. ocations list and right click a receiving type of location Select the package type and enter the number of pieces and dimensions The volume is calculated automatically You can set up the system to display volume or volume weight Units can be set up as pounds lb or as metric units Go to the Maintenance folder and select Configuration If this item is defined in your Magaya system as an Inventory Item Definition then the Units from the definition will popu late automatically here Commodity General Identification EEI Hazardous AMS Notes Attachments Fending wH WiH 5a Part Number Model Lo MMO f Description Package Type Location Pieces Dimension L s Ww s HI By Totals Piece Total Measure Quantity Unit Unitary Value Total Value COMMODITIES ADD COMMODITIES The WR number displays on the top of the tab as WH This example also shows the document prefix of WH with the WR number 85 Pieces Example If you have 1 box with items inside enter 1 in the Pieces field If you need more information about the commodities then enter the Quantity field for example 1 box with 8 pieces If you know the weight of each piece enter it in the Weight Piece field below the dimensions Examples of Pieces inside a Box Dimensions are per piece For example if you have 2 pallets that are both 44L x 44W x 44H each enter 44 x 44 x 44 in the Dimensions fie
344. ocument form If you need to make changes to the form click on the Edit button The items received will have a status of On Hand Note A WR can also be used if items are returned Video Tutorial For a video tutorial illustrating how to receive cargo in the warehouse using your Magaya software see the Learning Center page on www magaya com for the tutorial Creating Warehouse Receipts in the Warehousing group of videos Step by Step Procedure 1 2 Go to the Warehousing folder and click Warehouse Receipts or Ware house Recepits List If you are in the List view click the Add button in the bottom toolbar The Warehouse Receipt dialog box opens e Ifyouare in the document view click the Add button on the top toolbar The Warehouse Receipt dialog box opens Enter information needed on the tabs as shown in the following sections The information entered in the dialog box converts into a Warehouse Receipt document automatically You do not need to type up a document 279 RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT GENERAL TAB General Tab 280 The General tab contains information such as who created this WR and when Select from the dropdown menus as needed 5 Warehouse Receipt Shipper Consignes Events AL O In Process General Mumber wH 133 Date 172014 E Time 9 39 35 AM Erniployee Administrator Dizon lssued By Hil Cargo Company Destina
345. odes from US Customs into Magaya e Go to the Commodity Classifications subfolder under the Warehousing folder Click the Actions button and select Import Schedule B Codes A dialog box opens Import the new codes these codes are available on the US Census website www census gov and from the US Customs website www cbp gov Data Import Commodity Classification list Description Import CY Import AML View Document Countries outside the U S can import their codes instead of using US Schedule B codes by using the Data Import function Other Actions available with the Actions button 202 PACKAGE TYPES INTRODUCTION TO PACKAGE TYPES To view the Export Codes only select Export Codes To view License Type Codes select License Type Codes Package Types Introduction to Package Types Magaya software includes a list of default package types If you need to customize package types you can do this in the Package Types list located in the Warehousing folder BG 4 4 Warehousing P Pickup Orders P Pickup Order List EA warehouse Receipts EA Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List Me Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List Eri Cargo Movements 8 Cargo Movement List P7 Package Types Locations T Inventory Item Definitions Eh Commodity Classifications W Shipment List i work Load i In Transit Note Your view of the Warehousing folder may vary from this screensho
346. of the list or click the Task button when in a transaction such as a Pickup Order and fill in the information to send a Task to an employee NOTE The toolbar on the bottom is the same for Pending and History Tasks Reports of Tasks Reports about the tasks can be made via the Actions button such as a report to see how long it took an employee to perform a task By Status By Type By Subject By Owner By Employee By Transaction Type gt By Transaction Number Import Export Choose Columns P y le Filter Actions Detail Tasks for Magaya WMS Mobile To send tasks to handheld wireless devices running the Magaya WMS Mobile application click the Task button when viewing a document such as a Warehouse Receipt Cargo Release or Shipment 97 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS QUOTATIONS FOLDER transaction The arrow on the side of the Task button displays a submenu of options To learn more about using handhelds for scanning bar codes please see the user manual for the Magaya Supply Chain Solution or Magaya WMS Quotations Folder Quotations are cost estimates for your customers of the services you provide The Quotations folder contains Quotations This subfolder displays the quotation document Quotations List This subfolder displays the list of quotations and their status The toolbar on the bottom contains buttons that allow you to add a new quota tion edit an existing
347. older or in the Transac tion List Now that bill needs to be linked to that Pickup Order Right click the bill in the Transaction List and select Link or you click the Actions button in the Trans action List find the bill and select it to link it There are many options You can add some charges to the Pickup Order when you create it or not You can post them at the time you create the Pickup Order 337 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT OTHER ACTIONS Other Actions 338 or not You can add charges later and generate them later You can link them when you create them or link them later We recommend that you generate the charges when you need them For example the generating will often be done when the cargo is released so charges can be added to the Cargo Release and generate link and post them Expenses Bills from carriers are often added later and will need to be linked to the operations transaction If you don t generate the charges they are Open and unlinked Then if you convert the PU Order into a WR the charges will NOT show in the WR Charges tab because they re NOT linked You can link them by either returning to the PU Order and generate them on the Charges tab OR by adding a Cargo Release or Shipment and the charges will show up in those transactions as Open until you press the Generate button You can perform other actions from the document view or list view of a Ware house
348. omization Manual 154 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Users with Administrative rights can access the Configuration menu Other users can be given specific rights and roles to configure certain features in the system See the Permissions and Roles topics for more HVAC Carpo Company Magaya Explorer File Edt Sales Operations Maantenance Shipment Wagaya Network Accounting Reports Options Help gt brad a ay 7 4 To a 4 ce Back Air Ocean Ground Find Hetarik u Page One z origin atic H Magaya Network BHE Tasks General ta Quotations Gerea 1 jabs im Jobs lt Create Everts Gulomabealhy Purchasing n E Sala A J Show beaming bos sind hris recommended 9 Booking i re HE Warehousing Company Type Damman options to this computer E id aidienance a Fil iets Fi reverse onder Carrieri EL Lit the guartly al shown dems pa list bo O00 T Forearding gents B Warehouse Providers Ciocia Wiorkeng Data Pend Futh j Muribers vender E S Salespersons Start Daie End Dahe Ez Enuployee i allen 4 Post Salts oy Enable chinese encoding for document is ar Le le ea Automatic pio Aten Change H Accounting of Outgoing Shiprrents J Incoming Shipreents Hi Miscellaneous Fara Pires Magaya WMS Mobile User Interface The Magaya WMS Mobile application runs on handheld devices It is designed to work with the Magaya WMS software and with th
349. ommodity List and in the Cargo Movements List in the Warehousing folder In those lists you can choose additional columns from the Actions button including current location and previous location of items 384 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE If you have more than one warehouse the information about that warehouse can be entered in your database so you can transfer items between warehouses Perform Move Task on the Magaya WMS Mobile Device Follow these steps to complete the Move task on the handheld device This process is also called an Informed Move 1 Click on the Move icon on the screen J MAGAYA uy Lis Warehouse Management System W Mobile m W fa hal Receive Move 3 Pick Load Count 1 gt BY B amp B g Messages Yiew Manual Manual Manual Put Receive Move Away T D ajl ms en Guided Put Put Away Measure Pictures eae Equipment Exit 19020 WMSUser Scanner Enabled Maca wnsmoe OES This example shows 3 Move tasks pending 385 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE 2 Select the Move task you will perform The first of the three Move tasks appears in this example To see another task click the arrow buttons on the bottom of the screen The screen tells you the existing location the quantity of items there and
350. ompletes the Startup Wizard Click Finish The system is now ready to use We recommend launching the Accounting wizard from the File menu next Details and tips for getting started are available in the Magaya Cargo System Operations User Manual 58 STARTUP WIZARD ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS Additional Startup Wizard Tips This section explains the fields in the Startup Wizard such as Customs codes and how to select carriers and ports This screen saves your company s codes so you do not have to enter them every time you create a shipping transaction Startup Wizard Company s Registration Codes Enter your company s IATA FMC and SOAC codes JATA code FMC SCAC code or US Customs code TSA Number IATA code International Air Transport Association a 3 digit alpha numeric code used to identify airline carriers FMC code Federal Maritime Commission The FMC regulates ocean commerce and shipping laws for ocean borne transportation in the foreign commerce of the U S SCAC Standard Carrier Alpha Code or US Customs code The SCAC code is a 4 digit alphabetic code used to identify ocean and or land carriers TSA number Transportation Security Administration number In the Currency screen Select the currency that you use the local home currency If your company uses more than one currency it is necessary to click in the box Yes my company works with more than one currency
351. on dimensions identification and custom fields if any Warehouse Item Item Dimensions Identification Cust Fields Part 12 PIPE S40 J Tracking Description P C Pipe Schedule 40 Quantity eB fF Is Palletized Amount of identical iterns How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE 6 When you click the Quantity button another screen opens where you can manually enter the number of items to move Click OK to return to the list of items 7 When all the items are checked off click the Move button This will open a screen to scan or enter the destination where the items are moving 389 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MANUAL MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE 8 Click OK when done You can print labels if needed Print Labels h The following items do not have labels Do you want to print them Perform Manual Move Task on the Magaya WMS Mobile Device This process is started and completed on the handheld devices using the Magaya WMS Mobile application not the PC 390 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS PERFORM MANUAL MOVE TASK ON THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE A Manual Move is also called an Uninformed Move For this example we ll move some items from the Receiving area by following these steps 1 On the handheld device click on the Manual Move icon Receive Mo
352. on the Main Menu toolbar have dropdown menus with options The following list provides a brief overview of the options all of these functions are explained throughout the manual File Use this to access the wizards for Startup for Accounting and the My Company Info wizard Also use File to set employee permissions for MENUS AND TOOLBARS MAIN MENU administrators to create new folders or shipments and to view your Magaya software licenses and services To download a new document or label template click File gt Download Document Use this to get a document you customized yourself or had Magaya Corporation customize for you Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Sh My Company Info startup Wizard Accounting Wizard Download Document Mer Print Ctrl P Print with Fiscal Printer Print Setup Print Previews Print Labels Print Pallet IDs select image capture device Permissions ts Licenses and Services save Copy As Export to XML Save to PORT Exit The functions highlighted depend on what you are viewing such as a document or alist You can save a copy of the document you are viewing export it to XML or save it as a PDF Edit To copy paste and edit undo delete rename and find You can also view the properties of any folder or subfolder you select Sales For Quotations Operations Lists the same operations that are under the Warehousing folder suc
353. on the handheld devices o Put Away Similar to a Manual Move this works with a default receiving location which speeds up the process of putting away items o Manual Put Away This speeds up the process of putting away items during a manual receiving process A Default Receiving Location must be set in the Locations list Then scanning the item barcode and the destina tion location barcode are the same as during a Manual Receive 160 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW OF WMS MOBILE FUNCTIONS e Guided Put Away This enables receiving and putting away items by suggesting locations based on configured Location Definitions Pick Use this to move items from their current location to a Quality Control area so they can be shipped out Load This is used to move items from their current location or from the Quality Control area out the door Count Use this to perform physical inventory counts and cycle counts e Messages Click the Messages icon to view any pending messages e Manual Receive Use this to receive cargo without a task identifying the incoming items This process is also called Blind Receiving or Unin formed e View Click the View icon on the main screen to see details of any item pallet or location In the screen that opens scan the item pallet or loca tion barcode Then the details of the item will display You can also print the WR label or a Packing Slip for a selected item
354. ons Jay A3 CI RECEIVING Commodity Classifications 394 File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance 3 Jobs GO 2 2 Back Air Ocean TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES STEPS Shipment Magawa Network Accounting Reports es 5 3 T i Ground Find Warehouse Inspector ao emg amp Find Location Find Items Filter Wf Bookings Move WE Pickup Orders Warehouse details Locations Al EP Pickup Order List Miami Warehouse i Warehouse Receipts Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List Me Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List s Cargo Movements s Largo Movement List I Package Types Locations Ef Warehouse Inspector w Inventory Organizer T Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications Shipment List i Work Load ES re In Transit E3 rB Maintenance Accounting H E Outgoing Shipments Hl Incoming Shipments E fi Miscellaneous E One amp H Zone B Jay OCA J ace Sift RECA W 4 23 clamps 12 00 12 00 12 00in Carte W 7 43 Patio barstools 65 00 40 00 40 001 W E 43 Patio tables 97 00 45 00 29 00in W 5 43 Patio tables 87 00 45 0028 00in WP 20 43 Patio chairs 45 00 55 00 12 00in W 5 WH 5 Tree staking twine 250 00 15 W 25 WH 64 bolts 12 00 12 00 12 00in E W 12 WH 6 light bulbs 6 00 6 00 6 00in D 25 WH 84 Nike AirMax running shoes 1 E 1 WH 84 Pallet of Sports shoes 44
355. ooking that is made in your Magaya system If this transaction includes a preferred mode of transportation select it from the dropdown menu The preferred mode field is filled automatically if this trans action was created online in LiveTrack by a user who entered a preferred mode of transport The Preferred Mode of Transportation on the Carrier s tab is also connected to the Rates in your system if you have rates set up If you do have rates in your Magaya system then select the Preferred Mode of Transportation on the Carrier s tab in order to tell the system which rate to use such as the Ground rate 253 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB for this transaction The system also takes into consideration the origin and destination and other criteria in the rate Commodities Tab 254 In the Commodities tab you can add commodities or a container A commodity can be a Part Number that s already defined in your Magaya system or it can be loose cargo that you describe now as you enter it There are a lot of functions on this tab so let s discuss one at a time E Pickup Order mE General Shipper Consignee Suppl Carirs Commodities oa Description Pieces Package Lengt Add Laptop 5 Small Book 12 ae Edit Delete The Commodities Tab Detail Repack Unpack ae ee Car Totals Volume 5 00 fF 52 05 lb 5 Pieces Weight 0 00 ka 0 00 Ib The f
356. op 5 Fill in reverse order Mark all m Iter Definitions Filter Standard nmark all Tterns Filter Standard Tecez ltem Definitions Filter Advanced Eiern Tterns Filter Adwancedi am ind Item Definition Filter Eim Fes Ty Match all conditions C Match at least one condition Part Humber Description Model Package Client Manufacturer The Items Filter opens the Commodities filter dialog box with many 464 options Commodities Filter Filter Type Match all conditions Match at least one condition P O Number Invoice Number WHA Number Status 2 sanye Part Humber Mode of Transport Entry Date From RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE Warehouse Shipper Consignee lssued by Destination Agent Origin Port Destination Pork Exclude subitems H Show subitems only Out Date From Fares Dba Cancel When viewing the Locations shows the Commodities filter and the Ware house Receipts filter open when viewing the WRs After setting a filter the list will show only those items you selected in the filter This is useful to narrow down long lists After you finish using the filtered list you can clear the filter by clicking the red X button Find To search for inventory click the Find button and select to search by number or te
357. or you can process the transaction in your Magaya system by selecting this option Warehouse Receipts Transaction Listing for Warehouse Receipt WVH 153 Transaction Listing for Warehouse Receipt WH 153 Type Number Applied to Date Employee Bill eae UPS FREIGHT SERVICES 0624 2075 Administrator Invoice 19 Arzana Mistrihkrr Oe 24015 Administrator go to document Clear Unclear Transaction Print Batch Link Inwoice Link Bill Unlink Transaction Receive Payment Pay Bill Choose Columns Export History Linking Transactions There are two ways to link an accounting transaction to an operations transac tion for example linking an invoice to a Pickup Order 336 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT LINKING TRANSACTIONS 1 An accounting transaction is linked to an operations transaction if the charges were added in the Charges tab and the accounting was generated from the Charges tab of the operations transaction by clicking the Generate button Generating creates the accounting transactions and changes the status of the charge from Open to Posted Otherwise the charges are just charges that remain open and do not affect any Accounts Receivable A R or Accounts Payable A P balance they re not bills or invoices yet or 2 Create the accounting transaction manually either one of two ways e a Use the Add button in the Transaction List of the operations transac tion such
358. orm the task e Select a due date and time for the task the reminder is optional The Task Type is set to Count WMS by default e Enter a subject for the count task Notes are optional o Click OK to create the Task The created Task is sent to the mobile handheld devices It also appears in the Pending Task list in Magaya Explorer File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Shipment Magaya Network Accounting Reports G6 Oxz 3d p Back Air Ocean Ground m Magaya Network Status Type Subject 5 Tasks ID Pending Generic Task 04 26 2010 Complete sales repor Pending Tasks J In Process Manager w 04 26 2010 Create the weekly req History Tasks Fendi tom Ae O27 2070 E3 a quotations v ata eae WD Pending Count WMS O5 0F 2010 Garden items UD Pendinc Count MMS 05 10 2010 Count Items in ard 429 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM COUNT ON MAGAYA WMS MOBILE DEVICE This task belongs to the Count Session created Perform Count on Magaya WMS Mobile Device To perform a Count task on the Magaya WMS Mobile device follow these steps 1 Click on the Count icon on the menu Receive Move 1 Pick Load Count 3 1 gt amp Bw B amp B Messages View Manual Manual Equipment Receive Move B SS Put Away Measure Eyit 19020 WMSUser Scanner Enabled Magaya WMS Mobile Em Emh Ga Gam This example shows three count tasks are pending 430 2 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY
359. ou have any questions or encounter any problems doing the update please contact Technical Support by phone at 786 845 9150 or online at Magaya com Note There is a video on the Magaya com Learning Center webpage that shows you how to perform an online update 29 UNINSTALL MAGAYA SOFTWARE UPDATE MAGAYA SOFTWARE Uninstall Magaya Software To uninstall Magaya software and the Magaya software client follow these steps 1 Goto the Control Panel 2 Double click Add Remove Programs 3 Select Magaya Software Client and click Remove If any programs are open the system will tell you Note Be sure to remove the Magaya Software Client first according to these steps gt Add or Remove Programs Currently installed programs C Show Magaya Software S Remove the 62 50MB a i Magaya Software Client af Client first 1 71MB Change or Remove Programs Fi Microsoft MET Framework 1 1 Add New if Microsoft MET Framework 2 0 Service Pack 2 Size 185 00ME Programs i Microsoft WET Framework 3 0 Service Pack 2 Size 179 00ME 4 Select Magaya Software and click Remove 5 Click Close when finished Contact Magaya Help Help with the software is available in a few different places and formats for your convenience We know that reading a full user manual isn t for everyone so we also have a searchable knowledgebase that you can access from Page One the welcome scre
360. own before recently used codes will display in the dropdown menu If you have not used it it will be blank Click the plus sign in the dropdown menu to open the HTS search screen In the HTS search screen type in the keywords for the commodity and click the Find button Search through the resulting list of available codes Select the correct one and click the Add button The code moves to the bottom of the 301 COMMODITIES AMS TAB screen Click the OK button to save this and return to the AMS tab of the Commodity dialog box The code is populated into the field Harmonized Tarif Codes Falter transmission Available Codes code Description 843390804 PARTS OF CLUTCHES UNIVERSAL JOINTS PULLEYS FLYWHE gazom GEARS AMD GEARING OTHER THAN TOOTHED WHEELS CHA 8443308065 TRANSMISSION SHAFTS AND CRANES BEARING HOUSINGS 84393308055 TRANSMISSION SHAFTS EEARING HOUSINGS PLAIN SHAFT 493105000 TRARSMISSION SHAFTS AND CRANES EXCEPT CAMSHAFTS 1 7 r i Codes bo be used Code Description External Tracking Numbers Tab Fxternal tracking numbers can be added to the Commodity dialog box To manually enter a number click Add and type it in the field The Type is Other External Tracking Mumbers Tracking Mumber Type ENTER NUMBER HERE Other This allows the user to print labels and identify the items with an external tracking number as well as the Magaya Tracking Number
361. own list of choices use the button with the three dots next to the dropdown s Enter the text of the clause as it will appear on the transaction 332 Internal Notes NOTES AND INTERNAL NOTES INTERNAL NOTES Click OK to return to the Clause List Now the clause is available to use When you select a clause it appears in the Notes list on the Notes tab To delete a note from a transaction select it and press the Delete key on your keyboard or press the Backspace button To delete a clause from the Clause List open the Clause List by clicking on the button with the three dots Select the clause and click the Delete button Internal notes are internal within your company They will not appear in the transactions and will not be visible to the customer Warehouse Receipt Supplier Camer Commodities Changes Events Attachments Notes intemal Notes Custom mh he P ER Created by Last modii Enter Internal Notes here Then click Save and click OK when dona To add Internal Notes e Click on the New button to add an internal note e Enter the note by typing in the field Click Save when you are done The note appears in the list To make changes to an internal note select it and click on the Edit button To delete an internal note select it and click on the Delete button 333 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT INTRODUCTION What Actions can I Per
362. print request is coming Therefore the user under which the Communication Server runs must be a domain user available throughout the network Additionally this domain user should have permissions to print on the desired printer RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE UNINFORMED RECEIVING MANUAL RECEIVING The WMS Mobile print screen has two options Print all non printed labels and Print the following range of labels The first option Print all non printed labels is the default option this option will print any labels that have not already been printed If a label for an item has already been printed requesting a print job with the default option will not yield any labels Instead you should check the second option which allows you to re print the labels Uninformed Receiving Manual Receiving Uninformed Receiving the Manual Receive task is done when the handheld user does not have information about what cargo is coming into the warehouse This process is also called Blind Receiving It is performed on the handheld devices running the Magaya WMS Mobile application To speed up the receiving process with the handhelds be sure to follow the recommendations here for setting Configuration options and also see the topic Put Away The steps for manual receiving vary depending on your WMS Mobile Config uration settings WHS Configure Receiving Settings for WMS Mobile General Inventory Adjustment Direct
363. ption Make Model Serial E mployer Cart 2 Edeal T 942350 Forklift 1 Hyster HO100 Cart Edeal T9425 x Warehouse Equipment General Description Cart 2 Make Edzal Model TA42350 Serial Mobile Location C2 Tasks that can be executed with this equipment f Recewe Move A Pick Count Load Current User Description Enter the name 207 MOBILE LOCATIONS CREATE A MOBILE LOCATION 208 Make Enter the make or brand Model Enter the model number name Serial optional Mobile Location Select the same mobile location that you created previ ously A mobile location can only be assigned to one piece of mobile equipment If you disable that location from the Locations list it won t be available here Tasks All are checked active by default Uncheck any if needed The field Current User will only display a user name when the equip ment is in use by an employee The user can be cleared from this field to release the equipment if the user does not log out of the handheld Click OK to save Now users of the WMS Mobile handheld scanners can select the mobile equip ment they need to use for a task Receive Move Fick Load Count Messages View Manual Manual 1 Receive Move E 9 J Put Away Measure Exit While one employee is using that piece of mobile equipment no other employee can use it until they select another option or None If a user does not need to
364. quotation delete a quotation filter and unfilter the quota tion list and other Actions There is a similar toolbar in all the list views 98 Warehousing Folder Warehousing P Pickup Orders a Pickup Order List Warehouse Receipts i Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List Me Cargo Releases 2 Cargo Release List 8 Cargo Movements K Largo Movement List oe Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector a Inventory Organizer T Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications F Shipment List El Work Load E i In Transit FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS WAREHOUSING FOLDER For example the Magaya Supply Chain Solution contains more functions than the Magaya WMS which focuses on warehousing E i Warehousing EP Pickup Orders P Pickup Order List Warehouse Receipts i Warehouse Receipt List dh Commodity List Me Cargo Releases Me Cargo Release List 3 Cargo Movements lka Cargo Movement List ie Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector T Inventory Item Definitions Commodity Classifications Pickup Orders Warehouse Receipts Commodities lists and classification o Cargo Releases e Cargo Movements document and list view Package Types Locations in the warehouse 99 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS MAINTENANCE FOLDER e Warehouse Inspector for moving and counting items Inventory Item Definitions Maintenance Folder Rates Folder 100 The Maintenance folder contai
365. r d Zebra Printer J Print warehouse item description Measurement l Inita Print company information Q 4 Print consignee name Options for all Caga l phions for all users Insurance Do not create tracking numbers for itema with part numbers Note If using the Zebra printer it must be shared and you will need to enter the computer name and printer name where the printer is located under the port For a current list of document printers that are recommended for Air Waybill printing and for label printers that are compatible with Magaya please contact your Magaya Logistics Advisor Also see the topic Air Waybill Printing Tips in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com Customize Labels Labels can be customized as needed by using the Magaya Document Designer To open the Magaya Document Designer click the Actions button from a docu ment view such as the Cargo Release Click Select Template A dialog box opens Click the New button The Magaya Document Designer opens Select the label to customize This enables you to create a new label To edit an existing label click the Open button in the top menu of the Magaya Document Designer Select the label such as the WMS4x6 and then save it under a new name For full details on working with the Magaya Document Designer search in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com for the keywords Magaya Document Designer or see th
366. rder PickU pO rder df Pickup Order No Changes PickU pO rder H olharge Pickup Order 19020 PickU pOrder 19020 sc Pickup Order for MY OCE PickU pO rde MYOCCL sc Pickup Order Summarized mag PickU pUrderSurr Template Options Another template is available that groups Part Numbers making it easier to read instead of the PNs in a long list Select Pickup Order Summarized If you don t see a template check for the latest ones via File gt Download Document View History To view the history of the cargo release such as a Warehouse Receipt or Invoice for this cargo select the option History A dialog box opens listing all the transactions related to this cargo You can view a transaction by selecting it in the History dialog box The View button opens the dialog box for the transaction The Go To button takes you to the document To return to the Cargo Release use the Back button Additional options are available from the Pickup Order List view also You can also right click on a Pickup Order in the list to access a pop up menu of options For details on working with the list view see the topic Working with Document and List Views For a video showing you how to create a Pickup Order and convert it into a Warehouse Receipt see the Learning Center web page on Magaya com Generate Accounting Transactions from Pickup Orders Magaya Explorer gives you the ability to create accounting transactions such as invoic
367. re you can set the column width order and which columns to E Column Settings Part Number Description Text Model Text Customer Text Manufacturer Text Package Text There are many columns to select from including hazardous materials dimen sions value if items are on hold or not etc 185 CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITIONS LIST 186 To see more details about your inventory quickly click the Detail button to open a panel Panels Summarized Inventory Armving tems E RB 1 Attachments Categories Status Detaled Inventory otal Pieces Available Pieces tory by Wiareh Won Ea canto y Warehouse ar T On Hanok a ana 0 40 D OnHand SILC 13 Choose Columns To group the resale items together select the column 1 Actions gt Choose Columns 2 Inthe dialog box click the Add Columns button to open the Related Columns box 3 Inthe dropdown select the Related Element Sale Item 4 Select Is a resale This is a yes no type of column 5 Click OK to save and close each dialog box and return to the list Resale ltems Column Sale ltercls a resale F Yes Tes Tes Tes Tes Tes Tes es Yes YRS Click the column heading to sort the list and group all the resale items together Detail Button Select the detailed panel you want to view When you click on any inventory item definition the details appear in the panel Note The
368. received the delivery and any 264 PicK UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER POD TAB comments POD is Proof of Delivery It is used when the consignee is not your warehouse Ce FICKUE l oe Tia h P A i d LE 5 med teh Supplier Attachments POD POD Information Delve Date BY 5 2015 ale Delivery Time 17 56 07 AM H Received B Target we Comments all packages in good condition Oe ae Signature appeanhd here after Signature 265 Pick Up CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER NOTES TAB Notes Tab The Notes tab is used for adding notes or clauses to your Pickup Order These notes will be visible to the customer This tab is optional a Suppo Canes Conmochies Changes Events Attachments POD Neve gt emai Notes E Click to select a clause Name Category Notes Damaged Hems Proof of Deire Damaged tema Missing heme Proot ot Deliwery Messing ibems For details on adding Notes including how to define your own clauses see the topic Notes in the Magaya Knowledgebase http knowledge magaya com search notes_and_internal_notes 266 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER INTERNAL NOTES TAB Internal Notes Tab The Internal Notes tab is used to add notes for internal use within your company These not will not appear on the Pickup Order and will not be visible to the customer or carrier This tab is optional E Pi
369. results and click the Add button How to Use How TO USE THE My COMPANY INFO DIALOG Box ADDITIONAL STARTUP WIZARD TIPS If you don t see a carrier in this list you can add it to your Carrier List later To search in the list enter a keyword and click Find Select Aw Carers The LATA codes are used to identity the Intemational Air Carriers a ail search Filter southwest Available Codes Description Select from Add k results CHINA SOUTHWEST SOUTHWEST AIRLINES co CHINA SOUTHWEST AIRLINES SOUTHWEST AIRLINES CO Codes to be used Hame Remove TA British Airways TA Atlas Air Ine Default Carrier List AIR ATLANTIC LTO 55 ATLAS AIR INC T a The Ports screen works the same way enabling easy searching It displays the country of your company as entered in your profile The lists of carriers and ports can be modified at any time by going to the Main tenance folder There is an existing list of ports you can select from or you can manually add your own ports to the list You can also add more carriers in the Maintenance folder gt Carriers Tip You can edit the information by opening the Startup Wizard at any time by clicking on File and selecting Startup Wizard You can also edit information as you work in dialog boxes by clicking the dropdown menu next to the field you want to change Select the button you need on the toolbar that appears the My Company Info Dialog Box
370. rged back into the root sequence Magaya Warehouse Demotion Wizard Affected Locations The locations listed below are all part of the sequence that will be merged Status LI empty LI empty fal Used LI Empty LI empty Description Loc 1 test Receive 1 Ship 2 Empty Ves Ves Mo Ves Ves Type Storage Storage Storage Receiving Shipping fone Test zone 1 Test fone 1 Test fone 1 Test fone 1 Test fone 1 Length fin in Length tin 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 233 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES DEMOTE A WAREHOUSE The next screen gives you the option to choose how to incorporate the locations Magaya Warehouse Demotion Wizard E Organize Locations This screen gives you the choice of incorporating the locations back into the root sequence Pp J Locations can be organized now or at a later time Choosing to organize them later will leave them out of the rook sequence until they are manually added later when would you like to organize the locations C Organize locations later Organize locations now lt Back Next gt Help When you demote a warehouse you can choose where the locations will go For example the locations can return to your main warehouse And you can choose exactly where in the main warehouse such as at the top of the list of locations or at the bottom You also have the option to sequence those locations or not put them in a sequence Options
371. rgo System Operations User Manual When viewing one of the Charges dialog boxes you can choose the columns in the dropdown menus such as for the Charge dropdown or the Freight Service Class dropdown For example you may want to know what type of charge you re looking at Click the dropdown menu and click the Choose Columns button in the toolbar of the dropdown The checkmark the column Type Then view the dropdown menu again to see the types of charges This column CHARGES WORKING WITH THE CHARGES TAB can also be seen in the list of Items amp Services It is helpful to understand the charges especially while learning to use the software Expense Freight Charge Ground Freight Charge Freight Service Class d Click Dropdown Description Description Account Mame Type Ue Apply to Air Freight Service Cost Air Freight Cost Freight ATI Bunker Surcharge Cost Ocean Freight Cost Other Freight BE Paid as Fuel Surcharge Cost Air Freight Cost Other Freight FS Currency Ground Freight Service Cost Ground Freight Cost Freight GR Ocean Frejab aight Cost Freight OK Priori Choose Columns Freight FG Rail Freie Freight RA Security Surcharges ost Insurance Cost Other Freight 5E Mo of Gross Weg a f Fieres lhl a aian PA For Income Charges and Expense Charges Remember Income charges will appear on your customers invoice An expense charge is what you pay your vendor Income Ch
372. rints the labels themselves using the Magaya Online Shipping Orders feature at their location before items are sent to your warehouse the labels will have a Pickup Order number instead of a WR number For more on printing labels see the section Print Labels in the following Knowledgebase article http knowledge magaya com search 2_work_document_and_list 240 ID BY PALLET ID LABEL ID by Pallet ID Label By placing a pallet ID label on a pallet of items the items inside the pallet are identified You can print pallet IDs in advance and use them as needed when creating pallets in the warehouse for storage moving or shipping items out Palletizing items by using the Pallet ID increases warehouse productivity because you only have to scan one bar code the pallet ID label to move the items inside the warehouse To print pallet IDs go to File gt Print Pallet IDs Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magawa Network Accounting Reports Options My Company Info ea gt Startup Wizard Release Print Find Accounting wizard Download Document E gil b bo FY xX First Previous Next Last Add Edit Delete Mew Print Ctrl P Print Setup HVVC Cargo Company ar29 NV 18 Terrace Print Labels Miami FL asl fe Print Pallet IDs z Print Pallet IDs Select image capture device AmourtofPaletIDe 10 devO4 HP Laseslet P2015 Ser USET Permissions Licenses and Services
373. rts Click the Actions button and select the new column name The report document can be saved sent over the Magaya Network or emailed go to Actions gt Reports Toolbars in Document and List Views In the Document view this toolbar is on the top of the document gk 4 WH YP RM amp Bw F amp F A gt a First Prevous Add Edt Delete Find Filter Actions Zoom phos To navigate through documents click the buttons First Previous Next Last Other buttons are Add Edit Delete Find Filter Unfilter Actions Zoom Page and Options The icon on the far left indicates the status of the transaction such as cargo is loaded delivered etc 114 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS BUTTONS ON THE TOOLBARS When you are viewing a list a new toolbar appears at the bottom of the screen lt ire 7 aie Pa i i a F Br t 7 X P r zy L ay ve T cli l 1a Add Filter Actions Detail The buttons on that toolbar also appear on the document view on the top of the document The buttons are Add Edit Delete Filter Unfilter Actions and Detail depending on your permissions Buttons on the Toolbars Many buttons have an arrow on the side of the button Click the arrow to access options The choice in bold is the default that displays if you click the button instead of the arrow When you click a button a dialog box will open After you have entered information in the dialog box click the OK button The dialo
374. ry reports show you what is arriving For information on creating Commodity Reports see the topic How to Create Commodities Reports REPORTS INVENTORY REPORTS MANAGING ITEMS WITH INVENTORY REPORTS To view the information about what pieces are arriving follow these steps to make these columns visible in the Inventory Item Definitions list 1 Goto the Inventory Item Definitions list 2 Click the Actions button and select Choose Columns In the dialog box that opens place a checkmark in the columns you need Column Settings Check the columns that you would like to make visible in thie list Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the columns O ee Up Pieces Arriving Pieces Jt Down Requested Pieces Requested Arving Pleces C Minimum Stock C Schedule B Code t Field Type Decimal C Schedule B Description 7 _ Visible C License Type Word Wrap C Export Code idth 50 C Amount Per Pallet aa CI Unitary Value Align C Sale Item C Purchase Item Precision LI Notes Totalize CI Length in The columns selected in this image will display the following information s Pieces The quantity on hand e Arriving Pieces The quantity of items in Pickup Orders or Purchase Orders that are coming to the warehouse Requested Pieces The quantity of on hand items that are included in Sales Orders Requested Arriving Pieces Of the arriving pieces this is the quan tit
375. ry field is preset based on the country in your company profile Change it as needed Select the port you need and click the Add button It will be added to the list of ports to be used by your Magaya system Selact Ports Country UNITED STATES Fiter Available Ports Code O msy T Ports bo be used Code E BUE H AN H GIG m SAG F hame hew Orleans Mame Biers Aires Antwerpen Hio De Janeiro Internacia Sag Pagh Eli New Orleans feet hod Goes Rail Road Ai Method Ocean Air Mail near Air Mail Road Air Rall Road Air Mal Countries UNITED STATES Countries ARGENTINA BELGILA BRAZIL BRASIL MAINTENANCE FOLDER PORTS To verify a port has the modes of transport you need open it to see the details US Customs Codes Country Fort ID Fort Warne Subdivision Remarks Maritime 3 Rail Road NETHERLANDS RTH Rotterda Transportation Method MF Air Vi Mail X This port is used by my compary Border Crossing Paint Cancel Help When creating transactions that use ports only select ports with the modes you need otherwise you will not be able to use that port in that transaction For example if you create an ocean shipment but try to select a port that does not have ocean access the system will not enable use of t
376. s Shipment List qf Work Load 4 i In Transit 2 Click on the Actions button and select Reports You can choose from many report options such as reports by shipper by warehouse location by part number and others 402 How TO FIND COMMODITIES IN MAGAYA EXPLORER OTHER TYPES OF REPORTS o To email the report click the Email button on the top menu To save the report in your Magaya Explorer click the Actions button and select Save Report To save the report to your computer or another computer in your network click the Actions button and select Export Other Types of Reports The following are different types of reports you can create from the Commodity List See where items are and their previous location See part numbers View all items for a specific export code or Schedule B commodity classi fication See the Customs entry date for items so you can answer Customs ques tions quickly Answer questions about your business such as Which commodities were included in which shipments Which commodities do you ship to which destination ports most often Which division of your company is handling the most cargo and what types For more reports about commodities see also the Accounting folder gt Items amp Services gt Actions button Also see in the Warehousing folder gt Inventory Item Definitions gt Actions button for In and Out Reports How to Find Commodities in Magaya Explorer I
377. s Prepaid Amou USD 2500 Tax USO 0 00 Total Amount LISD 25 00 Cago Release Ep Amioun Du USD 25 00 Cre Make any edits to the transaction if needed You can view the cargo release dialog box or go to the document The screen is similar for Credit Memos Bills and Credits Credit Memo Use this option if you need to issue a credit or a refund to a customer Bill Add a bill of what you need to pay Other Actions WHAT ACTIONS CAN PERFORM WITH A CARGO RELEASE OTHER ACTIONS Credit Use this option if you overpaid a vendor and they give you a credit Link Transactions The Actions button for the Transactions List has the option to link the transaction to a bill or to an invoice or to a Cargo Release You can also unlink it If you created a bill or other accounting transaction separate from the Cargo Release you can link it this way For more details on linking transactions see the following Knowledgebase article http knowledge magaya com search actions_wr You can also receive the payment or pay the bill from the Actions button You can perform other actions from the Cargo Release Actions button Click the button on the side of the Actions button to access the pop up menu i 4 gt E Actions zoom Options Transaction Listing verify Packing List Exclude from Tracking Add to job argo Release w SetfReset In Transit Set Reset Delivered Select Template History x Jul24 201
378. s 16 iw A Doun Air AMS O ee Online Booking Requests 15 e Sent To view sent messages e Ocean Carriers Messages This displays all the messages sent or received directly from ocean carriers using the Magaya Ocean Carriers Interface with INTTRA plug in For details see the topic Magaya Ocean Carriers Interface INTTRA Tasks Folder Tasks can be created for many reasons such as when cargo arrives at your ware house and it needs to be unloaded checked and put away Other types of tasks can be created for other employees not just warehousing and can be used as reminders The Tasks folder contains two subfolders 96 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS TASKS FOLDER Pending Tasks View tasks that are not completed The oldest tasks are on the top of list for easy viewing and the newest are at the bottom File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Shipment MagayaNetwork 4 gt iE ay E E Back Air Ocean Ground F Sl Tasks Pending Tasks L Pending lasks de ee Pending Tasks H A Quotations HG Status Type Date Ape D ID Pending Receive MW MS 05 25 i a Pending Receive WMS 07701 ea a Sales WD Fending Fick WMS 06 20 i Bookings T Pending Notification Alert 06 06 History Tasks View all tasks Select the date range to view or filter the list as needed Click the Detail button to view more about a Task To add a new Task click the Add button in the toolbar at the bottom
379. s dialog box to open the Count Results for Location dialog box Cargo Count List Count Session 0001 Dates From 5 1 2010 To 646 2010 W Status Type Date Part Number Locations Owner Completed Informed 06 14 2010 llene Taylor T Completed Blind 06 03 2010 2 llene Taylor wi Comp eted kanmem E E win WD Completed Cargo Count Details W Completed iyi Completed Locations to be counted Status Location Date Employee Type W Counted AIRE 06 03 2010 WMSLser Blind W Accepted BiLB 0614 2010 WwMSUser Blind Count Results for Location B1LB Status Falet them Code Database Quantity Count Gu WD Processed 6145692 0 1 yi Processed d440 WH 59 2 45 T iyi Processed da4 w H 59 1 35 U WD Processed 125848 0 2 Adjustments History Shows adjustments Select from the Count button Configure Delete Pallet Coun Create Count Task i Counts per Location History Adjustments History Count Tasks History Count Sessions Count Reasons View Found Items View Lost Items 442 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY OTHER COUNTS OPTIONS The Counts Adjustment List dialog box is similar to the dialog box for the Cargo Counts List Double click on the count in that dialog box to open this list Count Adjustment List Count Session 0001 Dates Last monthtodate From 5 1 2200 4 To 6 76 2010 oY Date Pallet ltem Code Serial Description Location 06 14 2010 4A 4C H 59
380. s filtering by Warehouse Receipt number Status Part Number and more The Advanced Filter contains more options than the Standard Filter and the ability to create your own filter To clear a filter click the Unfilter button For details on how to use the Filters see the topic The Filter Button in the Magaya Knowledgebase online or in the PDF user manuals available from Page One the welcome screen in your Magaya software interface WAREHOUSE INSPECTOR CONFIGURE COLUMNS Configure Columns The view of the Item details is set by using the Configure button Move Find Location Find Items Filter Warehouse details Locations ggs ard Status Package 5 Zone B Ja BILA Check the columns that you would like to make visible in this list Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the columns Warehouse Receipt Description Dimensions Fackage C Status C Length fin Field Type Integer C Height fin y Visible This screenshot shows an example of the column settings For the first item in Zone B Location B1LA there are 35 pieces the Warehouse Receipt number is 16 the item description is Baseball gloves the dimensions and the package type are last To change these column settings checkmark the columns you want to display and uncheck the ones to exclude Change the order using the Up and Down arrows Delete Pallet To delete a pallet select the pallet and click on the Delete Pallet button The palle
381. s from any related 109 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS RELATED COLUMNS transaction related entity or other information When you add the column to your WR List that column is automatically available to create reports also The following example explains how to add more columns to your Commodity List When you are looking at your Commodity List you may want to see more information about your commodities Perhaps you want to know the name of the vessel that shipped the commodities The following steps apply to this example and to other lists 1 Go to the Commodity List click the Actions button and select Choose Columns The folders displayed depend on the Magaya software product you have File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting Reports Options 110 ra Magaya Network fl Tasks E3 a Quotations Warehousing E Pickup Orders E Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts i Warehouse Receipt List xX Me Cargo Releases A Cargo Release List Sf Largo Moyvernents ss Largo Movernent List pT Package Types Locations Warehouse Inspector T Inventory Item Definitions i Commodity Classifications E3 rB Maintenance E3 S Accounting i Miscellaneous Receive Go Oo a n p Back Pickup Release Status T On Hand wal Un Hand yi Delivered W On Hand Won Hand Won Hand WD At Desti Pon Hand WD At Desti W At Desti wu Loaded wu Loaded
382. s optional Enter a subject and notes as needed Click OK The task is sent to the WMS Mobile handheld device and will appear in the Pending Tasks list The items included in the Cargo Release are the items that will appear in the WMS Mobile task to be picked Create a Partial Pick Task 484 Overview If a Pick Task will contain many items the task can be done by more than one person With this option you can select the items to include in one Pick task and you can create as many Picks as needed for multiple employees This is useful for large orders or shipments that will require more than one person to complete This will create one Task To create more than one Task run this process again Send Email Task Refresh Folders 5 zy Create Task t Create WMS Move Task Actions Create Partial whey Ss Pick Load Task um WC Cargo Company race Miami FL 331442 UNITED STATES Tek 305 555 fod RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE A PARTIAL PICK TASK Steps In the task screen that opens assign the task as usual In the second screen enter the quantity of pieces for this partial task Partial WMS Pick Load Creation Task Wizard Task items Select the items to be included in this task Items that are already included in another task Status Fackage Description Total Pieces Fz F T Loaded 40 Ft Plattor g lvanized steel sheets p 0
383. s tab have the buttons on the bottom instead of on the right side Let s look at the Commodities tab of a WR in the Magaya Supply Chain Solu tion E Warehouse Receipt Status Descriptor Pieces Package Length Heigh Add On Hand Reebok count shoes womerss b3 Box 12 00 Bl eee Cont W Loaded Hike Aitas tunning shoes 1 Box 16 00 Bf W On Hand Nike Aiiax running shoes 45 Box 18 00 Bl I On Hand Reebok cout shoes womens 2 Box 12 00 Bl d TI Totals Volume 50 35 FP 524 13 Vib 115 Pieces Weight 185 9 kg 410 000 Ib MAGAYTA TIP Note for users of the Magaya Cargo System and Magaya WMS The Commod ities tab will not include the Get PO button because Purchase Orders are only available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and the Magaya Commerce System All other functions on this tab are the same for all the software products Use this tab to add commodities to the WR You can add items by clicking the Add button or the Scan button Let s look at each button and its function Placing Items On Hold 287 COMMODITIES ADD COMMODITIES Extra If a customer has not paid you can place commodities on hold Right click on the item in the list to select the menu option Warehouse Receipt ShipperConsignee Supplier Carrier Commodities Charges Status Description Pieces Package T On Hand dell tablets F W Loaded Reports v auaues Choo
384. scanner F AAT s PEF rF The scanner will populate all the fields that describe the item such as its dimen sions based on the information entered into the Magaya system when the Inven tory Item Definition was created The item will be added to the list in the WR Tip If you are receiving more than one package of the same commodity you can right click on the commodity in the WR dialog box and click Add Copy 306 COMMODITIES SCAN BAR CODES TO ENTER COMMODITIES Then you can edit any details inside the Commodity dialog box for that package such as if the weight is different from the first package Other functions you can perform with the bar code scanner are releasing cargo see Chapter 9 of the Magaya Cargo System Operations Manual or Chapter 13 of the Magaya WMS Operations Manual and verifying packing lists in ship ments see Chapter 14 of the Magaya Cargo System Operations Manual To place items inside a pallet select an item and click the Repack button Steps for using the Repacking Wizard are explained in the section Repacking Cargo Other buttons on the WR dialog box include Edit Delete Detail or Unpack To use one of these functions select the commodity and click the button you need Use the Detail button to view the items inside an existing pallet or to add more items to it If you select an item that is not a pallet and click the Detail button the system will tell you The number of pieces mus
385. se zones and locations are now available to use when you receive cargo and put it away in your warehouse For example when you create a Warehouse Receipt you can select the location from the Commodities dialog box on the Commodities tab of the WR The Location field has a dropdown menu all the locations entered are available from this dropdown You can also set a Default Receiving location by right clicking a Receiving location in your Locations list this saves a step when receiving items You can also use the location information to create a report by warehouse loca tion by using the Actions button in the Commodity List under the Ware housing folder 189 How TO CREATE WAREHOUSE ZONES WAREHOUSE ZONES OVERVIEW How to Create Warehouse Zones Warehouse Zones Overview Warehouse Zones are the larger areas in the warehouse that contain smaller locations For example a zone may be a row with many locations for each level and section of the row A zone may also have more than one row Other examples of zones If you have a yard the yard may be one zone with two or more locations inside it If you have more than one warehouse you can define each one as a zone and then promote it to a warehouse by using the Warehouse Promotion Wizard from the Warehouse Inspector screen This feature is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and Magaya WMS Learn more in the topic Sequencing in the Warehouse Tip Add zones f
386. se Colurnns a Tae Export Right click an item DP On Hand History for pop up menu D On Hand Add Copies Pallet ID Print Packing Slip Print All Packing Slips 4 Print Label Totals Click the On Hold option In the dialog box that opens check the box to place the item on hold Select a clause from the list or add a new one optional To see which items in the WR List are on hold select the column On Hold from the Choose Columns dialog box via the Actions button You can also make a report of all On Hold items from the Actions button Add Commodities To receive items click the Add button to add a commodity Add Vehicle R Add Pieces Length in Height in Click Add _ Select from the pop up menu Detail 288 COMMODITIES ADD COMMODITIES If you have the Magaya VIN Decoder plug in the Add button will display an option to add a vehicle Then scan the vehicle s bar code If you don t have this plug in you won t see this pop up It is recommended that you start entering data on the first tab the General tab and enter all the information that you need Extra Info To copy an item after you enter it right click on the item in the WR s Commodity tab and select Add Copies from the pop up menu Warehouse Receipt Carrier Commodities Charges Sae Package Description Pieces Ler T O
387. se the Quotations folder and functions C Ocean Ocean Shipment Division mw Air Air shipment division C Students This group gives permissions for students Cancel lp 5 Click the OK button Now the employee belongs to that group 72 PERMISSIONS How TO SET PERMISSIONS 3 Assign Group Permissions per Folder 1 Select the folder or subfolder to assign permissions for example Ware housing File Edit Sales Operations Main Eel Tasks a Quotations H E Jobs a E Purchasing a E Sales H A Bookings Ee Warehousing Pickup Orders E EP Pickup Order List i Warehouse Receipts a Warehouse Receipt List i Commodity List tee Me Cargo Releases fll Cargo Release List m Cargo Movements Cargo Movement List vee a Inventory Organizer gt T Inventory Item Definitions PERMISSIONS How TO SET PERMISSIONS 2 Goto File gt Permissions wis Edit Sales Operations My Company Info Startup Wizard Accounting Wizard Download Document Mew Print Frink Fallet IDs Permissions Licenses and Services Exit Select image capture device Maintenance Ctrl F 3 Inthe dialog box click the Add button to add a group Permissions for Warehousing Groups membership Hame Create Read Edit we Account Payable No We Account Recervable No AA arehousemnern C Evernone Mo WS Administrators Yes C Operations Yes C Exporters Yes Apply t
388. section Linking Transactions Usually the staff in the warehouse don t generate the accounting The generating will often be done when the cargo is released so charges can be added to the Cargo Release and generate link and post them Charges Bills from carriers are often added later and will need to be linked to the operations transaction Magaya Explorer links the transactions and transfers the information from one transaction to another For example when charges are entered in the Charges tab the charges remain Open are not posted to the Accounting system until you click the Generate button or they are liquidated Then they are Posted After the charges are generated or liquidated the system will collect all the charges and group them and create invoices for each customer The charges that will go to bills are also grouped and bills are created for each vendor Then these are posted into the Accounting system D Confirm Accounting Generation el The following Garsactors were genetated please verify them and click on OF to add the tarnsactons bo your accounting Others cick on Lancel to abort the opershon and hk the problem Type Number Applied bo Data Empiiygeg Account Hame Debi USO Cred USD mace 182 ABC Sporting Goods 11 26 2014 Adminis Accounts Recers 136 04 Bill 219 UPS Geournd 11 26 2014 Adminisvabor Accounts Payable 6g pg Confirm Accounting Transactions Date ior Trangacions 11 26 2014 Expense Income
389. sed OCA Guality Contr Default Receming Location alts Empty FL1 Forklift 1 pile lal Used DMA Demurrage Import ac fal Used COLE Cold Storage Export ac CI Empty C2 Cart 2 bile LI Empty C1 Cart 1 Choose Colurnrgs bile TT E rambi RPF Trana m A aii Arar al 1 7 Add Edit Delete Filter Actions Detail In the list that opens click the Add button and enter the following information in the Location Definitions dialog box LOCATION DEFINITIONS STEPS TO DEFINE LOCATIONS 3 Options tab Enter the description information as noted below E Location Definition E Options Item Definitions Quantity Mame Location Type Storage imensions Maximum W eight Special Options Needs equipment Allows loose cargo Allows repacked items Can mix repacked items we Name Enter a descriptive name that will be easy to identify later Location Type Select from the dropdown menu E Location Definition Options Item Definitions Quantity Mame Location Type Receivin Replenishment k Picking Quality Control Shipping Mobile Other Dimensions The Dimensions field enables you to add dimensions of that 211 LOCATION DEFINITIONS STEPS TO DEFINE LOCATIONS location into your Magaya system Click the Dimensions dropdown menu If this is the first time using this feature there will not be any dimensions in the dropdown menu After you enter dimensions they will be available
390. select Print Batch You can also right click on the selected transactions and choose Print Batch Select documents and right click to print the batch Status Number Date Shipper Consignee PL 56 1026 2013 10 21 2013 ABC Sporting Goods Inc ABC Sporting Go PO 54 OF 5 2013 Miam Automotive Supple Santos Auto Plan PU 53 Reports ary Art Basel Gallery PU 52 apy Bill s Storage Unit PU 51 Customer Mian Test Custo a Biscayne Bike 5 T On Hand PU 49 Create Warehouse Receipt an Shop Miami Distribution u Empty PU 46 ee ture Co Houston Vv arena 7 In Process PU 47 tiye Suppliers Santos Auto Plan T Aming PU 46 Is Miami Distribution T Aing PU 45 caping HWE Cargo Comp T Arriving PU 44 caping Orlando Garden 5 Choose Columns Import Export Statistics 122 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS BATCH PRINT A print wizard opens Batch Printing Wizard Welcome to the Batch Printing Wizard Paara take amamen bo seati the doaTe jou hauki kka bo print This wizard vel sllew you to configure printer for each document and wall oeste a print job for each different printer you pekat Click Next to begin In the next screen there is an option to select other templates and printer or use the defaults Batch Printing Wizard Document Selection Please select all the documents that you would like to print You can also gas change the printer settings For one or more documents at
391. set permissions for employees users 1 Define the groups in your company 2 Assign employees to the groups 3 Assign permissions to groups per folder Only administrators can set permissions If the menu option File gt Permis sions is grayed out then you do not have administrator rights on that computer 1 Define Groups 69 PERMISSIONS How TO SET PERMISSIONS 70 Magaya software comes with some default groups You can add more or edit a default group as needed for your company 1 Goto Maintenance gt Employees 2 Click Actions and select Access Groups File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Shipment Magaya Network Accounting Rep Print Back Air Ocean Ground amp Employees Tasks Mame ae Quotations POD User aie Jobs amp llene Taylor a Purchasing a Operations Staff 1 a A qales a Accountant H f Bookings amp AP Clerk Ee A Warehousing 2 AR Clerk E l Exporter 2 ge Maintenance ive r Carriers a Exporter 1 2 Warehouse Provider pi WMS User ai 3 Customers a Administrator a 3 Vendors al Operations Manager E Salespersons amp Operations Stati a Contacts I LE Employees aA nor x lt P i lt gt ma Other Reports Transactions Listing Open Transactions Create From eMail Signature Roles view All Roles System Roles a Warehouse Employee 1 a F ding Agent AB Forwarding Agents E Divisions Choose Col
392. signed a piece of equipment to a user the user will see this screen User Identification Please enter your current working Fone and equipment Facility Building 7 one Miami Warehouse Equipment Select the facility and piece of equipment For more details on mobile equip ment see Chapter 7 of the Magaya WMS User Manual Steps for giving employees access to the Magaya WMS Mobile application are explained in the section Configure WMS in Chapter 4 WMS Mobile Setup of the Magaya WMS Operations Manual If a user is logged into another mobile device the system asks if they want to end the other session Click the checkbox Yes login and terminate the other session This will save any work done on that device Mobile 45 4602 16245 You are already logged in to another device Are you sure you want to proceed Yes login and terminate L the other session 157 MAGAYA WMS MOBILE USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW OF THE MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INTERFACE 158 After logging in the next screen is the main menu where all the Magaya WMS Mobile application functions are accessed le Receve Put Away Move a Lii Picle 1 Count eo B Messages Manual Li Receive B g Manual Manual Puk Guided Put This screenshot shows the Magaya WMS Mobile application running on the Microsoft Windows CE operating system OS The Microsoft Windows icon on the task bar can be clicked on to access other programs th
393. some of your company data to customize the software and documents to your needs See this manual for more on initial configuration and navigating the user interface We also recommend reading Chapter 8 in the Magaya Software Customization Manual which provides information about customizing the software to your 31 CONTACT MAGAYA HELP NEXT STEPS 32 needs especially useful for systems administrators and managers Database admin topics include o Creating backups of your Magaya database Improving database performance Server authentication CHAPTER 4 WMS MOBILE SETUP INTRODUCTION WMS MOBILE AND WIRELESS SETUP Chapter 4 WMS Mobile Setup Introduction WMS Mobile and Wireless Setup This chapter explains how to set up the wireless infrastructure for the WMS Mobile application that runs on handheld devices how to configure the hand held devices per user perform an initial inventory set up and view messages If you are moving from the Magaya Cargo System to the Magaya WMS or Magaya Supply Chain Solution you will need to perform certain steps to set a location for each item in your warehouse Steps are also explained for those new to the software Wireless Infrastructure Setup and Hardware Requirements The main requirement for using Magaya WMS Mobile is to have a wireless infrastructure in the facility where it is going to be used The handheld devices need to be wirelessly connected to the server computer running the M
394. ss to shut down and count the stock Cargo Count List Count Session 0001 Dates Last monthto date From 5 1 2010 To 646 2010 Status Type Date Part Number Locations Owner Completed Informed 06 14 2010 llene Taylor T Completed Blind 06 03 2010 2 llene Taylor T Comt eted oe Eo in a Completed eet EEE yi Completed B Completed Count Type Locations to be counted Status Location Date Emplovee Type W counted AIRE 06 03 2010 WMSLser Blind yi Accepted B1iLB 0614 2010 Wh5User Blind Count Results for Location B1LB M Status Pallet them Code Database Quantity Count Qu W Processed 6145692 0 1 iyi Processed dA40 WH 59 2 45 T T Processed da4 w H 59 1 35 T W Processed 125848 0 2 Inventory is considered an asset by a company There are different types of assets such as the company land buildings furniture cash etc but inventory here means the goods for sale in the warehouse Counting the inventory provides the company with a value of the inventory which is put on the company s balance sheet and used for tax assessment A cycle count must be completed and reported to the company s accounting department in time for the company to file its taxes This timeframe is set by the accounting and or finance department and it may be 3 months 6 months or some other time frame Depending on what the company wants to know about its inventory will
395. stination is the Receiving area in the Houston Warehouse Cargo Movement Wizard Select Destination Location or Pallet Select the destination location or pallet where the selected cargo will be placed F the pallet does not exist you can create one in the selected location Location Locations Non empty FE Student 2 Warehouse Find Items Rs Student 1 Warehouse Miami Warehouse Mark group Ti OMe A RR Zone B Unmark group E COLD tl DMR Filter E E E El l l Unfilter 9 23 22 wire cutters small 48 00 32 00x42 00in T l 7 Shimano components 23 0016 00x9 00in T 1 7 Shimano components 23 0016 00x9 00in f Bi Create Pallet E RECA ff RECE a i Mobile Locations H E Houston Warehouse E a Yard Miami MAGAYA TIP In the last screen of the Cargo Movement wizard e Assign the Move task to a WMS Mobile user You can also click Commit changes right away This will assign a status of Completed to the Move in your database and show the items in the destination location e Select the Movement Type Transfer The system will create the Warehouse Transfer document automatically This document can be used as a Straight Bill of Lading for the driver 397 TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES TRANSFER ITEMS BETWEEN WAREHOUSES STEPS Select the Mobile Location T1 Cargo Movement Wizard Create Task or Commit
396. t m i Yard Miami 0 00 b cee Default Zone volume 0 00 ft lt Back canes ee s To view items expand the locations or use the Find Items button See the section for more details You can view locations that are empty non empty or non counted e Select the items you want to move You can move individual items or multiple items at one time To move only some of the pieces select the item and click on the Pieces button Enter the quantity to move To move all the items in one location click the location and click the Mark Group button The Mark All button is only active after you select a Location in the warehouse All items in that Loca tion are available to be selected except those in Pending Tasks or On Hold 381 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS CREATE A MOVE TASK INFORMED MOVES Click the Next button 2 On the next screen select the destination location or pallet Cargo Movement Wizard Ea Select Destination Location or Pallet Select the destination location or pallet where the selected cargo will be placed IF the pallet does not exist you can create one in the selected location i Location Locations Student 2 Warehouse Ss Student 1 Warehouse Miami Warehouse Mark group Mobile Locations Houston Warehouse Unmark group Ei QZ i Ei Ri eal a Unfilter fa oo 53 24 O Rings 20 00 33 00 12 00in Box Find Items E E Filter E E H E
397. t ments can also be done from the Warehouse Receipt list the Cargo Release list or the Inventory Item Definitions list The results show on the company Balance Sheet in Magaya This process applies to resale inventory you own This section explains the Configuration menu options The inventory adjust ment process is explained in the section Perform an Inventory Adjustment 423 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY CONFIGURE INVENTORY ADJUSTMENTS 424 Set your preferences in the Maintenance folder gt Configuration gt WMS Inventory Adjustment Account Inventory Adjustment Scrapped Inventory Account Scrapped Inventory Inventory Adjustment Vendor Inventory Adjustment Vendor Ww Inventory Adjustment Client Inventory Adjustment Client v Define maximum number of charges per inventory adjustment transaction Start inventory adjustment wizard when count session is closed Note The system includes these accounts as recommended accounts to use You can choose other accounts if you prefer Inventory Adjustment Account This is the equity account used in the system for inventory items when they are first entered in the system and when they are found after a Count Session It offsets the amount added to the Inventory Asset account Scrapped Inventory Account This is an expense account used to account for inventory that is lost stolen damaged or scrapped It offsets the amount added to the Inventory Asset account Inv
398. t be 1 to edit the detail of an item When you build a pallet and place items in it the icon in the WR commodity list will change to a pallet icon to indicate items are inside a pallet Status Fackage Description UI Pending Bow Baseball bats ie Pending Pallet baseball gloves This icon is a pallet with items inside In additon to the pallet icon Magaya Explorer has other icons to indicate status of cargo W Empty T Amving U Pending T On Hand 7 In Process T In Transit T At Destination T Delivered Yellow is In Process or Ordered Aqua is On Hand in the warehouse Purple is Loaded in a shipment Light Green is In Transit Dark Green is Arriving Blue is Delivered 307 COMMODITIES REPACKING CARGO To take items out of a pallet click the Unpack button in the Commodities screen The individual items will be listed on the commodity list The icon will change to indicate the commodities are not inside a pallet You can adjust the columns as needed by clicking and dragging the column to widen it or narrow it The total weight volume and number of pieces displays on the bottom of the screen Repacking Cargo Use the Repack button to repack items as needed A wizard opens with fields to enter the information about the container You can select the type of container including boxes and pallets Repacking Wizard Select Container Step 1 of 2 Please select the container type to
399. t due to your permissions and software product There are different reasons why a custom package type would be needed For example if you build your own pallets enter the dimensions into your Magaya system so the dimensions are automatically filled in when you add that pallet to a shipment 203 PACKAGE TYPES How TO CUSTOMIZE A PACKAGE TYPE How to Customize a Package Type To create a custom package type follow these steps 1 Click the Add button A dialog box opens with two tabs Description and Dimensions The fields change based on the type of package you select from the dropdown menu 2 Enter information in the Description tab On this tab certain fields appear depending on the type of package you select from the Type dropdown menu If you select Container the fields for the container code and equip ment type become available To specify air ocean or ground click the button with the three dots next to the dropdown menu to select a code or type If you choose another package type such as Crate the container fields are not available 3 On the Dimensions tab enter the package dimensions Now the package type is available for use in your Magaya system You can also add or edit a package type while you are adding commodities to a Pickup Order Warehouse Receipt or Shipment 204 MOBILE LOCATIONS INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE LOCATIONS Mobile Locations Introduction to Mobile Locations L
400. t helps you apply a method to all the locations in bulk instead of one by one In the next screen you can fine tune that method by rearranging individual locations Options for sorting include alphabetical height or weight This sequence can be applied to the process of picking items to release them In the next screen you will see an option to apply the sequence to the process of putting away items also This setting will give preference to the locations at the top of the list first Magaya Warehouse Promotion Wizard Bulk Location Sort This screen will help you sort the locations at a high level This makes it easier when manually arranging the locations in the next screen Choose one of the Following as a high level sort of the locations in this warehouse C Alphabetically ascending C Alphabetically descending C Fullest bo emptiest Ernptiest to fullest C Lowest to highest C Highest to lowest C Heaviest to lightest C Lightest to heaviest lt Back next gt J cowo Hep 227 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES USING THE WAREHOUSE PROMOTION WIZARD The options in the Bulk Location Sort screen include Alphabetical select either ascending this will result in an A Z order with A at the top or select descending this will result in a Z A order with Z at the top Note The Magaya system arranges locations in alphabetical order A Z by default Capacity Sort to give preference to fill the fullest loca
401. t must be empty Reports to Manage Items There are many types of reports to help you manage items that are in the ware house and in a different status such as Arriving 379 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS INTRODUCTION TO MOVING ITEMS WITHIN THE WAREHOUSE Access item reports by right clicking an item in the Detail tab of the Warehouse Inspector screen Other reports about Locations or Zones are available from those lists in the Warehousing folder via the Actions button Also see the Commodity List for more reports See the following topics in the Knowledgebase to learn more about each report o Commodity List and reports Cargo In and Out Reports o Inventory Reports How to Manage amp Move Warehouse Items Introduction to Moving Items within the Warehouse To move items within the warehouse the software has two options 1 Use the Cargo Movement Wizard in the Warehouse Inspector and send the Move task to the Magaya WMS Mobile application on the wireless handheld devices or 2 Start a Manual Move task on the handheld device The advantage of using the wizard is all the information about the items is in your Magaya system making it easy to create an error free process When working with the Magaya WMS Mobile application on the wireless hand held devices there are two types of movements available Informed Moves called a Move task Uninformed Moves called a Manual Move task Additional
402. t refer to export type shipments Or any combination of access For example if you want a user to be able to create and edit check Yes for both PERMISSIONS PERMISSIONS INTRODUCTION Click the Yes or No cell to allow or deny permission for members of that group Permissions for Accounting Groups membership Name Create Read Edit Delete Export We Checking Yes c pan ccountanta Ca Administrators C Limited Accounting Click in a table cell to change f yes no permission Apply these permissions to children In the Permissions dialog box check the box Apply these permission to chil dren if you want to make the permissions status apply to the folder and subfolders children under it For example apply permissions to the Accounting folder and all the subfolders under it Appl these permissions to children Accounting amp y Chart of Accounts Items and Services Invoices Invoice List Bills Bill List EF Payments EF Payment List ch Deposits Deposit List Checks Check List Applies the same permission to all subfolders under a main folder Leave the option unchecked if you want to set the permissions individually for each subfolder 67 PERMISSIONS PERMISSIONS INTRODUCTION Examples As a result of allowing a user to create but not edit that user will see limited functions on the toolbar for that transaction document or list All permissions avai
403. tailed report view filtered by item definition Crvena ten Demons Mando by Pat Miter Dotad gt Dates Custom T From a Woda To at De HAWC Cargo Company In and Out by Part Number Detailed aie April 1 through July 9 2012 Status Package Description Picea Length jin Height Width jin Weight bj Wolusree tt BAAI SF inch Rebar Cion Daco Tieg Co inciton bigning balance F in 4 00 0 08 nl i gari Sa ich Pieter Cuil i Sa OG fi cal 300 0 13 1 4 00 1 6 inventory ending balance 1 Af 444 Mke Airaa runnang hes a In and Out Detailed Filtered by item Definition 0 08 Dart iInventiory ending balance 105 AFITA Atole Spark Flug mwema beaminabalance 1I H Y x w a dat 411 IN AND OUT CARGO REPORTS IN AND OUT REPORTS This view enables the Filter option to filter the report by item definitions ltem Definition Filter Filter Type Match all conditions Match at least one condition Part Humber Description Model Package Client Manufactor 412 IN AND OUT CARGO REPORTS IN AND OUT REPORTS Detailed report filtered by Inventory Item gives you the option to filter by commodities Commodities Filter Filter Type Warehouse O Match at least one condition Shipper F O Number Consignee Sc TCC S N NCNNNNT amp Invoice Number Issued by ee a WHF Number Destination Agent fF CC ts C SC iT SUCUC HHU
404. te Picking Tasks from the pop up menu Sales Order List Status Number Date Employee Buper T Loading 40 ladaa Administrator Jeremy Clarka Loading 139 43 Administrator California Test CRE Feros T On Hane Administrator Julio Cruz T On Hanc dministrator Julio Cruz 64 Canceler Print Batch dministrator ABC Sporting G wu ln Transi Jamaica Distrib O Open dministrator Jamaica Distrib Create Shipment i Choose Columns Import Export 491 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE MULTIPLE PICK TASKS If you select SOs from the list the wizard opens and takes you to a screen to select the destination Multiple Pick Task Setup Destination Location Please select the destination location Specify destination location 15HIF Ww If you do NOT select SOs from the list the wizard opens and takes you to a screen that enables you to select the type of transactions Then click Next Multiple Pick Task Setup Order Source Please select one of the options below Sales Orders Cargo Releases Shipments 492 RELEASE CARGO WITH WMS MOBILE DEVICES CREATE MULTIPLE PICK TASKS In the next screen select the SOs Multiple Pick Task Setup Order Selection Please select the orders you would like to pick June 16 through December 13 2013 Status Number Date Buyer wl Loading 40 12 13 2013 Jeremy Clarkson a Loading 39 12 13 2013 California Test Cust
405. te range that you can change with a dropdown menu and the conditions of the date The following screenshot shows the Carrier and the text field that is available Advanced Filter w alabie Fieskche Selected Feki or Fe Booking I Text Pare J Alahan Bance USD Coroni CFS Humbe D Lomiai Dieta 2 Creation Dahe C Date Chelny Date Denon Dersi License Number Devers Name 2 Intermechate Corga Akker Te i If you select the condition Equals enter the full carrier name If you only have part of a name select Contains For example if you enter Dom in the text field the filter will only show carriers that contain those letters The terms Contains Data and Does Not Contain Data are to find blank fields or ones with data Then click the Add button The filter condition you just set up will be added to the filter list WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS ADVANCED FILTER You can add more conditions to refine the filter further The additional condi tion will appear below the resulting conditions D Date Fiter Change to OF Add AND J CI Delivery Date Drion Divert License Number Dires Home Tex 4A Al conditions AND Employee PRO Numba Advanced Filter Argel Fiehche Harre O Attachments O Balance USD i Condition CFS Nunten je CEEE Cana Commodi Description rund O Gean Date Selected Feki or Fi
406. tem go to the Commodity Classifications list gt Actions gt Update Commodity Classifications Commodity Magaya Explorer Are you sure you want to update the list of Commodity Classifications 9615190000 9615110000 361 4003500 361 4003400 961 4003000 9614002100 9613900000 9613801050 9613601010 ar Add JOOOOOOOO Try Classifications 52 COMBS HAIR SLIDES AND THE LIKE NESOI COMBS HAIR Import schedule B Codes PLAST FARTS OF PIF CIGAR OR CIG Export Codes EREUI aipe rain License Type Codes ROUGHLY SH MANUF PARTS OF LIG Choose Columns LIGHTERS NE TABLE LIGHTH ps P r a Ww Filter Actions Commodities in the code list include types of foods furniture textiles plastics metals glass chemicals vehicles footwear and many more Code mM 8712006000 O 8712002600 O 8712001070 O 8512100000 O 4013200000 Mm 4011500000 Description BICYCLES AND CYCLES MESO INCLUDING DELIVERY TE BICYCLES HAVING BOTH WHEELS EXCEEDING 63 25 CM BICYCLES HAVING BOTH WHEELS NOT EXCEEDING 63 2 LIGHTING OR ISUAL SIGNALING EQUIPMENT FOR BIC INNER TUBES OF RUBBER OF A KINO USED ON BICYC NEW PNEUMATIC TIRES OF RUBBER OF A KIND USED If a Schedule B code has a description of nesoi this means the item is Not Elsewhere Specified or Included This is Chapter 98 Special Classification Provisions The commodity number should not be used until a check has been made to determine wh
407. that is was assigned in the warehouse It also includes information such as who shipped the cargo who the carrier and supplier are the dimensions and charges The WR informs the customer that you are now in possesion of the cargo and it provides proof that the commodities listed on the WR are in the warehouse stated on the WR Entering the cargo into the Magaya Explorer also updates your inventory records This chapter explains the receiving process Cargo can be received in two ways By creating a WR on the PC and creating a Receive task and sending it to the WMS Mobile application on the handheld devices called Informed Receiving e Begin the Receiving process on the WMS Mobile handheld and perform an Uninformed Receiving task called a Manual Receive to create a WR for incoming items this process of Uninformed Receiving is also called Blind Receiving Also explained in this chapter is how to work with the tabs on the WR dialog box as you receive cargo and add charges photographs notes etc This chapter is organized with the following topics Create a Warehouse Receipt WR Commodities Add commodities working with the Commodities tab and dialog box Charges Add charges to the WR Events Add events to the WR e Attachments Attach documents files and photographs o Notes Add notes for in house viewing or notes for customers to see Actions Generate accounting transactions and print labels from t
408. the number or text in the field below the Find By radio buttons ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you enter text you can enter partial text For example if you are looking for Dell computers that you handled a month ago set the date range and enter the word Dell If you enter the word computers the list will display all the computers you handled not just Dell So if you handle cargo from more than one manufacturer enter that manufacturer name Use the Filter Button To view the commodities list by certain criteria use the Filter button The Filter button has two options Standard Filter This filter has a small set of criteria to filter your list by such as by Purchase Order PO number Warehouse Receipt number WR by part number port consignee and others e Advanced Filter This filter has many options for filtering your list To filter by date only use the Date Range options on the top of the list TASK 1 Click on the Filter button and select Advanced This screen opens Advanced Filter Avedsble Fields Sebeched Feld o Fiber st Billing Client Tent 2 Attachments m9 Balance USD Coreditior Jiling Clerk Equals Borrded wH bape CFS Number L Add J Cane Se eee ee Chargeable Weight b se Chage to OR Add PYM Agi OR Thirty Al All conditions AMD Corsignes Address i Cusione Erim Daba Dahe Desiplion of Conmnities Deshnahon Agert Desinalon Aperi Sudin D eshinahon Couri
409. the quantity The user will not see the system inventory 427 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY CREATE A COUNT SESSION AND COUNT TASKS 8 Option Count Selected Part Number Choose this option if you want to count by part number instead of by location Select the part number from the dropdown Create Count Task Count Session 0001 Count selected Part Number Park Number Count selected locations or zones Location Find Locations OO m 1 Fat 9 Option Count Selected Locations or Zones Choose this option to count all the items in a zone or in a location if you do not count by part number Select the zones or locations from the screen by clicking in the square next to the zone or location name You have the option to filter by empty or non empty locations You can also see the locations that have not been counted in the current session this is useful if you are doing a cycle count of your entire ware house and every time that you create a count task count the non counted locations 428 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY CREATE A COUNT SESSION AND COUNT TASKS 10 Click OK and a Task dialog box opens Task Task Dates Assinedt we 2K Dw 7 25 2012 4 30 00 PM Crestedty Iere Tavor Reminder y 7 25 2012 DN AZM 5 Task type Count WMS st Subject Count Items imn ard e Assign the task to an employee WMS Mobile user or leave it blank so any user can perf
410. tion Custom Code Description Definition Type Stage o one Default Zone Customer Length 0 00 iri Max Weight 0 00 lb Width 0 00 in Height 0 00 iri F Inactive Cancel Help Enter a code such as an abbreviation for the location When working with WMS Mobile the barcode on the location label must be the same as this code field Be sure to match these code lists when planning your warehouse Enter a description For example the warehouse location of the first row in the warehouse and the first section of the row might be Row 1 Section 1 The code can be R1S1 The Staging Area could have a code of STAGE The naming of the location codes and descriptions are determined by you Definition Select a definition for this location This is useful for picking putting away and replenishment operations This feature is available in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution and Magaya WMS See the topic Location Definitions for more Select the type of location from the dropdown Storage Receiving Shipping Quality Control Mobile or Other The location types Shipping and Quality Control are the only location types used in Pick and Load Tasks for the Magaya WMS Mobile application Select the zone from the dropdown Magaya software comes with one Default zone Note If you have not added any zones yet the How TO CREATE WAREHOUSE LOCATIONS STEPS dropdown will not have any options
411. tion Agent Bonded WH Type Entry Number Entry Date 117267201 H Click and drag to expand the dialog box Magaya software assigns a WR number to the WR that you are working on You can change this number if needed by typing over it Document numbering is set up in the Maintenance gt Configuration folder Magaya software automatically fills in the date time and the name of the employee who is creating the WR and fills in the Issued by field with your company name You can also receive cargo on behalf of other agents by selecting their name for the Issued By field The Issued by field can display your warehouse or a warehouse provider that you are using for this transaction The Destination agent field is optional If you enter a name in this field the agent will be able to view the WR if Magaya LiveTrack is enabled for the agent Magaya software enables creating Warehouse Receipts for bonded warehouses asecure facility in which imported dutiable merchandise can be stored for up to RECEIVE CARGO CREATE A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT GENERAL TAB 5 years without payment of Customs duties Select the type of bonded ware house Domestic Cargo is being transported domestically Bonded Cargo is under custody by the U S government and has not legally entered into a U S territory for consumption C F S Cargo is being transported to a Container Freight Station CFS G O A General Order G O type
412. tion by clicking the option select Template Templates Name Lowier W aybill Courier aybill di Test WAT Tas WA sdf Vehocle Receipt VehicleR eceipt sdf Warehouse Receipt Ve A_test for Vehicle sd Warehouse Receipt Val arehouse A ecespt dt a Warehouse Fecept 130240 WarehouseRecept_tuc Warehouse Receipt 13020 WarehouseRecept 130 Warehouse Receipt Bonded Vel aehouseReceptB onc Warehouse Receipt Detailed wW arehouseRecepD ets Warehouse Receipt Solidarity warehouseraceipt 2545 Warehoute Receipt Summanzed mag Wy arehouseAeceip Warehouse Recent Truck Loge arehouseHecept iuc q Ti P Link selected template to curent transaction Set selected template as default To group Part Numbers in a WR document choose the Warehouse Receipt Summarized template 339 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT PRINT LABELS Print Labels 340 To view the history of the WR such as a Pickup Order for this cargo at any time select the option History A dialog box opens listing all the transactions related to this cargo a History for Warehouse Receipt WYH 153 Type Name Date Bill ee Ue 242015 Invoice 191 08242015 Task Put Away pS 08707 2015 You can view a transaction by selecting it in the History dialog box The View button opens the dialog box for the transaction The Go To button takes you to the document To return to the WR use the Back button Extr
413. tion is available from the Actions button When viewing an invoice you can receive payment e na Cargo Release you can set it in transit or as delivered Magaya Explorer comes with different templates for forms such as WR or Pickup Order documents To select a template click on the arrow on the Actions button and choose Select Template WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE ACTIONS BUTTON Other functions found on Actions buttons include import or export of data and the option to choose the columns in a list To export data from your Magaya system into Microsoft Excel format select the Excel option from the dialog box select file format Please select the file Format that you would like to use when exporting Export ko AMIL J Export to CS HTML or EXCEL J Export to POF When you browse your folders to save the file save the file type as an Excel file xls Then click the Export button In reports such as the Balance Sheet view you can export the report as an Excel file also Other functions are Batch printing statistics and more Click on the menu options to explore the possibilities For details on these functions see the Index 137 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE DETAIL BUTTON The Detail Button The Detail button opens a new panel in any list to show more details about the transactions entities or employees Depending on which list you are viewing the details available will c
414. tions first Fullest to emptiest or to the emptiest locations first Emptiest to fullest Height Highest location may require a forklift to reach or fill the lowest ground level locations first Weight Heaviest to lightest the result is the locations that can handle the heaviest items will be filled first or Lightest to heaviest On the next screen you can move individual locations in the sequence The order of the sequence is top to bottom the first location in the list equals the first location in the sequence To move a location click it to highlight it Click the Up or Down button to move the location This screen also includes the option to apply this sequence to the process of Wagaya Warehouse Promotion Wizard Manually Sort Locations In this screen you can organize the locations in the optimal sequence Locations will be given priority From top T bo bottom Mobile locations ars ignored i Status O Empty L Empty I Empty LI Empty I Empty Tl Empty LI Empty oO Empty O Empty 4 Code AZPICKL AFP TICKS AZQCI AFREC AREF I AZFEP Z ASHIF TOR ATSTOR Descripion Pick Small Pick Large Qualty Control 1 AZ Receiving Az Replenish 1 AZ Replenish 2 AZ Ship AF Storage 1 AZ Storage 2 rit E Put away sequence is the same Type Picking Picking Quality Control Receving Replenishment Replenishment Shipping Stor age Storage putting away items and of picking them 228
415. to g pen Courier Cost Yeg 1 00 54 39 UPS Air oy g Open CourerFee ves 1 00 65 27 Bill s Storage Units se Delete Totals Expense Income Profit A See cee USD 54 39 USD 65 27 USD 10 58 E Delete The system asks you to confirm the charges 8 Confirm Accounting Generation The following rareactions were generaled please verify them and click on OF to add the tarcactions bo your accounting Othensice cick on Cancel to abort ihe operation and fix the problem Type Number Applied to Date Ennpiopee Acoounil Nama Debit US0 Credit USD Ba Bil ra Fede Ground Tizer Admnetrion Accounts Popable 12500 mease 182 Became Bike Shop 11 26 2014 Admiretiate Acoourls Recerv 155 00 Confirm accounting transactions Date for Transactions 11 27 2014 Eapante l rican Tatal USD 145 00 Cancel Hep The topic Generate Accounting Transactions from a Cargo Release covers this process in detail 469 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE EVENTS TAB Events Tab To view all events related to this transaction click in the checkbox at the bottom of the screen Add or edit events as needed Feb 04 2015 02 17 59 Feb O4 2015 02028 Show events from all related transactioris Details for entering new events are covered in the topic Events 470 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE POD TAB POD Tab To require a Proof of Delivery click the
416. to File gt Print Pallet gt IDs Print Pallet IDs Printer Setup Name HP Laserjet P2015 Series PCL 6 Print Setup Poort T5001 Pallets Humber of Pallet IDs Cancel Help 341 WHAT ACTIONS CAN I PERFORM WITH A WAREHOUSE RECEIPT PRINT LABELS If you do not want the tracking number to print on labels for items that have part numbers set this option in Maintenance gt Configuration gt Labels Configuration m Labels Automatic HO as Charge Windows Standard Printer Bi O Zebra Printer Form Filling Print warehouse item description Print company informatiar Print consignee name Options for all users Do not create tacking numbers for items with part numbers Check the option Do not create tracking numbers for items with part numbers This prevents the tracking number from appearing on the label for companies that want to identify items by part number when working with the Magaya WMS Mobile but need to print labels with other information about the items 342 Details Panel In the WR List click the Detail button to open a new panel Warehouse Receipt List Status T On Hand T ln Process T On Hand T In Process T On Hand T ln Process 7 ln Process T Delivered T Delivered T Delivered T On Hand T On Hand T On Hand T In Transit a In Process lt a Add Number WH 101 wH 100 wH 99 wH 38 wH 97 W H 9B wH 35 wH 34 wH 93 wH 92 w
417. to select next time you perform this operation E Location Definition ES Options Item Definitions Quantity Mame Location Type Select Dimensions or add new ones Storage imensions Description Length dnt width Gn Height in oo 00x30 00 70 00 in ao 00 30 00 70 00 oo 00x60 0070 00 in 25 00 60 00 70 00 AE A EA Raa To add new dimensions click the green plus sign in the dropdown toolbar Enter the length width and height of the location Click OK to save it Dimensions Dimensions Length Width Height Level Select a level The Lowest level is the level that is closest to the floor This is for informational purposes only Maximum weight Enter a maximum weight that this location can hold Special Options This is for informational purposes only Check the following options that apply to this location 212 LOCATION DEFINITIONS STEPS TO DEFINE LOCATIONS e Needs equipment For example if this location requires a vertical order picker a high lift forklift or other device to reach items check this box Allows loose cargo Allows repacked items Can mix repacked items 4 Item Definitions Quantity tab This enables you to connect Part Numbers or Item Definitions to the location This tells the system to put away this 213 LOCATION DEFINITIONS STEPS TO DEFINE LOCATIONS part number in this location Ifa location is full the syste
418. ton Create reports by clicking the Actions button and select the option such as the Reports gt In and Out Summary In and Out cargo reports are covered in detail in the Knowledgebase topic How to Manage and Move Warehouse Items and in the Magaya Supply Chain Solution Operations Manual 184 IPI 25 1MO01 a7 500 14 T ORORANGE 14 TORLEMONLI i4TORGLACIER L 150 IT 203 TSHIRT TSO K001 HAT ERVELOSS EZZ IEVYERAGE 2 IEVYERAGE 1 DLE 750 M199 FAA CREATE AN INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITION INVENTORY ITEM DEFINITIONS LIST Stock ltem Laptop computer HF 125 HF 125 sles Mell Other Reports b Kit tern Stock ltem Reports d Stock Item View Inventory Stack ltem View Arriving terms Stock Item stock Item Adjust Accounting for Inventory Deco fr Stock Item Stock Item Import Tropical Stock ltem Export Stock Item Stock ltem Choose Columns Stock Item hace iter Update quantity of pieces ee Reset Lead Times Stock Item Stock ltem Define Bill of Materials Cheb Ror r 7 amp Add Edit Delete gt 7 Detail Filter Actions Detail button Click the Detail button to open a new panel In that panel you can select to display more details such as attachments SKUs and more Click the Detail button again to close the panel Configure Columns Click the Actions button to access the Choose Columns dialog box whe
419. transaction use the Find button The Find button has an arrow with these options Transactions Quick Find Entity Finder Find Vehicle Folder and Find Next Magaya Network Accounting Reports Options Help 1 gt 8 R taal z i e 2 lf Le Frink Network Send 7 gt G i Transactions Ctrl F H H FP 7 x pap a amp Add Edit Delete Quick Find Nn Q Zoom Entity Finder Ctrl E Find Vehicle jo Company Folder Alt F3 Find next F3 7 Terrace ickup Numbe T2 Creation Mate T im When you click the Find button a search box appears The same search box appears when you click the arrow on the side of the Find button and select Transactions See the screenshot below Find Type All elements v Go Find From 1 1 200 To 622 200 w o Quick Find Find by Transaction Number Text Test potting sail Results Type Name Date Warehouse Receipt w H 56 03272010 Warehouse Receipt WhH 5 Os 24 2010 Warehouse ben Potting oll O31 2 2010 Warehouse ltem Potting sal Os 24 2010 Warehouse ltem Potting oil Us 244 2010 Warehouse bem Potting Soil Organic Os 244 2010 Warehouse hem Potting Soil Organic U3 24 2010 Warehouse ltem Potting sail U3 24 2010 9 elements found You can move the search box to the side of your Magaya Explorer and affix it there by clicking on the Dock button with the green arrow pointing left To 132 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS THE FIND BUTTON un dock it c
420. ts or Pickup Orders by using the Notes tab in the transaction Warehouse Receipt Shipper onsigee Supplier Camer Commodities Changes Events Attachments Notes interme Les Click to select a clause Enter the note by typing the notes field Click on the button to select a clause that has been set up in your Magaya system Add Clauses to Use in Notes You can save clauses in Magaya Explorer for notes that you add frequently to transactions For example you may have a clause such as Consolidiate per the cargo manifest that you add to every shipment Save this clause or any others in your Clauses List and it will be available for use every time you need it Clauses can be added while you are working on a WR or by going to the Main tenance folder and opening the Configuration option 331 NOTES AND INTERNAL NOTES ADD CLAUSES TO USE IN NOTES Click on the button to select a clause that has been set up in your Magaya system Warehouse Receipt Canisii Commodities Changer Events Allechmeris Notes irlemal Hotar pa Chock to select a causa Clause Lrsi Motes Consokdshon as per attached cargo manifest Click the Add button in the Clause List dialog box A new dialog box opens to add the clause information Clause Information Pe Category PSS Clause Text s Enter the name of the clause e Select a category for the clause such as Bill or Cargo Release To add to this dropd
421. tton Carriers General Address Biling Address Othe Addresses Contacts Land Rates Changes Pmt SCAC Number Og Select Land Carriers Filter UPS Find Available Codes Description Select UNITED PARCEL SERVICE OF CANADA LTD UNITED PARCEL SERVICE SECOND DAY SE UPS EXPRESS CRITICAL SURFACE UPS FREIGHT SERVICES INC UPST AGING IMC UPS EXPRESS CRITICAL CH amp RTER MAINTENANCE FOLDER CARRIERS Save the information by clicking the OK button in the Carrier dialog box Air Carriers and Known Shippers If an air carrier is passenger only check the box on the Airline tab in the Carrier profile dialog box Only cargo from a Known Shipper can be loaded onto a passenger only flight or a passenger only carrier The Known Shipper checkbox is on the Pmt Terms tab You can assign flight numbers in the Airline tab Carriers General Address Billing Address Uther Addresses Contacts Airline Rates Che IATA Account Number Airline Code Bi Airline Frefis Air way Bill Murha ALa E Number Passenger Flight 208 Mo 4456 Mo 456 Yes In your Carriers list to view which shippers are Known Shippers select the column header from the Actions gt Choose Columns option B Carriers Name Entity ID Type ui TACA Carriers S42 COFA COMPANIA PANAMENA DE Carriers ti DELTA A
422. u Magaya WMS Mobile 9 Gs Gur 7 06 Magaya 5 2 5618 275113 r j Warehouse Management System Receive tl Fut Away Move 1 re LEJ Picle 1 Load Count s amp Messages View Manual 4 Receive Manual Manual Put Guided Put i The Receive icon shows the number 3 below it indicating that there are three Receive tasks pending 349 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING 2 When you click the Receive icon the Tasks appear View them in the Task List or the view the details of each one in the Detail tab Receive MS iafl 6 16 15 Sent By Administrator Number WH 145 Client Items Est Pallets j4 Location RECB Receiving You can also scroll through the tasks by clicking the arrows on the bottom of the screen to scroll through the available tasks to find the task to perform The Detail screen shows the task type who created it the date the Ware house Receipt number the client or customer and the quantity of items The Est Pallets field will only show a number when the Inventory Item Definition for this item contains the amount of items required to make a pallet The system will estimate how many pallets you will need to create 350 RECEIVE CARGO WITH MAGAYA WMS MOBILE INFORMED RECEIVING based on the quantity of items received This example shows that a loca tion was specified when the task was created Cl
423. umns Import Export gt Add Filter Actions The Group List opens Employees Group List Group List Name Description Ce Importers Importers are users who have access to Importation they can C Checking Users that can create checks and make deposits HS Account Payable Users that can enter bills and make bills payments ES Account Recevable Users that can enter invoices and receive payments Wf Warehousemen Warehousemen are users who only have access to the warek PERMISSIONS How TO SET PERMISSIONS 3 Click the Add button in the Group List to add a new group Enter a group name and description information EO General Description The description and name can be edited later if needed 4 Click the OK button to save the information and exit the dialog box A maximum of 32 groups can be created By default Magaya software creates a group called Everyone in all folders To restrict access to certain folders you will need to edit this default by removing Everyone from the folders that need to be restricted Steps to remove Everyone from all the folders Go to the folder Click File gt Permissions e Click on Everyone Click the box for Apply these permissions to children Click on the Remove button and OK Note Magaya software comes with the default groups of Importers and Exporters We recommend that you do not delete or modify these default gro
424. un the schedule This example shows the first Monday of every month Click Save to save this schedule Click OK in the Task Scheduling dialog box Click Save in the Configuration menu for the WMS screen Result The system will generate Move Tasks according to the replenishment schedule Note Replenishment will only be done on locations that have been modified i e items have been picked from them not from dormant locations without activity 420 REPLENISHMENT DEFINE REPLENISHMENT IN LOCATION DEFINITIONS Define Replenishment in Location Definitions The Replenishment Schedule uses information in the Location Definitions To add definitions to a warehouse location open the Location from the Loca tions list Click the Definitions dropdown menu Select a definition If defini tions do not exist yet then create them by clicking the plus sign button in the dropdown menu s toolbar For more details see the topic Location Defini tions Fulfill Replenishment Move Tasks When the Replenishment Schedule runs the system creates Move Tasks for the WMS Mobile users The locations eligible for replenishment are the Picking and Replenishment locations Notes Be sure to configure the WMS Mobile users in the Configuration menu and on the Employee profile s User tab The process for replenishment begins after items are received and put away See the topic on Receiving Cargo Put Away and Move Tasks
425. unting them 43 CONFIGURE WMS WMS MOBILE CONFIGURATION 44 When you select the equipment from the Mobile Location dropdown menu the system links the two which enables the system to save the progress of items as they move through the warehouse The WMS Mobile user will be able to select this piece of equipment on the wireless handheld screen and scan items to it For more details on counting or picking items see Chapters 12 and 13 of the Magaya WMS Operations Manual WMS Mobile Users Click on this button to view a list of the employees who will use the Magaya WMS Mobile application Note To add an employee to this list go to the Maintenance gt Employees section of Magaya Explorer In the Employee profile go to the User tab and check Allow WMS Mobile Access When you double click an employee s name in the WMS Mobile Users list a dialog box opens with the following settings WMS Mobile User Employee John Smith Software Language English wt Permissions Receive Move Pick Count Load Printer configuration for labels Template Recerving Label 4x5 k Printer configuration for Packing Slips Template Packing Slip Print Setup Note Configure the printer from the Communication Sener computer e If you check the box Ask for user identification location equipment the system will ask the employee what location they will work in and what CONFIGURE WMS WMS MOBILE CONFIGURATION equipm
426. unts It is not displayed on this screenshot To enable the option Allow automatic update for a charge check the box If you make a change to a commodity such as the weight the charge for the new weight will be calculated and updated automatically Uncheck the box if you do not want this automated If you check the box to show charges in documents the charges will show in operations transactions and documents such as WRs and Pickup Orders and will be visible to customers The charges will always appear in bills and invoices even if you do not check this box Sample Scenarios for Adding Charges If you are a freight forwarder and you are creating a Warehouse Receipt you add a freight expense charge and apply it to the trucking company because they are charging you and you need to pay them Add an income freight charge when you are billing the customer so they can pay you if you pick up the cargo for them An income charge or expense charge is applied to the customer for services you offer such as crating or documentation Adding Charges The charges entered in a WR are integrated into the Accounting system in Magaya Explorer and will appear on invoices bills etc as applicable when the accounting transactions are generated Use the Generate button in the WR or the Liquidation feature in a shipment to generate charges For more details see the section on Liquidation in Chapter 14 Creating Shipments in the Magaya Ca
427. ups 2 Assign Employees to Groups 1 Goto Maintenance gt Employees 2 Double click an employee s name to open their profile dialog box 71 PERMISSIONS How TO SET PERMISSIONS 3 Click the Permissions tab Employee General Address Biling Address Uther Addresses User Permissions Select the groups to which this employee belongs to Name Description C Importers Importers are users who have access to Importatio HS Account Pavable Users that can enter bills and make bills payments We Account Recetvable Users that can enter invoices and receive paymenl C E vernone Users in this group have minimum access only Exporters Exporters are users who have access to Exportatio C Limited Accounting The group only access to certain accounting This 4 Click the Add button A new dialog box opens called Select Group Click on a group to highlight it and to make an employee a member of that group Add as many groups as is applicable for the employee Add one group at a time Select a group to assign an employee to a group Select Group Name Description C Checking Users that can create checks and make deposits We Warehousemen Warehousemen are users who only have access to the Ww We Accountants Accountants are users who have access to Accounting We Administrators Administrators have full access to all the system resources Operations z to quotes bookings warehousing shipments C Quotations access to u
428. urce Info Mame Manufacturer Family Version Okher Info InterFace Source Family Manufacturer Twain Data Source On WI Hewlett Packard WTG HP Scanjet 3970 Hewlett Packard Twain Data Source On WIA 0 Protocol 1 3 26 June 2000 WO Interface by Windows Picture Source Document Source Click on the scanner you want to use Note You must have the scanner connected to your computer The information about that scanner will populate the fields in the dialog box Click on the checkboxes Picture Source and Document Source The Picture Source option acquires images from a camera web cam or scanner For example you may have a web cam set up in your warehouse to photograph the cargo as it arrives It will save the scan in an image file format If you want to use the scanner just for scanning documents click on the checkbox Document Source The Document Source option acquires 327 ATTACHMENTS ADD ATTACHMENT FROM SCANNER 328 4 5 documents you scan such as Commercial Invoices that arrive with the cargo The document is saved as a PDF The source assigned will determine what dialog boxes you will see in the next steps If you have one scanner check both boxes for it Select Image capture devices Manufacturer Hewlett Fackard Source Mame Source Family WTO HP Scanjet 3970 Twain Data Source Or WIA Source Info 2 Mame WIA HP Scanjet 3970 Manufacturer Hewlett Packard
429. use the Accounting Wizard Accounting Wizard Welcome to the Accounting Wizard The following steps will guide you through Choosing the Company Fiscal Year Setting up the Chart of Accounts Setting up the thems and Services Entering the opening balances for customers vendors etc h b a A Click on the Next button to start 1 Goto the File menu and select Accounting Wizard 2 Click the Next button to start the wizard 3 Select the month that you want to assign as the beginning of your fiscal year This is required to calculate earnings for the year 4 Add or edit the Chart of Accounts as needed The software provides a default list of accounts If you need to add an account click the Add button and enter the information To edit an existing account click on the account and click the Edit button It is recommended that this infor mation be entered in the wizard so you can use the accounting features in the Magaya software Also enter opening balances for accounts that you need such as petty cash capital stock or sales tax credit 5 Add or edit the Items and Services as needed The software provides a default list of items and services Click the Add button to add anew item or service Click on an existing item and click the Edit button to make changes 6 Add or edit opening balances by clicking on the Add or Edit buttons for your forwarding agents customers carriers Salespersons warehouse providers and v
430. utton to clear a filter Then the Unfilter button will be grayed out Columns e To move the columns to change the order from left to right click on a column header and drag it to the place where you want it to appear 107 WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS WORKING WITH THE LIST VIEW 108 To customize the columns in the list to view only the columns you want to see click on the Actions button e You can also widen or narrow the columns by clicking on the line that separates the columns and drag the line to the left or right Additional customizations of columns is available from the Actions button gt Choose Columns For example you can change the date format by selecting the date and choosing the option in the dropdown menu Column Settings Name Status Mumber Type Destination Description Rename Field Type Date Visible Word Wrap F Division Name F Destination Code ah Width 334 Align Left we Marv2s72001 12 31 00 ea Mar 2001 21 34 00 eof Oar 2001 0372372001 da Add Columns You can also choose columns inside a transaction on the Commodities tab For example in a Warehouse Receipt or Shipment right click an item in the Commodity List and select Choose Columns Learn more about working with columns in the section Related Columns Sorting in Lists To sort the items in the list click on the column heading For example if
431. ve 1 Pick Load Count 1 2 H S y Messages View Manual Manual Equipment Receive 5 Move Te T T D Put Away Measure a A Pictures Exit Manual Put Guider Put Away Away 19020 WMSUser Scanner Enabled Magaya WMS Mobile EE 2 Scan or enter the location of the items or the pallet if the items are on a pallet to move Scan Scan one of the following al 4 location 4 pallet Barcode RECA EEN can 08 A Note If your system has a default Receiving Location set then this screen will be skipped To set go to Configuration gt WMS gt Operations Settings 391 How TO MANAGE amp MOVE WAREHOUSE ITEMS TASK REPORTS Task Reports 392 3 Scan the item or items to move from the location you entered in Step 2 The screen will fill up with the item information 4 Atthe destination location scan the destination location You can also place the items in a pallet and scan the pallet ID for this step The Manual Move is completed When moving expiration date controlled items from one location to another you may be prompted to pick the specific expiration date you are working with This will happen when more than one expiration date is kept in the same loca tion Pick the desired expiration date being picked and click OK The system will tell you how many items are in that location with that expiration date On the PC reports can be created in the Tas
432. ve unless the item is a container with items inside it The Scan Button Used with a handheld scanner to scan bar codes This topic will be covered in the Warehouse Receipts section of the course e The Repack button Repacking is typically done in the warehouse after items are received and they need to be repacked to be shipped out by grouping them inside another package type or a container 257 Pick UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB Additional options are available by right clicking an item to open a pop up menu E Pickup Order me Carriers Commodities Events Attachments Status Pieces Type Description Add E Arnvirig Renorts ader Sen Right click item Choose Columns Edit for pop up menu Export ee History l Detall Add Copies Pallet ID Unpack Print Packing Sip Print AIl Packing slips Print Label Get PU Cari On Hold By right clicking you can change the columns in the Commodity tab create reports and other functions How to Add a Container to a Pickup Order 258 PicK UP CARGO CREATE A PICKUP ORDER COMMODITIES TAB If you need to create a Pickup Order for a container click the Add Cont button on the Commodity tab This container will include commodities and details about the commodities inside the container Container Containes AMS Extemal Tract T pa Aving Container
433. vent each time for each transaction you are creating that you want the Event to appear in The checkbox Include in Tracking is checked by default This means this event will be visible to the customer or agent in the online tracking Live Track Click OK to save 322 ATTACHMENTS INTRODUCTION TO ATTACHMENTS Attachments Introduction to Attachments Attachments such as photographs and scanned documents can be added to transactions in Magaya Explorer by browsing for them on the computer or directly via a scanner IMPORTANT We recommend optimizing your database to help your system handle large files better Go to the Configuration menu option gt Maintenance amp Performance It is recommended that you perform the Recycling options in this Configuration menu Check the box to extract heavyweight data to the Blobs folder which is where the photographs are stored These are stored outside your database they are not automatically backed up when you perform a backup For details and steps see Chapter 8 in the Magaya Software Custom ization Manual Maintenance Attachments amp POF Options Carriers e Forwarding Agents Warehouse Providers Customers Vendors Salespersons Contacts E Employees 4 Ports at Countries oF Accounting Optimize image for the Web EEE E Use Be colors For POF background image CEE Maintenance and Perfor cc Recycling Al
434. vides a brief overview of the functions available in each Magaya Network Folder The Magaya Network folder contains two subfolders e Community Messages The Community folder allows you to search for other companies that are using the Magaya software There are three functions in the Community folder File Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Shipment Magaya Network Accounting aa s Be D P Back Aur Ocean Ground pri k Page One Community d Magaya Network e a Community nfl ai Messages Company Profile search Invitations E i Tasks Note The toolbar in your Magaya Explorer will have different functions depending on what Magaya product you re using For example the WMS program is shown here which has different transport options than the Magaya Cargo System 94 FOLDERS AND SUBFOLDERS MAGAYA NETWORK FOLDER The buttons on your toolbar may differ from the screenshots depending on which Magaya product you have HWC Cargo Company Magaya Explorer Fie Edit Sales Operations Maintenance Magaya Network Accounting Reports Options GO a GB Bt Bs Magaya Network Sa Community Back Pickup Receive Release o Search Invitations al Hol Messages Company Profile J Tasks ia Quotations The first screen in the Community folder is your Company Profile Here you can edit or add information about your company You can adda description of your company that others
435. view Count Tasks go to the Tasks folder 444 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT Count Reasons This shows the default list of reasons for problems with counts To add reasons click the Add button Enter the reason name and description in the dialog box Count Reason List Name Description Concealed Shortage Concealed Shortage Concealed Damage Concealed Damage Lost Lost Missing Missing Damaged Damaged Count Reason General _ CS Filter Actions Close e View Found Items This option opens a list of any Found items also called the found repository From the Actions button in this list you can create reports choose columns import or export data see the history or make a copy You can also see the Pallet ID print a packing slip or print all packing slips a View Lost Items This option opens a list of any Lost items the lost repos itory From the Actions button in this list you can create reports choose columns import or export data see the history or make a copy You can also see the Pallet ID print a packing slip or print all packing slips Perform an Inventory Adjustment The inventory adjustment process creates the needed accounting transactions in the system so the Balance Sheet shows the assets correctly It can be done 445 CHAPTER 12 COUNTING INVENTORY PERFORM AN INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT from different places in the Ma
436. warehouse If that s done then you re ready to start sending tasks to the hand helds to put away items pick or replenish items See each of these topics for details on the procedures See also the Directed Operations Getting Started topic for a list of all related topics Replenishment Introduction to Inventory Replenishment To maintain inventory levels it s important to keep inventory picking locations full of items so they are available to fulfill orders without delays The Magaya system enables you to set up a schedule to replenish locations based on criteria you define The scheduling will create Move Tasks for the WMS Mobile users in the warehouse 220 REPLENISHMENT CONFIGURE REPLENISHMENT SCHEDULE The replenishment schedule uses information set up in the Inventory Item Definitons such as any LIFO FIFO criteria for an item and the system also uses Location Definitions If you do not have definitions added to your locations do that first See the topic Location Definitions for steps Configure Replenishment Schedule 1 To configure the schedule for replenishment go to Maintenance gt Configu ration gt WMS 2 Click the tab Directed Operations 3 Check the box to enable replenishment Configuration 7 WS General Inventory Adjustment WHS Mobile Directed Operations Replenishment Enable inventory replenishment i Replenishment schedule ii Puk Oia Magaya Express Link
437. warehouses in your system You can select any warehouse zone in your Magaya system and define it as a separate warehouse and define its sequence with the wizard If you don t have warehouse zones set up in your system yet or need information on creating them see the section on setting up warehouse zones first The Warehouse Promotion Wizard is found in the Warehouse Inspector Right click a warehouse zone and select Promote to Warehouse Warehouse Inspector g ia x Y xf halowe Find Location Find Items Filter Warehouse details Locations All c i Tucson AZ wH pU Ae Promote to Warehouse LI AF Right click the icon NOTE Make sure you don t have filter applied on the locations inside the zone you want to define as a warehouse 226 MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES MULTIPLE WAREHOUSES USING THE WAREHOUSE PROMOTION WIZARD Follow the prompts in the wizard starting with the first screen Magaya Warehouse Promotion Wizard Welcome to the Warehouse Promotion Wizard This wizard will assist you in optimizing the locations in your warehouse You will be guided through High level organization of locations Inidyidual location ordering Optionally setting up an additional sequence Click on Khe WMext butkon ko start lt Back next gt J cowo Hep Click to the next screen to begin the wizard This screen enables you to select a high level method of sorting the locations in the warehouse I
438. with a Quotation are To view the history of the Quotation select the History menu option A dialog box opens listing all the transactions related to this quotation If you create a Booking or other transaction from this quotation that history will appear in the History list Extra Info In the menu History is in bold this means this is the default action if you just click the Actions button instead of the arrow on the side of the button The Actions button in all the Magaya screens functions in a similar way Reports You can create reports about the quotations by selecting the option in the Actions button when you are in the Quotations List view not the document view Query Rates This option enables you to run a query of all the selling rates in your system to see the best price See the section Query Rates for details Show Related Object This will take you to the next transaction created from this Quotation For example if you create a Warehouse Receipt WR from this Quotation click this option from the Actions button and it will take you to that WR Set This Quotation as Lost Use this option if the customer does not accept an Open Quotation If a quotation is set as Lost a checkmark appears next to this option in the Actions button options The status of the quotation is set to Lost and the icon becomes red To recover a lost quotation click on the option in the Actions button option The check mark will b
439. xt Find Find what Find only on record code and name O Match Case Cancel View Click to view any item you select the location definition or the Inventory Item Definition dialog box 465 RELEASE CARGO CREATE A CARGO RELEASE SELECT THE CARGO TO RELEASE e Configure Click to change the columns shown for the WRs the items or per location If viewing the WRs the Configure button gives you the option to change the columns for the WR or the item Warehouse Inventory Locations Scan Fill in reverse order Makal 3 Tomatoes 12 00x12 00x6 00n 15 a0 3 2 Electronics Depot LI 2 2 HP Laptop 22 00k2T 00x8 00in 5 Fiesse Filter Filter x Find Find Choose Warehouse Receipts columns View Choose tems columns E A dialog box of Column Settings opens The columns shown depend on the list you view Explore the options to configure the view to your prefer ences E Colurnn Settings Ei Mumber it Down al Shipper Text Consignee T ext Status Text Date Date Field Type Text ME dB Text endaiaintaea F Visible Supplier Text Carrier Text Lo Word Wrap Warehouse Provider Text vidte FO T E Employee Text Destination Agent Text Align Left Pieces Integer C weight Ib Decimal M i PRO Nimher Tut ce Add Columns Y Cancel Help r
440. y enter the item information and click OK to save it Then right click on the item in the Commodity tab Select Add Copies 5 Warehouse Receipt Supplier Carer Commodities Charges Events Attachm Status Fackage Description Part Humber Pieces On Hand Box isto choi ET 12 d Reports Choose Columns Right click the item Export History Add Copies N Fallet ID Print Packing Sip Print All Packing slips Print Label On Hold Totals Y Oramo EE T OT IL Pon T IO Enter the quantity of copies you want in the dialog box The system will add the copies to the WR Edit each line item by opening it and changing the Pieces field to 1 on the General tab Type in the serial number in the Serial field on the Iden tification tab Click OK to save Be sure to edit each item this way for every copy that you created This is the manual process of saving serial numbers in the system Also on the Identification tab of the Commodity dialog box is a field for an Invoice Number The invoice number comes from the seller of the item If you have the same invoice number for all the items you can enter this at the WR level Otherwise you can enter it per item seperately Only enter an invoice number if you have one for the item not for the whole WR Note In LiveTrack your customers will see the serial numbers grouped under a plus sign They must click the plus
441. y replenishment Replenishment schedule zE Puk Away Define the default maxsimum capacity of a single put away bask Specify maximum weight 0 00 Kilogram ka v Specify maximum volume 0 00 Cubic meterim 4 Specify maximum number of pieces 0 See the topic Directed Operations Getting Started in the Magaya Knowledge base found in Page One the welcome screen of your Magaya software Click the Save or Reset button 47 CONFIGURE WMS DIRECTED OPERATIONS CONFIGURATION 48 CHAPTER 5 INITIAL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION INTRODUCTION TO THE STARTUP WIZARD Chapter 5 Initial Software Configuration Introduction to the Startup Wizard In this section you will learn how to set up your Magaya software after you install it You will learn how to use the Startup Wizard to set up your company information and the Accounting Wizard to set up your accounting information how to make changes to information how to set employee permissions and access to the different functions in the software Magaya software uses wizards to help you set up information about your company your customers and other details The information is saved and made available for performing tasks such as creating Warehouse Receipts invoices shipping documents and other transactions Also see Chapter 5 of this manual for a description of the Maintenance folder and entering your company information there Why Use the Wizards Using
442. y that is sold and included in Sales Orders To calculate the total quantity of inventory you have available to sell start with the number of pieces and add arriving pieces subtract Requested Pieces and subtract Requested Arriving Pieces 407 REPORTS INVENTORY REPORTS MANAGING ITEMS WITH INVENTORY REPORTS 408 In this example there are a total of 55 Pieces on hand 458 Arriving Pieces 4 Requested Pieces and 1 Requested Arriving Piece The total pieces available to sell are 508 oe ee gt t x a ha as roared Syine Pind etre Tak Farei Paia Dereyi Btmiel Tiren are dochore Prat rh Bigpad lF bopi Ca Tj Diiia I Taek Lefn il r Tih Dirrie bhii Lii im i aih imi Samide 0 0 55 458 4 1 508 To view the inventory for any individual item select the item from the list and right click on it or go to Actions gt View Inventory This shows what is on hand for this part number To view details of inventory that is arriving select the item and right click on it or go to Actions gt View Arriving Items This shows what is arriving for this part number This option is only active for items with quantities greater than zero This will display the status of the item a description package type dimensions and other information Reports can also be made from this view also The totals are dynamic they reflect changes in quantities as the items are received or released IN AND OUT CARGO REPORTS
443. you click on the Status column heading the items such as WRs will be grouped together by status of Pending Delivered In Transit In Process At Destination or On Hand in the warehouse The Number column groups by letters and WORKING WITH DOCUMENT AND LIST VIEWS RELATED COLUMNS numbers when you click on the Number column header For example all WRs that begin with the number 2 are grouped as shown here Status Number T ln Process 2 yl In Process 20 W Delivered 2 T On Hand T In Process ee T In Process 23 yl ln Process ed T In Process 25 F In Process 26 Right click on an item in a list to access a pop up menu for that item This menu has many of the same options as the Actions button Status The icons for commodities in lists indicate the status of the commodity Related Columns Yellow is In Process or Ordered Aqua is On Hand Purple is Loaded Light Green is In Transit Dark Green is Arriving Red is Received for example a shipment is Received when it arrives at the port Blue is Delivered W Empty T Arvirig 2 Pending T Un Hand y In Process T ln Transit T At Destination T Delivered Magaya software gives you the option to add more columns to your list views to customize them so you can see the information you need You can choose from any columns related to the transaction you are working on For example if you are in the Warehouse Receipt List you can choose column

- Magaya Corporation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents